Skip to main content

Full text of "Peace, power, and plenty"

See other formats


BF 
639 

CO  p.  2 

I;:arden 

- 

Southern  Branch 
of  the 

University  of  California 

Los  Angeles 

Form  L-1 


-  Tiriltf '.'  agg-^       -     -^ 


This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below 


FEB  1  1 1924 


\     APR    14  1924 

i     /^UG5       1924 
DEC  3     19^4  - 


JUL  3  0  I92f 


iDOV  2  9  19# 


.li^M 


^^ 


^^^ 


vw 


^- 


APR  1 0  1935 


Form  L-9-2m  7,'22 


•fa^^ 


PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 
BY  ORISON  SWETT  MARDEN 


:,Z4 


Innka  bg  (J^rtann  ^m?tt  Murhtn 

HE   CAN   WHO    THINKS    HE    CAN 

i2mo,  By  mail  ^i.io 

EVERY  MAN  A  KING;    or,  MIGHT 
IN    MIND    MASTERY 

i2ino,  By  mail  $i.io 

THE    OPTIMISTIC    LIFE 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  net  j^i.25 

PUSHING     TO     THE     FRONT;     or, 
SUCCESS  UNDER  DIFFICULTIES 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  ;8i.50 

RISING     IN      THE      WORLD;      or, 
ARCHITECTS    OF    FATE 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  ^1.50 

THE   SECRET   OF   ACHIEVEMENT 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  $1.50 

SUCCESS    NUGGETS 

i6mo,  net  ^0.50 

TALKS   WITH    GREAT    WORKEK.S 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  J1.50 

THE    YOUNG    MAN 

ENTERING    BUSINESS 

i2mo,  with  portraits,  net  $1.25 

CHARACTER  OPPORTUNITY 

CHEERFULNESS  IRON    WILL 

GOOD    MANNERS  ECONOMY 

THE   POWER  OF   PERSONALITY 


SIAIENOUMM-SaOUL, 
iios  RHQSUBS,  cam. 


^ 


Pl^tttg 


BY 


ORISON    SWETT    MARDEN 

Author  of 

'Every  Man  a  King,"   "Pushing  to  the  Front,"  etc.,  and 

Editor  of  "Success  Magazine" 


'*  Your  ideal  is  a   prophecy  of 
what  you  shall  at   last   unveil." 


7^2,^-7 


NEW     YORK 
THOMAS    Y.    CROWELL   &   CO. 

PUBLISHERS 


i  J   t  t    *  1  ' 


Copyright,  1909, 
BY  ORISON   SWETT   MARDEN 


Published,  January,  1909 


Second  Edition 


c  i        t  '     '  c  '        '         <        '    c       '        '  ' 


TO 

MY     WIFE 


/ 


PREFACE 


EVER  before  in  the  history 
of  mankind  has  there  been 
such  an  awakening  to  the 
great  possibiHties  of  the 
power  of  right  thinking  as 
we  are  now  witnessing  in  all 
civilized  countries. 
Metaphysical  schools  are  springing  up  under 
different  names  in  all  parts  of  the  enlightened 
world.  People  are  getting  hold  of  little  bits 
of  one  great  divine  truth,  a  new  gospel  of 
optimism  and  love,  a  philosophy  of  sweetness 
and  light,  which  seems  destined  to  furnish 
a  universal  principle  upon  which  people  of  all 
nations,  of  varying  philosophies  and  creeds, 
can  unite  for  the  betterment  of  the  race. 

The  basic  principle  of  this  great  metaphysi- 
cal movement  has  opened  up  many  possibilities 
of  mind  building,  character  building,  body 
building,  and  success  building  which  are  des- 
tined to  bring  untold  blessings  to  the  world. 

We  are  all  conscious  that  there  is  something 
in  us  which  is  never  sick,  never  sins,  and  never 
dies,  a  power  back  of  the  flesh  but  not  of  it, 
which  connects  us  with  Divinity,  makes  us  one 
with  the  Infinite  Life. 

vii 


i«A 


VIU 


PREFACE 


We  are  beginning  to  discover  something  of 
the  nature  of  this  tremendous  force  back  of 
the  flesh,  this  power  which  heals,  regenerates, 
rejuvenates,  harmonizes,  and  upbuilds,  and 
which  will  ultimately  bring  us  into  that  state 
of  blessedness  which  we  instinctively  feel  is 
the  birthright  of  every  human  being. 

To  present  in  clear,  simple  language,  shorn 
of  all  technicalities,  the  principles  of  the  new 
philosophy  which  promises  to  lift  life  out  of 
commonness  and  discord  and  make  it  worth 
while;  to  show  how  these  principles  may  be 
grasped  and  applied  in  a  practical  way  in 
every-day  living  to  each  person's  own  indi- 
vidual case  is  the  object  of  this  volume. 

There  is  a  growing  belief  that  "  God  never 
made  His  work  for  man  to  mend,"  We  are 
just  beginning  to  discover  that  the  same  Prin- 
ciple which  created  us,  repairs,  restores,  re- 
news, heals  us ;  that  the  remedies  for  all  our 
ills  are  inside  of  us,  in  Divine  Principle,  which 
is  the  truth  of  our  being.  We  are  learning  that 
there  is  an  immortal  principle  of  health  in 
every  individual,  which,  if  we  could  utilize, 
would  heal  all  our  wounds  and  furnish  a  balm 
for  all  the  hurts  of  mankind. 

The  author  attempts  to  show  that  the  body 
is  but  the  mind  externalized,  the  habitual  men- 


PREFACE 


IX 


tal  state  outpictured ;  that  the  bodily  condi- 
tion follows  the  thought,  and  that  we  are 
sick  or  well,  happy  or  miserable,  young  or  old, 
lovable  or  unlovable,  according  to  the  degree 
in  which  we  control  our  mental  processes. 
He  shows  how  man  can  renew  his  body  by 
renewing  his  thought,  or  change  his  body,  his 
character,  by  changing  his  thought. 

The  book  teaches  that  man  need  not  be  the 
victim  of  his  environment,  but  can  be  the  mas- 
ter of  it;  that  there  is  no  fate  outside  of  him 
which  determines  his  life,  his  aims;  that  each 
person  can  shape  his  own  environment,  create 
his  own  condition ;  that  the  cure  for  poverty, 
ill-health,  and  unhappiness  lies  in  bringing 
one's  self  through  scientific  thinking  into  con- 
scious union  with  the  great  Source  of  Infinite 
life,  the  Source  of  opulence,  of  health,  and 
harmony.  This  conscious  union  with  the  Cre- 
ator, this  getting  in  tune  with  the  Infinite,  is 
the  secret  of  all  peace,  power,  and  prosperity. 

It  emphasizes  man's  oneness  with  Infinite 
Life,  and  the  truth  that  when  he  comes  into 
the  full  realization  of  his  inseparable  con- 
nection with  the  creative  energy  of  the  uni- 
verse, he  shall  never  know  lack  or  want  again. 

This  volume  shows  how  man  can  stand  por- 
ter at  the  door  of  his  mind,  admitting  only  his 


X  PREFACE 

friend  thoughts,  only  those  suggestions  that 
will  produce  joy,  prosperity;  and  excluding 
all  his  enemy  thoughts  which  would  bring  dis- 
cord, suffering,  or  failure. 

It  teaches  that  "  your  ideal  is  a  prophecy  of 
what  you  shall  at  last  unveil,"  that  "  thought 
is  another  name  for  fate/'  that  we  can  think 
ourselves  out  of  discord  into  harmony,  out  of 
disease  into  health,  out  of  darkness  into  light, 
out  of  hatred  into  love,  out  of  poverty  and 
failure  into  prosperity  and  success. 

Before  a  man  can  lift  himself,  he  must  lift 
his  thought.  When  we  shall  have  learned  to 
master  our  thought  habits,  to  keep  our  minds 
open  to  the  great  divine  inflow  of  life  force, 
we  shall  have  learned  the  secret  of  human 
blessedness.  Then  a  new  era  will  dawn  for 
the  race. 

O.  S.  M. 

January,  1909. 


PAGE 


CONTENTS 
CHAPTER  I 

THE  POWER  OF  THE  MIND  TO  COMPEL  THE 

BODY  3 

CHAPTER   n 

POVERTY  A   MENTAL  DISABILITY  1 7 


CHAPTER   HI 

THE   LAW  OF   OPULENCE 


37 


CHAPTER   IV 

CHARACTER-BUILDING  AND  HEALTH-BUILDING 

DURING   SLEEP  53 

CHAPTER  V 

HEALTH   THROUGH  RIGHT   THINKING  69 

CHAPTER  VI 

MENTAL  CHEMISTRY  87 

CHAPTER  VII 

IMAGINATION  AND  HEALTH  105 

CHAPTER  VIII 

HOW   SUGGESTION   INFLUENCES   HEALTH  II5 

CHAPTER   IX 

WHY  GROW   OLD?  I3I 


xii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  X  I'AGE 

y=THE  MIRACLE   OF   SELF-CONFIDENCE  1 63 

CHAPTER  XI 

AFFIRMATION  AND   AUDIBLE   SUGGESTION  1 85  l**^ 

CHAPTER   Xn 

DESTRUCTIVE  AND  CONSTRUCTIVE  SUGGESTION  207 

CHAPTER  Xni 

WORRY   THE   DISEASE   OF   THE  AGE  223 

CHAPTER  XIV 

FEAR,  THE  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  239 

CHAPTER  XV 

SELF-CONTROL  VS.    THE   EXPLOSIVE  PASSIONS       269 

CHAPTER   XVI 

GOOD   CHEER — GOD'S  MEDICINE  287 

CHAPTER  XVII 

THE    SUN-DIAL'S    MOTTO  303 

CHAPTER  XVIII 

"as   YE   sow"  317 


I.  THE  POWER  OF  THE  MIND  TO 
COMPEL  THE  BODY 


IsOS  PiHC*2liBS,  GFxlX. 


I.  THE  POWER  OF  THE  MIND  TO 
COMPEL  THE  BODY 

Our  destiny  changes  with  our  thought;  we  shall  be- 
come what  we  wish  to  become,  do  what  we  wish  to 
do,  when  our  habitual  thought  corresponds  with  our 
desire. 

"The  'divinity  that  shapes  our  ends'  is  in  ourselves; 
it  is  our  very  self." 

jONG  before  Henry  Irving's 
death,  his  physician  cau- 
tioned him  against  playing 
his  famous  part  in  "  The 
Bells,"  on  account  of  the 
tremendous  strain  upon  his 
heart.  Ellen  Terry,  his  lead- 
ing woman  for  many  years,  says  in  her 
biography  of  him : 

Every  time  he  heard  the  sound  of  bells,  the  throbbing 
of  his  heart  must  have  nearly  killed  him.  He  used 
always  to  turn  quite  white — there  was  no  trick  about  it. 
It  was  imagination  acting  physically  on  the  body. 

His  death  as  Matthias — the  death  of  a  strong,  robust 
man — was  different  from  all  his  other  stage  deaths. 
He  did  really  almost  die — he  hnagined  death  with  such 
horrible  intensity.  His  eyes  would  disappear  upward, 
his  face  grow  gray,  his  limbs  cold. 

No  wonder,  then,  that  the  first  time  that  the  Wolver- 
hampton doctor's  warning  was  disregarded,  and  Henr>' 


4      PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

played  "The  Bells"  at  Bradford,  his  heart  could  not 
stand  the  strain.  Within  twenty-four  hours  of  his  last 
death  as  "Matthias"  he  was  dead. 

As  Becket  on  the  following  night — the 
night  of  his  death — his  physicians  said  that 
he  was  undoubtedly  dying  throughout  the 
entire  performance.  So  buoyed  up  and  stim- 
ulated was  he  by  his  great  zeal  for  his  work 
and  the  bracing  influence  of  his  audience  that 
he  actually  held  death  at  bay. 

It  is  a  common  experience  for  actors  who 
are  ill  to  be  cured  for  a  time  and  to  be  entirely 
forgetful  of  their  aches  and  pains  under  the 
stimulus  of  ambition  and  the  brain-quicken- 
ing influence  of  their  audiences. 

Edward  H.  Sothern  says  that  he  feels  a 
great  increase  of  brain  activity  when  he  is  on 
the  stage,  and  this  is  accompanied  by  a  cor- 
responding physical  exhilaration.  "  The  very 
air  I  breathe,"  says  Mr.  Sothern,  "  seems  more 
stimulating.  Fatigue  leaves  me  at  the  stage 
door;  and  I  have  often  given  performances 
without  any  suffering  when  I  should  other- 
wise have  been  under  a  doctor's  care."  Noted 
orators,  great  preachers,  and  famous  singers 
have  had  similar  experiences. 

That  "  imperious  must  "  which  compels  the 


POWER   OF   THE    MIND  5 

actor  to  do  his  level  best,  whether  he  feels 
like  it  or  not,  is  a  force  which  no  ordinary 
pain  or  physical  disability  can  silence  or  over- 
come. Somehow,  even  when  we  feel  that  it 
is  impossible  for  us  to  make  the  necessary 
effort,  when  the  crisis  comes,  when  the  emer- 
gency is  upon  us,  when  we  feel  the  prodding 
of  this  imperative,  imperious  necessity,  there 
is  a  latent  power  within  us  which  comes  to 
our  rescue,  which  answers  the  call,  and  we 
do  the  impossible. 

It  is  an  unusual  thing  for  singers  or  actors 
and  actresses  to  be  obliged  to  give  up  their 
parts  even  for  a  night,  but  when  they  are  off 
duty,  or  on  their  vacations,  they  are  much 
more  likely  to  be  ill  or  indisposed.  There  is 
a  common  saying  among  actors  and  singers 
that  they  cannot  afford  to  be  sick. 

"  We  don't  get  sick,"  said  an  actor,  "  be- 
cause we  can't  afford  that  luxury.  It  is  a 
case  of  '  must '  with  us ;  and  although  there 
have  been  times  when,  had  I  been  at  home, 
or  a  private  man,  I  could  have  taken  to  my 
bed  with  as  good  a  right  to  be  sick  as  any 
one  ever  had,  I  have  not  done  so,  and  have 
worn  off  the  attack  through  sheer  necessity. 
It  is  no  fiction  that  will-power  is  the  best  of 
tonics,  and  theatrical  people  understand  that 


6       PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

they  must  keep  a  good  stock  of  it  always  on 
hand." 

I  know  of  an  actor  who  suffered  such  tor- 
tures with  inflammatory  rheumatism  that  even 
with  the  aid  of  a  cane  he  could  not  walk 
two  blocks,  from  his  hotel  to  the  theatre ;  yet 
when  his  cue  was  called,  he  not  only  walked 
upon  the  stage  with  the  utmost  ease  and 
grace,  but  was  also  entirely  oblivious  of  the 
pain  which  a  few  moments  before  had  made 
him  wretched.  A  stronger  motive  drove  out 
the  lesser,  made  him  utterly  unconscious  of 
his  trouble,  and  the  pain  for  the  time  was 
gone.  It  was  not  merely  covered  up  by  some 
other  thought,  passion,  or  emotion,  but  it  was 
temporarily  annihilated ;  and  as  soon  as  the 
play  was  over,  and  his  part  finished,  he  was 
crippled  again. 

General  Grant  was  suffering  greatly  from 
rheumatism  at  Appomattox,  but  when  a  flag 
of  truce  informed  him  that  Lee  was  ready  to 
surrender,  his  great  joy  not  only  made  him 
forget  his  rheumatism  but  also  drove  it  com- 
pletely away — at  least  for  some  time. 

The  shock  occasioned  by  the  great  San 
Francisco  earthquake  cured  a  paralytic  who 
had  been  crippled  for  fifteen  years.  There 
were   a   great   many   other    wonderful   cures 


POWER   OF   THE    MIND  7 

reported  which  were  almost  instantaneous. 
Men  and  women  who  had  been  practically  in- 
valids for  a  long  time,  and  who  were  scarcely 
able  to  wait  upon  themselves,  when  the  crisis 
came  and  they  were  confronted  by  this  ter- 
rible situation,  worked  like  Trojans,  carrying 
their  children  and  household  goods  long  dis- 
tances to  places  of  safety. 

We  do  not  know  what  we  can  bear  until 
we  are  put  to  the  test.  Many  a  delicate 
mother,  who  thought  that  she  could  not  sur- 
vive the  death  of  her  children,  has  lived  to 
bury  her  husband  and  the  last  one  of  a  large 
family,  and  in  addition  to  all  this  has  seen 
her  home  and  last  dollar  swept  away ;  yet  she 
has  had  the  courage  to  bear  it  all  and  to  go 
on  as  before.  When  the  need  comes,  there 
is  a  power  deep  within  us  that  answers  the 
call. 

Timid  girls  who  have  always  shuddered  at 
the  mere  thought  of  death  have  in  some  fatal 
accident  entered  into  the  shadow  of  the  valley 
without  a  tremor  or  murmur.  We  can  face 
any  kind  of  inevitable  danger  with  wonderful 
fortitude.  Frail,  delicate  women  will  go  on 
an  operating-table  with  marvellous  courage, 
even  when  they  know  that  the  operation  is 
likely  to  be  fatal.  But  the  same  women  might 


8       PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

go  all  to  pieces  over  the  terror  of  some  im- 
pending danger,  because  of  the  very  uncer- 
tainty of  what  might  be  in  store  for  them. 
Uncertainty  gives  fear  a  chance  to  get  in  its 
deadly  work  on  the  imagination  and  make 
cowards  of  us. 

A  person  who  shrinks  from  the  prick  of 
a  pin,  and  who,  under  ordinary  circumstances, 
can  not  endure  without  an  anesthetic  the  ex- 
traction of  a  tooth  or  the  cutting  of  flesh, 
even  in  a  trivial  operation,  can,  when  mangled 
in  an  accident,  far  from  civilization,  stand  the 
amputation  of  a  limb  without  as  much  fear 
and  terror  as  he  might  suffer  at  home  from 
the  lancing  of  a  felon. 

I  have  seen  a  dozen  strong  men  go  to  their 
deaths  in  a  fire  without  showing  the  slightest 
sign  of  fear.  There  is  something  within  every 
one  of  us  that  braces  us  up  in  a  catastrophe 
and  makes  us  equal  to  any  emergency.  This 
something  is  the  God  in  us.  These  brave  fire- 
men did  not  shrink  even  when  they  saw  every 
means  of  escape  cut  off.  The  last  rope 
thrown  to  them  had  consumed  away;  the 
last  ladder  had  crumbled  to  ashes,  and  they 
were  still  in  a  burning  tower  one  hun- 
dred feet  above  a  blazing  roof.  Yet  they 
showed  no  sign  of  fear  or  cowardice  when 


POWER    OF   THE    MIND  9 

the  tower  sank  into  the  seething  caldron  of 
flame. 

When  in  Deadwood,  in  the  Black  Hills  of 
South  Dakota,  I  was  told  that  in  the  early- 
days  there,  before  telephone,  railroad,  or  tele- 
graph communication  had  been  established, 
the  people  were  obliged  to  send  a  hundred 
miles  for  a  physician.  For  this  reason  the 
services  of  a  doctor  were  beyond  the  reach 
of  persons  of  moderate  means.  The  result 
was  that  people  learned  to  depend  upon  them- 
selves to  such  an  extent  that  it  was  only  on 
extremely  rare  occasions,  usually  in  a  case  of 
severe  accident  or  some  great  emergency,  that 
a  physician  was  sent  for.  Some  of  the  largest 
families  of  children  in  the  place  had  been 
reared  without  a  physician  ever  coming  into 
the  house.  When  I  asked  some  of  these 
people  if  they  were  ever  sick  they  replied, 
"  No,  we  are  never  sick,  simply  because  we  are 
obliged  to  keep  well.  We  cannot  afford  to  have 
a  physician,  and  even  if  we  could  it  would 
take  so  long  to  get  him  here  that  the  sick  one 
might  be  dead  before  he  arrived." 

One  of  the  most  unfortunate  things  that 
has  come  to  us  through  what  we  call  "  higher 
civilization "  is  the  killing  of  faith  in  our 
power   of    disease    resistance.    In    our    large 


10     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

cities  people  make  great  preparations  for  sick- 
ness. They  expect  it,  anticipate  it,  and  con- 
sequently have  it.  It  is  only  a  block  or  two 
to  a  physician ;  a  drug-store  is  on  every  other 
corner,  and  the  temptation  to  send  for  the 
physician  or  to  get  drugs  at  the  slightest 
symptom  of  illness  tends  to  make  them  more 
and  more  dependent  on  outside  helps  and  less 
able  to  control  their  physical  discords. 

During  the  frontier  days  there  were  little 
villages  and  hamlets  which  physicians  rarely 
entered,  and  here  the  people  were  strong 
and  healthy  and  independent.  They  developed 
great  powers  of  disease  resistance. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  doctor  habit  in 
many  families  has  a  great  deal  to  do  with  the 
developing  of  unfortunate  physical  conditions 
in  the  child.  Many  mothers  are  always  call- 
ing the  doctor  whenever  there  is  the  least  sign 
of  disturbance  in  the  children.  The  result  is 
that  the  child  grows  up  with  this  disease  pic- 
ture, doctor  picture,  medicine  picture,  in  its 
mind,  and  it  influences  its  whole  life. 

The  time  will  come  when  a  child  and  any 
kind  of  medicine  will  be  considered  a  very 
incongruous  combination.  Were  children  prop- 
erly reared  in  the  love  thought,  in  the  truth 
thought,  in  the  harmony  thought,  were  they 


POWER   OF   THE    MIND  ii 

trained  to  right  thinking,  a  doctor  or  medicine 
would  be  rarely  needed. 

Within  the  last  ten  years  tens  of  thousands 
of  families  have  never  tasted  medicine  or  re- 
quired the  services  of  a  physician.  It  is  be- 
coming more  and  more  certain  that  the  time 
will  come  when  the  belief  in  the  necessity  of 
employing  some  one  to  patch  us  up,  to  mend 
the  Almighty's  work,  will  be  a  thing  of  the 
past.  The  Creator  never  put  man's  health,  hap- 
piness, and  welfare  at  the  mercy  of  the  mere 
accident  of  happening  to  live  near  physicians. 

He  never  left  the  grandest  of  His  creations 
to  the  mercy  of  any  chance,  cruel  fate,  or 
destiny ;  never  intended  that  the  life,  health, 
and  well-being  of  one  of  His  children  should 
hang  upon  the  contingency  of  being  near  a 
remedy  for  his  ills;  never  placed  him  where 
his  own  life,  health,  and  happiness  would 
depend  upon  the  chance  of  happening  to  be 
where  a  certain  plant  might  grow,  or  a  certain 
mineral  exist  which  could  cure  him. 

Is  it  not  more  rational  to  believe  that  He 
would  put  the  remedies  for  man's  ills  within 
himself — in  his  own  mind,  where  they  are  al- 
ways available — than  that  He  would  store 
them  in  herbs  and  minerals  in  remote  parts 
of  the  earth  where  practically  but  a  small  por- 


12     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

tion  of  the  human  race  would  ever  discover 
them,  countless  millions  dying  in  total  igno- 
rance of  their  existence? 

There  is  a  latent  power,  a  force  of  in- 
destructible life,  an  immortal  principle  of 
health,  in  every  individual,  which  if  developed 
would  heal  all  our  wounds  and  furnish  a  balm 
for  the  hurts  of  the  world. 

How  rare  a  thing  it  is  for  people  to  be  ill 
upon  any  great  occasion  in  which  they  are 
to  be  active  participants !  How  unusual  for  a 
woman,  even  though  in  very  delicate  health, 
to  be  sick  upon  a  particular  day  on  which  she 
has  been  invited  to  a  royal  reception  or  to 
visit  the  White  House  at  Washington ! 

Chronic  invalids  have  been  practically 
cured  by  having  great  responsibilities  thrust 
upon  them.  By  the  death  of  some  relative 
or  the  loss  of  property,  or  through  some  emer- 
gency, they  have  been  forced  out  of  their 
seclusion  into  the  public  gaze ;  forced  away 
from  the  very  opportunity  of  thinking  of 
themselves,  dwelling  upon  their  troubles,  their 
symptoms,  and  lo!  the  symptoms  have  dis- 
appeared. 

Thousands  of  women  are  living  to-day  in 
comparative  health  who  would  have  been 
dead  years  ago  had  they  not  been  forced  by 


POWER   OF    THE    MIND  13 

necessity  out  of  their  diseased  thoughts  and 
compelled  to  think  of  others,  to  work  for 
them,  to  provide  and  plan  for  those  depen- 
dent upon  them. 

Alultitudes  of  men  and  women  would  be 
sick  in  bed  if  they  could  afford  it ;  but  the 
hungry  mouths  to  feed,  the  children  to  clothe, 
these  and  all  the  other  obligations  of  life  so 
press  upon  them  that  they  cannot  stop  work- 
ing; they  must  keep  going  whether  they  feel 
like  it  or  not. 

W^hat  does  the  world  not  owe  to  that  im- 
perious "  must  " — that  strenuous  effort  which 
we  make  when  driven  to  desperation,  when  all 
outside  help  has  been  cut  off  and  we  are 
forced  to  call  upon  all  that  is  within  us  to 
extricate  ourselves  from  an  unfortunate  situ- 
ation ? 

Many  of  the  greatest  things  in  the  world 
have  been  accomplished  under  the  stress  of 
this  impelling  "  must  " — merciless  in  its  lash- 
ings and  proddings  to  accomplishment. 

Necessity  has  been  a  priceless  spur  which 
has  helped  men  to  perform  miracles  against 
incredible  odds.  Every  person  who  amounts 
to  anything  feels  within  himself  a  power 
which  is  ever  pushing  him  on  and  urging  him 
to  perpetual  improvement.  Whether  he  feels 


14     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

like  it  or  not,  this  inward  monitor  holds  him 
to  his  task. 

It  is  this  little  insistent  "  must "  that  dogs 
our  steps ;  that  drives  and  bestirs  us ;  that 
makes  us  willing  to  suffer  privations  and  en- 
dure hardships,  inconveniences,  and  discom- 
forts ;  to  work  slavishly,  in  fact,  when  inclina- 
tion tempts  us  to  take  life  easy. 


II.    POVERTY   A    MENTAL 
DISABILITY 


II.    POVERTY   A    MENTAL 
DISABILITY 

The  worst  thing  about  poverty  is  the  poverty  thought. 
It  is  the  conviction  that  we  are  poor  and  must  remain  so 
that  is  fatal  to  the  gaining  of  a  competence. 

Holding  the  poverty  thought  keeps  us  in  poverty- 
stricken  and  poverty-producing  conditions. 

OVERTY  is  an  abnormal 
condition.  It  does  not  fit 
any  human  being's  constitu- 
tion. It  contradicts  the 
promise  and  the  prophecy 
of  the  divine  in  man.  The 
Creator  never  intended  that 
man  should  be  a  pauper,  a  drudge,  or  a  slave. 
There  is  not  a  single  indication  in  man's 
wonderful  mechanism  that  he  was  created  for 
a  life  of  poverty.  There  is  something  larger 
and  grander  for  him  in  the  divine  plan  than 
perpetual  slavery  to  the  bread-winning  prob- 
lem. 

No  man  can  do  his  best  work — bring  out 
the  best  thing  in  him — while  he  feels  want 
tugging  at  his  heels;  while  he  is  hampered, 
restricted,  forever  at  the  mercy  of  pinching 
circumstances. 

The   very   poor,   those   struggling  to   keep 


i8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

the  wolf  at  bay,  cannot  be  independent.  They 
cannot  order  their  Hves.  Often  they  cannot 
afford  to  express  their  opinions,  or  to  have 
individual  views.  They  cannot  always  afford 
to  live  in  decent  locations  or  in  healthful 
houses. 

Praise  it  who  will,  poverty  in  its  extreme 
form  is  narrowing,  belittling,  contracting, 
ambition-killing — an  unmitigated  curse.  There 
is  little  hope  in  it,  little  prospect  in  it,  little 
joy  in  it.  It  often  develops  the  worst  in  man 
and  kills  love  between  those  who  would  other- 
wise live  happily  together. 

It  is  difficult  for  the  average  human  being 
to  be  a  real  man  or  real  woman  in  extreme 
poverty.  When  worried,  embarrassed,  en- 
tangled with  debts,  forced  to  make  a  dime 
perform  the  proper  work  of  a  dollar,  it  is 
almost  impossible  to  preserve  that  dignity  and 
self-respect  which  enable  a  man  to  hold  up 
his  head  and  look  the  world  squarely  in  the 
face.  Some  rare  and  beautiful  souls  have 
done  this,  and  in  dire  poverty  have  given  us 
examples  of  noble  living  that  the  world  will 
never  forget;  but  on  the  other  hand,  how 
many  has  its  lash  driven  to  the  lowest  depths ! 

Everywhere  we  see  the  marks  of  pinch- 
ing, grinding,  blighting  poverty.  The  hideous 


POVERTY  19 

evidences  of  want  stare  us  in  the  face  every 
day.  We  see  it  in  prematurely  old,  depressed 
faces,  and  in  children  who  have  had  no  child- 
hood and  who  have  borne  the  mark  of  the 
poverty  curse  ever  since  their  birth.  We  see 
it  shadowing  bright  young  faces,  and  often 
blighting  the  highest  ambition,  and  dwarfing 
the  most  brilliant  ability. 

Poverty  is  more  often  a  curse  than  a  bless- 
ing, and  those  who  praise  its  virtues  would 
be  the  last  to  accept  its  hard  conditions. 

I  wish  I  could  fill  every  youth  with  an  utter 
dread  and  horror  of  it;  make  him  feel  its 
shame,  when  preventable,  its  constraint,  its 
bitterness,  its  strangling  effect. 

There  is  no  disgrace  in  unpreventable  pov- 
erty. We  respect  and  honor  people  who  are 
poor  because  of  ill-health  or  misfortune  which 
they  cannot  prevent.  The  disgrace  is  in  not 
doing  our  level  best  to  better  our  condition. 

What  we  denounce  is  preventable  poverty, 
that  which  is  due  to  vicious  living,  to  sloven- 
ly, slipshod,  systemless  work,  to  idling  and 
dawdling,  or  to  laziness;  that  poverty  which 
is  due  to  the  lack  of  effort,  to  wrong  thinking, 
or  to  any  preventable  cause. 

Every  man  should  be  ashamed  of  poverty 
which  he  can  prevent,  not  only  because  it  is 


20     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

a  reflection  upon  his  ability,  and  will  make 
others  think  less  of  him,  but  also  because  it 
will  make  him  think  less  of  himself. 

The  trouble  with  many  of  poverty's  victims 
to-day  is  that  they  have  no  confidence  that 
they  can  get  away  from  poverty.  They  hear 
so  much  about  the  poor  man's  lack  of  op- 
portunities ;  that  the  great  money  combina- 
tions will  compel  nearly  everybody  in  the 
future  to  work  for  somebody  else ;  they  hear 
so  much  talk  of  the  grasping  and  the  greed 
of  the  rich,  that  they  gradually  lose  confidence 
in  their  ability  to  cope  with  conditions  and 
become  disheartened. 

I  do  not  overlook  the  heartless,  grinding, 
grasping  practices  of  many  of  the  rich,  or  the 
unfair  and  cruel  conditions  brought  about  by 
unscrupulous  political  and  financial  schemers ; 
but  I  wish  to  show  the  poor  man  that,  not- 
withstanding all  these  things,  multitudes  of 
poor  people  do  rise  above  their  iron  environ- 
ment, and  that  there  is  hope  for  him.  The 
mere  fact  that  so  many  continue  to  rise,  year 
after  year,  out  of  just  such  conditions  as  you 
may  think  are  fatal  to  your  advancement, 
ought  to  convince  you  that  you  also  can  con- 
quer your  environment. 

When  a  man  loses  confidence,  every  other 


POVERTY  21 

success  quality  gradually  leaves  him,  and  life 
becomes  a  grind.  He  loses  ambition  and 
energy,  is  not  so  careful  about  his  personal 
appearance,  is  not  so  painstaking,  does  not 
use  the  same  system  and  order  in  his  work, 
grows  slack  and  slovenly  and  slipshod  in 
every  way,  and  becomes  less  and  less  capable 
of  conquering  poverty. 

Because  they  cannot  keep  up  appearances 
and  live  in  the  same  style  as  their  wealthy 
neighbors,  poor  people  often  become  dis- 
couraged, and  do  not  try  to  make  the  best 
of  what  they  have.  They  do  not  "  put  their 
best  foot  forward "  and  endeavor  with  all 
their  might  to  throw  off  the  evidences  of 
poverty.  If  there  is  anything  that  paralyzes 
power  it  is  the  effort  to  reconcile  ourselves 
to  an  unfortunate  environment,  instead  of 
regarding  it  as  abnormal  and  trying  to  get 
away  from  it. 

Poverty  itself  is  not  so  bad  as  the  poverty 
thought.  It  is  the  conviction  that  zue  are  poor 
and  must  remain  so  that  is  fatal.  It  is  the 
attitude  of  mind  that  is  destructive,  the  facing 
toward  poverty,  and  feeling  so  reconciled  to 
it  that  one  does  not  turn  about  face  and 
struggle  to  get  away  from  it  with  a  determina- 
tion which  knows  no  retreat. 


22     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

It  is  facing  the  wrong  way,  toward  the 
black,  depressing,  hopeless  outlook  that  kills 
effort  and  demoralizes  ambition.  So  long  as 
you  carry  around  a  poverty  atmosphere  and 
radiate  the  poverty  thought,  you  will  be 
limited. 

You  will  never  be  anything  but  a  beggar 
while  you  think  beggarly  thoughts,  but  a 
poor  man  while  you  think  poverty,  a  failure 
while  you  think  failure  thoughts. 

If  you  are  afraid  of  poverty,  if  you  dread 
it,  if  you  have  a  horror  of  coming  to  want  in 
old  age,  it  is  more  likely  to  come  to  you,  be- 
cause this  constant  fear  saps  your  courage, 
shakes  your  self-confidence,  and  makes  you 
less  able  to  cope  with  hard  conditions. 

The  magnet  must  be  true  to  itself,  it  must 
attract  things  like  itself.  The  only  instrument 
by  which  man  has  ever  attracted  anything  in 
this  world  is  his  mind,  and  his  mind  is  like 
his  thought ;  if  it  is  saturated  with  the  fear 
thought,  the  poverty  thought,  no  matter  how 
hard  he  works,  he  will  attract  poverty. 

You  walk  in  the  direction  in  which  you 
face.  If  you  persist  in  facing  toward  poverty, 
you  cannot  expect  to  reach  abundance.  When 
every  step  you  take  is  on  the  road  to  failure, 
you  cannot  expect  to  reach  the  success  goal. 


POVERTY  23 

If  we  can  conquer  inward  poverty,  we  can 
soon  conquer  poverty  of  outward  things,  for, 
when  we  change  the  mental  attitude,  the 
physical  changes  to  correspond. 

Holding  the  poverty  thought  keeps  us  in 
touch  with  poverty-stricken,  poverty-pro- 
ducing conditions ;  and  the  constant  thinking 
of  poverty,  talking  poverty,  living  poverty, 
makes  us  mentally  poor.  This  is  the  worst 
kind  of  poverty. 

We  cannot  travel  toward  prosperity  until 
the  mental  attitude  faces  prosperity.  As  long 
as  we  look  toward  despair,  we  shall  never 
arrive  at  the  harbor  of  delight. 

The  man  who  persists  in  holding  his  mental 
attitude  toward  poverty,  or  who  is  always 
thinking  of  his  hard  luck  and  failure  to  get 
on,  can  by  no  possibility  go  in  the  opposite 
direction,  where  the  goal  of  prosperity  Hes. 

I  know  a  young  man  who  was  graduated 
from  Yale  only  a  few  years  ago — a  broad- 
shouldered,  vigorous  young  fellow — who  says 
that  he  hasn't  the  price  of  a  hat,  and  that  if 
his  father  did  not  send  him  five  dollars  a  week 
he  would  go  hungry. 

This  young  man  is  the  victim  of  discourage- 
ment, of  the  poverty  thought.  He  says  that  he 
does  not  believe  there  is  any  success  for  him. 


24     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

He  has  tried  many  things,  and  has  failed  in 
them  all.  He  says  he  has  no  confidence  in  his 
ability,  that  his  education  has  been  a  failure, 
and  that  he  has  never  believed  he  could 
succeed.  So  he  has  drifted  from,  one  thing  to 
another,  and  is  poor  and  a  nobody,  just  be- 
cause of  his  mental  attitude,  because  he  does 
not  face  the  right  way. 

If  you  would  attract  good  fortune  you  must 
get  rid  of  doubt.  As  long  as  that  stands  be- 
tween you  and  your  ambition,  it  will  be  a  bar 
that  will  cut  you  off.  You  must  have  faith. 
No  man  can  make  a  fortune  while  he  is  con- 
vinced that  he  can't.  The  "  I  can't  "  philosophy 
has  wrecked  more  careers  than  almost  any- 
thing else.  Confidence  is  the  magic  key  that 
unlocks  the  door  of  supply. 

I  never  knew  a  man  to  be  successful  who 
was  always  talking  about  business  being  bad. 
The  habit  of  looking  down,  talking  down,  is 
fatal  to  advancement. 

The  Creator  has  bidden  every  man  to  look 
up,  not  down,  has  made  him  to  climb,  not  to 
grovel.  There  is  no  providence  which  keeps  a 
man  in  poverty,  or  in  painful  or  distressing 
circumstances. 

A  young  man  of  remarkable  ability,  who 
has    an    established   position    in  the   business 


POVERTY  25 

world,  recently  told  me  that  for  a  long  time 
he  had  been  very  poor,  and  remained  so  until 
he  made  up  his  mind  that  he  was  not  intended 
to  be  poor,  that  poverty  was  really  a  mental 
disease  of  which  he  intended  to  rid  himself. 
He  formed  a  habit  of  daily  affirming"  abun- 
dance and  plenty,  of  asserting  his  faith  in 
himself  and  in  his  ability  to  become  a  man 
of  means  and  importance  in  the  world.  He 
persistently  drove  the  poverty  thought  out 
of  his  mind.  He  would  have  nothing  to  do 
with  it. 

He  would  not  allow  himself  to  think  of 
possible  failure.  He  turned  his  face  toward 
the  success  goal,  turned  his  back  forever  on 
poverty  and  failure,  and  he  tells  me  that  the 
result  of  his  positive  attitude  and  persistent 
affirmation  has  been  marvellous. 

He  says  that  he  used  to  pinch  himself  in 
every  possible  way  in  order  to  save  in  little 
ways.  He  would  eat  the  cheapest  kind  of  food, 
and  as  sparingly  as  possible.  He  would  rarely 
go  on  a  street-car,  even  if  he  had  to  walk  for 
miles.  Under  the  new  impulse  he  completely 
changed  his  habits,  resolved  that  he  would  go 
to  good  restaurants,  that  he  would  get  a  com- 
fortable room  in  a  good  location,  and  that  he 
would    try    in    every    way    to   meet   cultured 


26     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

people,  and  to  form  acquaintances  with  those 
above  him  who  could  help  him. 

The  more  liberal  he  has  been,  the  better  he 
has  been  to  himself  in  everything  which  could 
help  him  along,  which  would  tend  to  a  higher 
culture  and  a  better  education,  the  more  things 
have  come  his  way.  He  found  that  it  was  his 
pinched,  stingy  thoughts  that  shut  off  his 
supply. 

Although  he  is  now  living  well,  he  says 
that  the  amount  he  spends  is  a  mere  bagatelle 
compared  with  the  larger  things  that  come  to 
him  from  his  enlarged  thought,  his  changed 
attitude  of  mind. 

Stingy,  narrow  minds  do  not  attract  money. 
If  they  get  money  they  usually  get  it  by 
parsimonious  saving,  rather  than-  by  obeying 
the  law  of  opulence.  It  takes  a  broad,  liberal 
mind  to  attract  money.  The  narrow,  stingy 
mind  shuts  out  the  flow  of  abundance. 

It  is  the  hopeful,  buoyant,  cheerful  attitude 
of  mind  that  wins.  Optimism  is  a  success 
builder;  pessimism  an  achievement  killer. 

Optimism  is  the  great  producer.  It  is  hope, 
life.  It  contains  everything  which  enters  into 
the  mental  attitude  which  produces  and  en- 
joys. 

Pessimism  is  the  great  destroyer.  It  is  de- 


POVERTY  27 

spair,  death.  No  matter  if  you  have  lost  your 
property,  your  health,  your  reputation  even, 
there  is  always  hope  for  the  man  who  keeps  a 
firm  faith  in  himself  and  looks  up. 

As  long  as  you  radiate  doubt  and  dis- 
couragement, you  will  be  a  failure.  If  you 
want  to  get  away  from  poverty,  you  must 
keep  your  mind  in  a  productive,  creative  con- 
dition. In  order  to  do  this  you  must  think 
confident,  cheerful,  creative  thoughts.  The 
model  must  precede  the  statue.  You  must  see 
a  neiv  world  before  you  can  live  in  if. 

If  the  people  who  are  down  in  the  world, 
who  are  side-tracked,  who  believe  that  their 
opportunity  has  gone  by  forever,  that  they 
can  never  get  on  their  feet  again,  only  knew 
the  power  of  reversal  of  their  thought,  they 
could  easily  get  a  new  start. 

I  know  a  family  whose  members  completely 
reversed  their  condition  by  reversing  their 
mental  attitude.  They  had  been  living  in  a 
discouraging  atmosphere  so  long  that  they 
were  convinced  that  success  was  for  others, 
but  not  for  them.  They  believed  so  thoroughly 
that  they  were  fated  to  be  poor  that  their 
home  and  entire  environment  were  pictures  of 
dilapidation  and  failure.  Everything  was  in  a 
run-down    condition.    There    was    almost    no 


28     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

paint  on  the  house,  no  carpets  on  the  floors, 
and  scarcely  a  picture  on  the  wall — nothing 
to  make  the  home  comfortable  and  cheerful. 
All  the  members  of  the  family  looked  like 
failures.  The  home  was  gloomy,  cold,  and 
cheerless.  Everything  about  it  was  depressing. 

One  day  the  mother  read  something  that 
suggested  that  poverty  was  largely  a  mental 
disease,  and  she  began  at  once  to  reverse  her 
thinking  habit,  and  gradually  to  replace  all 
discouraging,  despondency,  failure  thoughts 
with  their  opposites.  She  assumed  a  sunny, 
cheerful  attitude,  and  looked  and  acted  as  if 
life  were  worth  living. 

Soon  the  husband  and  children  caught  the 
contagion  of  her  cheerfulness,  and  in  a  short 
time  the  whole  family  was  facing  the  light. 
Optimism  took  the  place  of  pessimism.  The 
husband  completely  changed  his  habits.  In- 
stead of  going-  to  his  work  unshaven  and 
unkempt,  with  slovenly  dress  and  slipshod 
manner,  be  became  neat  and  tidy.  He  braced 
up,  brushed  up,  cleaned  up,  and  looked  up. 
The  children  followed  his  example.  The  house 
was  repaired,  renovated  within  and  without, 
and  the  family  forever  turned  their  backs  on 
the  dark  picture  of  poverty  and  failure. 

The  result  of  all  this  was  that  it  brought 


POVERTY  29 

what  many  people  would  call  "  good  luck." 
The  change  in  the  mental  attitude,  the  out- 
look toward  success  and  happiness  instead  of 
failure,  reacted  upon  the  father's  mind,  gave 
him  new  hope  and  new  courage,  and  so  in- 
creased his  efficiency  that  he  was  soon  pro- 
moted, as  were  also  his  sons.  After  two  or 
three  years  of  the  creative,  inspiring  atmos- 
phere of  hope  and  courage,  the  entire  family 
and  the  home  were  transformed. 

Every  man  must  play  the  part  of  his  ambi- 
tion. If  you  are  trying  to  be  a  successful  man 
you  must  play  the  part.  If  you  are  trying  to 
dem.onstrate  opulence,  you  must  play  it,  not 
weakly,  but  vigorously,  grandly.  You  must 
feel  opulent,  you  must  think  opulence,  you 
must  appear  opulent.  Your  bearing  must  be 
filled  with  confidence.  You  must  give  the  im- 
pression of  your  own  assurance,  that  you  are 
large  enough  to  play  your  part  and  to  play 
it  superbly.  Suppose  the  greatest  actor  living 
were  to  have  a  play  written  for  him  in  which 
the  leading  part  was  to  represent  a  man  in 
the  process  of  making  a  fortune — a  great, 
vigorous,  progressive  character,  who  con- 
quered by  his  very  presence.  Suppose  this 
actor,  in  i)laying  the  part,  were  to  dress  like 
an  unprospcrous  man,  walk  on  the  stage  in 


30     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

a  stooping,  slouchy,  slipshod  manner,  as 
though  he  had  no  ambition,  no  energy  or  Hfe, 
as  though  he  had  no  real  faith  that  he  could 
ever  make  money  or  be  a  success  in  business ; 
suppose  he  went  around  the  stage  with  an 
apologetic,  shrinking,  skulking  manner,  as 
much  as  to  say,  "  Now,  I  do  not  believe  that 
I  can  ever  do  this  thing  that  I  have  attempted ; 
it  is  too  big  for  me.  Other  people  have  done 
it,  but  I  never  thought  that  I  should  ever  be 
rich  or  prosperous.  Somehow  good  things  do 
not  seem  to  be  meant  for  me.  I  am  just  an 
ordinary  man,  I  haven't  had  much  experience 
and  I  haven't  much  confidence  in  myself,  and 
it  seems  presumptuous  for  me  to  think  I  am 
ever  going  to  be  rich  or  have  much  influence 
in  the  world."  What  kind  of  an  impression 
would  he  make  upon  the  audience?  Would  he 
give  confidence,  would  he  radiate  power  or 
forcefulness,  would  he  make  people  think  that 
that  kind  of  a  weakling  could  create  a  fortune, 
could  manipulate  conditions  which  would  pro- 
duce money?  Would  not  everybody  say  that 
the  man  was  a  failure  ?  Would  they  not  laugh 
at  the  idea  of  his  conquering  anything? 

Suppose  a  young  man  should  start  out  with 
a  determination  to  get  rich,  and  should  all  the 
time  parade  his  poverty,  confess  his  inability 


POVERTY  31 

to  make  money,  and  tell  everybody  that  he  is 
"  down  on  his  luck  "  ;  that  he  "  always  expects 
to  be  poor."  Do  you  think  he  would  become 
rich?  Talking  poverty,  thinking  poverty,  liv- 
ing poverty,  assuming  the  air  of  a  pauper, 
dressing  like  a  failure,  and  with  a  slipshod, 
slovenly  family  and  home,  how  long  will  it 
take  a  man  to  arrive  at  the  goal  of  success  ? 

Our  mental  attitude  toward  the  thing  we 
are  struggling  for  has  everything  to  do  with 
our  gaining  it.  If  a  man  wants  to  become 
prosperous,  he  must  believe  that  he  was  made 
for  success  and  happiness ;  that  there  is  a 
divinity  in  him  which  will,  if  he  follows  it, 
bring  him  into  the  light  of  prosperity. 

Erase  all  the  shadows,  all  the  doubts  and 
fears,  and  the  suggestions  of  poverty  and 
failure  from  your  mind.  When  you  have  be- 
come master  of  your  thought,  when  you  have 
once  learned  to  dominate  your  mind,  you  will 
find  that  things  will  begin  to  come  your  way. 
Discouragement,  fear,  doubt,  lack  of  self- 
confidence,  are  the  germs  which  have  killed 
the  prosperity  and  happiness  of  tens  of  thou- 
sands of  people. 

If  it  were  possible  for  all  the  poor  to  turn 
their  backs  on  their  dark  and  discouraging 
environment  and  face  the  light  and  cheer,  and 


32     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

if  they  should  resolve  that  they  are  done  with 
poverty  and  a  slipshod  existence,  this  very 
resolution  would,  in  a  short  time,  revolutionize 
civilization. 

Every  child  should  be  taught  to  expect 
prosperity,  to  believe  that  the  good  things  of 
the  world  were  intended  for  him.  This  con- 
viction would  be  a  powerful  factor  in  the 
adult  life  if  the  child  were  so  trained. 

Wealth  is  created  mentally  first;  it  is 
thought  out  before  it  becomes  a  reality. 

When  a  youth  decides  to  become  a  physi- 
cian, he  puts  himself  in  a  medical  atmosphere 
just  as  much  as  possible.  He  talks  medicine, 
reads  medicine,  studies  medicine,  thinks  medi- 
cine until  he  becomes  saturated  with  it.  He 
does  not  decide  to  become  a  physician  and 
then  put  himself  in  a  legal  atmosphere,  read 
law,  talk  law,  think  law.  So,  if  you  want 
success,  abundance,  you  must  think  success, 
you  must  think  abundance. 

Stoutly  deny  the  power  of  adversity  or 
poverty  to  keep  you  down.  Constantly  assert 
your  superiority  to  your  environment.  Believe 
that  you  are  to  dominate  your  surroundings, 
that  you  are  the  master  and  not  the  slave  of 
circumstances. 

Resolve  with  all  the  vigor  you  can  muster 


POVERTY  33 

that,  since  there  are  plenty  of  good  things  in 
the  world  for  everybody,  you  are  going  to 
have  your  share,  without  injuring  anybody 
else  or  keeping  others  back.  It  was  intended 
that  you  should  have  a  competence,  an  abun- 
dance. It  is  your  birthright.  You  are  success 
organized,  and  constructed  for  happiness,  and 
you  should  resolve  to  reach  your  divine 
destiny. 

When  you  make  up  your  mind  that  you 
are  done  with  poverty  forever ;  that  you  will 
have  nothing  more  to  do  with  it ;  that  you 
are  going  to  erase  every  trace  of  it  from  your 
dress,  your  personal  appearance,  your  manner, 
your  talk,  your  actions,  your  home ;  that  you 
are  going  to  show  the  world  your  real  mettle ; 
that  you  are  no  longer  going  to  pass  for  a 
failure ;  that  you  have  set  your  face  persist- 
ently toward  better  things — a  competence,  an 
independence — and  that  nothing  on  earth  can 
turn  you  from  your  resolution,  you  will  be 
amazed  to  find  what  a  reenforcing  power  will 
come  to  you,  what  an  increase  of  confidence, 
reassurance,   and   self-respect. 

The  very  act  of  turning  your  back  upon  the 
black  picture  and  resolving  that  you  will  have 
nothing  more  to  do  with  failure,  with  poverty ; 
that  you  will  make  the  best  possible  out  of 


34     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

what  you  do  have;  that  you  will  put  up  the 
best  possible  appearance ;  that  you  will  clean 
up,  brush  up,  talk  up,  look  up,  instead  of 
down — hold  your  head  up  and  look  the  world 
in  the  face  instead  of  cringing,  whining,  com- 
plaining— will  create  a  new  spirit  within  you 
which  will  lead  you  to  the  light.  Hope  will 
take  the  place  of  despair,  and  you  will  feel  the 
thrill  of  a  new  power,  of  a  new  force  coursing 
through  your  veins. 

Thousands  of  people  in  this  country  have 
thought  themselves  away  from  a  life  of 
poverty  by  getting  a  glimpse  of  that  great 
principle,  that  we  tend  to  realize  in  the  life 
zvhat  we  persistently  hold  in  the  thought  and 
vigorously  struggle  toward. 


III.    THE   LAW   OF   OPULENCE 


III.    THE    LAW   OF   OPULENCE 

'Tis  the  mind  that  makes  the  body  rich. — Shakespeare. 

One  of  the  most  \icious  ideas  that  ever  found  entrance 
into  human  brain  is  that  there  is  not  enough  of  every- 
thing for  everybody,  and  that  most  people  on  the  earth 
must  be  poor  in  order  that  a  few  may  be  rich. 


E  talk  abundance  here."  I 
was  struck  with  this  motto  in 
a  New  York  office  recently. 
I  said  to  myself :  "  These 
people  are  prosperous  be- 
cause they  expect  prosperity ; 
they  do  not  recognize  poverty 
or  admit  lacking  anything  they  need." 

The  way  to  make  the  ideal  the  real,  is  to 
persistently  hold  the  thought  of  their  identity. 
The  way  to  demonstrate  abundance  is  to  hold 
it  constantly  in  the  mind,  to  frequently  say 
to  yourself,  "  All  that  my  Father  hath  is 
mine."  "  The  Lord  is  my  shepherd :  I  shall 
not  want."  If  all  this  is  true  (and  you  know 
that  it  is),  any  want  or  lack  in  your  life  is 
abnormal. 

The  great  fundamental  principle  of  the  law 
of  opulence  is  our  inseparable  connection  with 
the  creative  energy  of  the  universe.  When  we 

37 


38     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

come  into  full  realization  of  this  connection 
we  shall  never  want  again.  It  is  our  sense  of 
separateness  from  the  Power  that  created  us 
that  makes  us  feel  helpless. 

But  as  long  as  we  limit  ourselves  by  think- 
ing that  we  are  separate,  insignificant,  un- 
related atoms  in  the  universe ;  that  the  great 
supply,  the  creative  energy  is  outside  of  us, 
and  that  only  a  little  of  it  can  in  some  mys- 
terious way  be  absorbed  by  a  few  people  who 
are  "  fortunate,"  "  lucky,"  we  shall  never 
come  into  that  abundant  supply  which  is  our 
birthright. 

And  where  did  the  false  idea  of  the  absorp- 
tion of  all  the  good  things  by  the  few,  of  the 
necessity  of  competition,  originate?  It  had  its 
origin  in  the  pessimistic  assumption  that  it  is 
impossible  for  everybody  to  be  wealthy  or 
successful ;  in  the  thought  of  limitation  of  all 
the  things  which  men  most  desire ;  and  that, 
there  not  being  enough  for  all,  a  few  must 
fight  desperately,  selfishly  for  zuhat  there  is, 
and  the  shrewdest,  the  longest-headed,  those 
with  the  most  staying  power,  the  strongest 
workers,  will  get  the  most  of  it.  This  theory 
is  fatal  to  all  individual  and  race  betterment. 

The  Creator  never  put  vast  multitudes 
of  people  on   this   earth   to  scramble    for  a 


THE   LAW    OF   OPULENCE        39 

limited  supply,  as  though  He  were  not  able  to 
furnish  enough  for  all.  There  is  nothing  in 
this  world  which  men  desire  and  struggle  for, 
and  that  is  good  for  them,  of  which  there  is 
not  enough  for  everybody. 

Take  the  thing  we  need  most — food.  We 
have  not  begun  to  scratch  the  possibilities  of 
the  food  supply  in  America. 

The  State  of  Texas  could  supply  food, 
home,  and  luxuries  to  every  man,  woman,  and 
child  on  this  continent.  As  for  clothing,  there 
is  material  enough  in  the  country  to  clothe 
all  its  inhabitants  in  purple  and  fine  linen. 
We  have  not  begun  yet  to  touch  the  possibili- 
ties of  our  clothing  and  dress  supply.  The 
same  is  true  of  all  other  necessities  and 
luxuries.  We  are  still  on  the  outer  surface  of 
abundance,  a  surface  covering  kingly  supplies 
for  every  individual  on  the  globe. 

When  the  whale  ships  in  New  Bedford 
Harbor  and  other  ports  were  rotting  in  idle- 
ness, because  the  whale  was  becoming  extinct, 
Americans  became  alarmed  lest  we  should 
dwell  in  darkness ;  but  the  oil  wells  came  to 
our  rescue  with  abundant  supply.  And  then, 
when  we  began  to  doubt  tiiat  this  source 
would  last,  Science  gave  us  the  electric  light. 

Like  Newton,  the  greatest  scientists  of  the 


40     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

world  still  feel  that  they  are  playing  with 
grains  of  sand  on  the  shore  of  our  illimitable 
supply  in  every  line  of  human  need.  The 
possibilities  of  finding  heat,  power,  and  light 
in  chemical  forces  should  the  coal  supply  fail 
are  simply  boundless. 

The  same  thing  is  true  of  food.  The  most 
advanced  agriculturist  feels  that  he  is  but  an 
amateur  when  it  comes  to  the  possibilities  of 
mixing  brains  with  the  soil.  Education  and 
knowledge  are  enabling  us  to  produce  more 
from  a  few  acres  of  soil  than  men  formerly 
produced  from  hundreds  of  acres.  Agriculture 
is  still  in  its  infancy.  We  know  almost  nothing 
as  yet  about  the  possibilities  of  getting  nitro- 
gen from  the  atmosphere,  and  of  renewing  the 
soil.  No  matter  which  way  we  turn,  Science 
matches  our  knowledge  with  her  marvellous 
reserves  and  nowhere  is  there  a  sign  of  limit. 

There  is  building  material  enough  to  give 
every  person  on  the  globe  a  mansion  finer 
than  any  that  a  Vanderbilt  or  Rothschild 
possesses.  It  was  intended  that  we  should  all 
be  rich  and  happy;  that  we  should  have  an 
abundance  of  all  the  good  things  the  heart 
can  crave.  We  should  live  in  the  realization 
that  there  is  an  abundance  of  power  where 
our  present  power  comes  from,  and  that  we 


THE   LAW   OF   OPULENCE        41 

can  draw  upon  this  great  source  for  as  much 
as  we  can  use. 

There  is  something  wrong  when  the  chil- 
dren of  the  King  of  kings  go  about  like  sheep 
hounded  by  a  pack  of  wolves.  There  is  some- 
thing wrong  when  those  who  have  inherited 
infinite  supply  are  worrying  about  their  daily 
bread ;  are  dogged  by  fear  and  anxiety  so  that 
they  cannot  take  any  peace ;  that  their  lives 
are  one  battle  with  want ;  that  they  are  always 
under  the  harrow  of  worry,  always  anxious. 
There  is  something  wrong  when  people  are 
so  worried  and  absorbed  in  making  a  living 
that  they  cannot  make  a  life. 

We  were  made  for  happiness,  to  express  joy 
and  gladness,  to  be  prosperous.  The  trouble 
with  us  is  that  we  do  not  trust  the  law  of  in- 
finite supply,  but  close  our  natures  so  that 
abundance  cannot  flow  to  us.  In  other  words, 
we  do  not  obey  the  law  of  attraction.  We 
keep  our  minds  so  pinched  and  our  faith  in 
ourselves  so  small,  so  narrow,  that  we  strangle 
the  inflow  of  supply.  Abundance  follows  a  law 
as  strict  as  that  of  mathematics.  If  we  obey 
it,  we  get  the  flow ;  if  we  strangle  it,  we  cut  it 
oflF.  The  trouble  is  not  in  the  supply ;  there  is 
abundance  awaiting  everyone  on  the  globe. 

The  majority  of  us  still  believe  in  the  idea 


42     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

of  competition.  We  regard  it  as  a  necessary 
principle  of  business,  as  is  indicated  by  such 
maxims  as  "  Competition  is  the  Hfe  of  trade." 

If  we  could  only  realize  and  feel  our  close, 
intimate  connection  with  the  Power  of  in- 
finite supply,  we  could  not  want. 

It  is  the  feeling  of  separateness  from  the 
great  Power  that  makes  us  fear,  just  as  the 
child's  separation  from  its  mother  fills  it  with 
fear  and  terror. 

When  we  shall  learn  the  cause  of  this  feel- 
ing of  separateness,  that  it  is  wrong  thinking, 
sin,  which  isolates  us,  we  shall  know  how  to 
get  in  touch  again  with  the  great  supplying 
Principle  of  the  universe. 

When  we  feel  a  sense  of  unity,  an  at-oneness 
with  the  Creator,  we  cannot  fear,  we  cannot 
want,  because  we  are  in  the  very  midst  of  the 
supply,  in  the  very  lap  of  abundance. 

It  is  impossible  for  God's  image  and  like- 
ness in  man  to  reflect  failure  or  poverty. 
Man's  divine  image  reflects  prosperity,  riches 
that  are  royal,  divine  abundance  that  never 
fails,  plenty  that  can  never  grow  less. 

Many  lives  are  like  the  great  Sahara  Desert, 
only  here  and  there  a  little  clump  of  green 
trees  and  flowers  where  there  happens  to  be 
a  little  moisture;  a  tiny  oasis  here  and  there. 


THE   LAW   OF   OPULENCE        43 

watered  by  a  little  encouragement — some  good 
fortune  that  has  come  even  in  spite  of  the  fact 
that  the  mental  attitude  has  been  totally  un- 
favorable to  the  production  of  prosperity. 

A  large,  generous  success  is  impossible  to 
many  people,  because  every  avenue  to  their 
minds  is  closed  by  doubt,  worry,  fear.  They 
have  shut  out  the  possibility  of  prosperity. 
Abundance  cannot  come  to  a  mind  that  is 
pinched,  shrivelled,  skeptical,  and  pessimistic. 

Prosperity  is  a  product  of  the  creative  mind. 
The  mind  that  fears,  doubts,  depreciates  its 
powers,  is  a  negative,  non-creative  mind,  one 
that  repels  prosperity,  repels  supply.  It  has 
nothing  in  common  with  abundance,  hence 
cannot  attract  it. 

Of  course,  men  do  not  mean  to  drive  op- 
portunity, prosperity,  or  abundance  away 
from  them ;  but  they  hold  a  mental  attitude 
filled  with  doubts  and  fears  and  lack  of  faith 
and  self-confidence,  which  virtually  does  this 
very  thing  without  their  knowing  it. 

Oh,  what  paupers  our  doubts  and  fears 
make  of  us! 

No  mind,  no  intellect  is  powerful  or  great 
enough  to  attract  wealth  while  the  mental 
attitude  is  turned  away  from  it — facing  in 
the  other  direction. 


44     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Our  pinched,  dwarfed,  blighted  lives  come 
from  inability  to  unite  with  the  great  Source  of 
all  supply.  All  our  limitations  are  in  our  own 
minds,  the  supply  is  there  waiting  in  vast 
abundance.  We  take  little  because  we  demand 
little,  because  we  are  afraid  to  take  the  much 
of  our  inheritance — the  abundance  that  is  our 
birthright.  We  starve  ourselves  in  the  midst 
of  plenty,  because  of  our  strangling  thought. 
The  opulent  life  stands  ready  to  take  us  into 
its  completeness,  but  our  ignorance  cuts  us 
off.  Hence  the  life  abundant,  the  river  of 
plenty,  opulence  unspeakable,  flow  past  our 
doors  and  we  starve  on  the  very  shores  of  the 
stream  which  carries  infinite  supply. 

It  is  not  in  our  nature  that  we  are  paupers, 
but  in  our  own  mean,  stingy  appreciation  of 
ourselves  and  our  powers.  The  idea  that 
riches  are  possible  only  to  those  who  have 
superior  advantages,  more  ability;  those  who 
have  been  favored  by  fate,  is  false  and  vicious. 

People  who  put  themselves  into  harmony 
with  the  law  of  opulence  harvest  a  fortune, 
while  those  who  do  not  in  many  cases  do  not 
find  enough  to  keep  them  alive. 

There  is  everything  in  feeling  opulent.  I 
know  a  lady  who  has  such  a  wonderful  ap- 
preciation of  everything  about  her,  who  has 


THE   LAW   OF   OPULENCE        45 

such  superb  ideas  of  life  and  the  grandeur 
of  its  meaning,  that  it  makes  one  feel  rich  to 
converse  with  her.  With  her  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  commonness.  The  most  ordinary  duties 
when  performed  by  her  are  lifted  into  dignity 
and  grandeur.  Things  come  to  her  without 
worrying  or  anxious  thought.  She  loves  every- 
body and  everybody  loves  her.  She  has  no 
grudges  against  anybody,  because  her  very 
nature  is  sunshine.  There  is  no  lack  in  her 
life,  because  she  believes  in  and  relies  without 
doubt  or  shadow  of  fear  on  the  Infinite 
Source  of  supply.  She  is  rich,  opulent  in  the 
truest  sense  of  the  word.  Such  people  make 
others  feel  rich. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  all  know  those  who, 
no  matter  how  much  money  they  may  have, 
never  suggest  opulence,  never  suggest  any- 
thing rich  or  grand,  because  their  natures  are 
starved,  shrivelled,  and  stunted.  Greed  and 
selfishness  have  sapped  all  the  juices  out  of 
their  lives  and  made  them  as  barren  of  sweet- 
ness as  sucked  oranges. 

We  must  think  plenty  before  we  can  realize 
it  in  the  life.  If  we  hold  the  poverty  thought, 
the  penury  thought,  the  thought  of  lack,  we 
cannot  demonstrate  abundance.  We  must  hold 
the  plenty  thought  if  we  would  reach  plenty. 


46     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

When  we  realize  the  fact  that  we  do  not 
need  to  look  outside  of  ourselves  for  what  we 
need ;  that  the  source  of  all  supply,  the  divine 
spring  which  can  quench  our  thirst,  is  within 
ourselves,  then  we  shall  not  want,  for  we 
know  that  we  only  have  to  dip  deep  into 
ourselves  to  touch  the  infinite  supply.  The 
trouble  with  us  is  that  we  do  not  abide  in 
abundance,  do  not  live  with  the  creative,  the 
all-supplying  sources  of  things. 

It  is  said  of  a  remarkably  successful  man 
of  our  times  that  he  is  unable  to  see  poverty. 
His  mind  is  so  constructed  that  he  seems  to 
see  abundance  everywhere,  and  believes  so 
implicitly  in  the  law  of  opulence  that  he 
demonstrates  it  easily.  He  has  no  doubts  to 
paralyze  his  endeavor. 

In  the  main  we  get  out  of  life  what  we 
have  concentrated  upon.  What  we  do,  our 
environment,  our  position,  our  condition,  are 
the  results  of  our  concentration,  our  life- 
focusing.  If  we  have  concentrated  upon 
poverty,  and  we  have  thus  pinched  our  inflow 
of  prosperity,  if  our  thoughts  have,  been  of 
our  unworthiness  and  the  conviction  that  the 
best  things  in  the  world  were  not  intended 
for  us,  of  course  we  shall  get  what  we  have 
concentrated  upon.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  we 


THE   LAW   OF   OPULENCE        47 

have  centred  our  thoughts  along  the  hnes  of 
prosperity,  of  abundance,  if  we  have  beUeved 
that  the  best  things  in  the  world  are  for  us, 
because  we  are  the  children  of  God,  and  that 
health,  happiness,  and  prosperity  are  our  birth- 
right, and  have  done  our  best  to  realize  our 
ideals,  then  our  surroundings,  our  condition 
will  outpicture  our  thought,  our  concentra- 
tion, our  mental  attitude. 

I  have  known  people  who  have  longed  all" 
their  lives  to  be  happy,  and  yet  they  have 
concentrated  their  minds  on  their  loneliness, 
their  friendlessness,  their  misfortunes.  They 
are  always  pitying  themselves  for  the  lack  of 
the  good  things  of  the  world.  The  whole  trend 
of  their  habitual  concentration  has  been  upon 
things  which  could  not  possibly  produce  what 
they  longed  for.  They  have  been  longing  for 
one  thing,  and  expecting  and  working  for 
something  else. 

It  is  a  great  thing  to  learn  to  live  in  the 
All-Life,  to  keep  close  to  infinite  supply. 
Many  of  us  imprison  ourselves  in  the  narrow 
limited  poverty  thought,  and  then,  like  caged 
eagles  trying  in  vain  to  get  free,  we  beat  out  our 
wings  against  the  bars  we  have  ourselves  put  up. 

Some  natures  are  naturally  filled  with  sug- 
gestions of  plenty  of  all  that  is  rich,  grand, 


48     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

and  noble.  Some  minds  are  so  constituted  that 
they  instinctively  plunge  right  into  the  mar- 
row of  creative  energy.  Producing  is  as  natu- 
ral to  them  as  breathing.  These  people  are  not 
hampered  by  doubts,  fears,  timidity,  or  lack  of 
faith  in  themselves.  They  are  confident,  bold, 
fearless  characters.  They  never  doubt  that  the 
infinite  supply  will  be  equal  to  their  demand 
upon  it.  Such  an  opulent,  positive  mental  at- 
titude is  creative  energy. 

When  we  have  faith  enough  in  the  law  of 
opulence  to  spend  our  last  dollar  with  the 
same  confidence  and  assurance  that  we  would 
if  we  had  thousands  more,  we  have  touched 
the  law  of  divine  supply. 

"  Charity  giveth  itself  rich.  Covetousness 
hoardeth  itself  poor." 

A  stream  of  plenty  will  not  flow  toward 
the  stingy,  parsimonious,  doubting  thought ; 
there  must  be  a  corresponding  current  of 
generosity,  open-mindedness,  going  out  from 
us.  One  current  creates  the  other.  A  little 
rivulet  of  stingy-mindedness,  a  weak,  poverty 
current  going  out  from  ourselves,  can  never 
set  up  a  counter-current  toward  us  of  abun- 
dance, generosity,  and  plenty.  In  other  words, 
our  mental  attitude  determines  the  counter- 
current  which  comes  to  us. 


THE    LAW    OF   OPULENCE        49 

Train  yourself  to  come  away  from  the 
thought  of  Hmitation,  away  from  the  thought 
of  lack,  of  want,  of  pinched  supply.  This 
thinking  abundance,  and  defying  limitation 
will  open  up  the  mind  and  set  thought  cur- 
rents toward  a  greatly  increased  supply. 

When  man  comes  into  the  full  realization 
that  God  is  his  never-failing  Supply,  the 
Source  of  Abundance,  the  great  Fountain 
Head  of  all  that  is  good  and  desirable,  and 
that  he  being  His  offspring,  must  be  a  part, 
an  indestructible  part  of  this  supply,  he  will 
never  more  know  poverty  or  lack  of  any  kind. 

The  sons  and  daughters  of  God  were 
planned  for  glorious,  sublime  lives,  and  the 
time  will  come  when  all  men  will  be  kings  and 
all  women  queens.  When  mans  higher  brain 
shall  have  triumphed  over  his  lozver  brain  and 
the  brute  shall  have  been  educated  out  of 
him,  there  will  be  no  poverty,  slavery,  or  vice. 
The  time  will  come  when  the  most  miserable 
creature  that  walks  on  the  globe  to-day  will 
be  higher  than  the  highest  now  on  the  earth. 
The  plan  of  creation  will  have  failed  if  every 
human  being  does  not  finally  come  into  his 
own  and  return  to  his  God  as  a  king. 


IV.      CHARACTER      BUILDING     AND 
HEALTH   BUILDING  DURING   SLEEP 


IV.      CHARACTER      BUILDING      AND 
HEALTH   BUILDING  DURING   SLEEP 

However  discordant  or  troubled  you  have  been  dur- 
ing the  day,  do  not  go  to  sleep  until  you  have  restored 
your  mental  balance,  until  your  faculties  are  poised 
and  your  mind  serene. 

HYSIOLOGISTS  tell  us  that 
the  mental  processes  which 
are  active  on  retiring,  con- 
tinue far  into  the  night. 
These  mental  impressions  on 
retiring,  just  before  going 
to  sleep,  the  thoughts  that 
dominate  the  mind,  continue  to  exercise  in- 
fluence long  after  we  become  unconscious. 

We  are  told,  too,  that  wrinkles  and  other 
evidences  of  age  are  formed  as  readily  during 
sleep  as  when  awake,  indicating  that  the  way 
the  mind  is  set  when  falling  asleep  has  a 
powerful  influence  on  the  body. 

]\Iany  people  cut  off  the  best  years  of  their 
lives  by  the  continuation  in  their  sleep  of  the 
wearing,  tearing,  rasping  influences  that  have 
been  operating  upon  them  during  the  day. 

Thousands  of  business  and  professional 
men  and  women  are  so  active  during  the  da}', 
live  such  strenuous,  unnatural  lives,  that  they 

53 


54     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

cannot  stop  thinking  after  they  retire,  and 
sleep  is  driven  away,  or  only  induced  after 
complete  mental  exhaustion.  These  people  are 
so  absorbed  in  the  problems  of  their  business 
or  vocations  that  they  do  not  know  how  to  re- 
lax, to  rest ;  so  they  lie  down  to  sleep  with  all 
their  cares,  just  as  a  tired  camel  lies  down  in 
the  desert  with  its  great  burden  still  on  its 
back. 

The  result  is  that,  instead  of  being  benefited 
by  refreshing,  rejuvenating  sleep,  they  get  up 
in  the  morning  weary,  much  older  than  when 
they  retired ;  when  they  ought  to  get  up  full 
of  vigor,  w'ith  a  great  surplus  of  energy  and 
bounding  vitality ;  strong  and  ambitious  for 
the  day's  work  before  them. 

The  corroding,  exhausting,  discord-produc- 
ing operations  which  are  going  on  when  they 
fall  asleep  and  which  continue  into  the  night, 
counteract  the  good  they  would  otherwise  get 
from  their  limited  amount  of  sleep.  All  this 
shows  the  importance  of  preparing  the  mind 
to  exercise  a  healthful,  uplifting  influence  dur- 
ing sleep. 

It  is  more  important  to  prepare  the  mind 
for  sleep  than  the  body.  The  mental  bath  is 
even  more  necessary  than  the  physical  one. 

The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  get  rid  of  the 


CHARACTER   BUILDING  55 

rasping,  worrying,  racking  influences  which 
have  been  operating  upon  us  during  the  day 
— to  clean  the  mental  house — to  tear  down  all 
the  dingy,  discouraging,  discordant  pictures 
that  have  disfigured  it,  and  hang  up  bright, 
cheerful,  encouraging  ones  for  the  night. 

Never  allow  yourself,  under  any  circum- 
stances, to  retire  in  a  discouraged,  despondent, 
gloomy  mood,  or  in  a  fit  of  temper.  Never  lie 
down  with  a  frown  on  your  brow ;  with  a 
perplexed,  troubled  expression  on  your  face. 
Smooth  out  the  wrinkles ;  drive  away  grudges, 
jealousies,  all  the  enemies  of  your  peace  of 
mind.  Let  nothing  tempt  you  to  go  to  sleep 
with  an  unkind,  critical,  jealous  thought  to- 
ward another  in  your  mind. 

It  is  bad  enough  to  feel  unkindly  toward 
others  when  under  severe  provocation,  or 
when  in  a  hot  temper,  but  you  cannot  afiford 
to  deliberately  continue  this  state  of  mind 
after  the  provocation  has  ceased  and  spoil 
your  sleep.  You  cannot  afiford  the  wear  and 
tear.  It  takes  too  much  out  of  you.  Life  is  too 
short,  time  too  precious  to  spend  any  part  of 
it  in  unprofitable,  health-wrecking,  soul-rack- 
ing thoughts.  Be  at  peace  with  all  the  world  at 
least  once  in  every  twenty-four  hours.  You 
cannot  afiford  to  allow  the  enemies  of  your 


56     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

happiness  to  etch  their  miserable  images 
deeper  and  deeper  into  your  character  as  you 
sleep.  Erase  them  all.  Start  every  night  with 
a  clean  slate. 

If  you  have  been  impulsive,  foolish,  wicked 
during  the  day  in  your  treatment  of  others ;  if 
you  have  been  holding  a  revengeful,  ugly, 
or  jealous  attitude  toward  others,  wipe  off 
your  mental  slate  now  and  start  anew.  Obey 
the  injunction  of  St.  Paul,  "  Let  not  the  sun 
go  down  upon  your  wrath." 

If  you  have  difficulty  in  banishing  un- 
pleasant or  torturing  thoughts,  force  yourself 
to  read  some  good,  inspiring  book ;  some- 
thing that  will  take  out  vour  wrinkles  and 
put  you  in  a  happy  mood,  and  will  reveal  to 
you  the  real  grandeur  and  beauty  of  life; 
that  will  make  you  feel  ashamed  of  your 
petty  meannesses  and  narrow,  uncharitable 
thoughts. 

Saturate  your  mind  with  pleasant  memories 
and  with  dreams  of  great  expectations.  Just 
imagine  yourself  the  man  or  woman  you  long 
to  become,  filled  with  happiness,  prosperity, 
and  power.  Hold  tenaciously  the  ideal  of  the 
character  you  most  admire,  the  personality  to 
which  you  aspire — the  broad,  magnanimous, 
large-hearted,  deep-minded,  lovable  soul  which 


CHARACTER   BUILDING  57 

you  wish  it  were  possible  for  you  to  become. 
The  habit  of  such  beautiful  life-picturing  and 
the  power  of  reverie  on  retiring  will  very 
quickly  begin  to  reproduce  itself,  outpicture 
itself  in  your  life. 

After  a  little  practice,  you  will  be  surprised 
to  see  how  quickly  and  completely  you  can 
change  your  whole  mental  attitude,  so  that 
you  will  face  life  the  right  way  before  you 
fall  asleep. 

A  prominent  business  man  told  me  recently 
that  his  great  weakness  was  his  inability  to 
stop  thinking  after  retiring.  This  man,  who 
is  very  active  during  the  day  and  works  at  a 
high  tension,  has  a  sensitive  nervous  organiza- 
tion, and  his  brain  keeps  on  working  both 
before  and  after  he  falls  asleep  as  intensely 
as  it  did  during  the  day.  In  this  way  he  is 
robbed  of  so  much  sleep  and  what  he  gets  is 
so  troubled  and  unrefreshing,  that  he  feels 
all  used  up  the  next  day. 

I  advised  him  to  cultivate  the  habit  of  clos- 
ing the  door  of  his  business  brain  at  the  same 
time  that  he  closed  the  door  of  his  business 
office,  "  You  should,"  I  said,  "  insist  on  chang- 
ing the  current  of  your  thoughts  when  you 
leave  your  business  for  the  day,  just  as  you 
change  your  environment,  or  as  you  change 


58     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

your  dress  for  dinner  when  you  go  home  in 
the  evening.  Turn  your  thoughts  to  your  wife 
and  children,  to  their  joys  and  interests ; 
talk  to  them,  play  games  with  them;  read 
some  humorous  or  entertaining  story,  or  some 
strong,  interesting  book  that  will  lift  you,  in 
spite  of  yourself,  out  of  your  business  rut.  Go 
out  for  a  long  walk  or  a  ride ;  fill  your  lungs 
with  strong,  sweet,  fresh  air ;  look  about  you 
and  observe  the  beauties  of  nature.  Or  have 
a  hobby  of  some  kind  to  which  you  can  turn 
for  recreation  and  refreshment  when  you  quit 
your  regular  business.  Be  master  of  your 
mind.  Learn  to  control  it,  instead  of  allowing 
it  to  control  you  and  tyrannize  over  you. 

"  Hang  up  in  your  bedchamber,  in  a  con- 
spicuous place  where  you  can  always  see  it, 
a  card  bearing  in  bold  illuminated  letters  this 
motto :  '  No  Thinking  Here.' 

"  Shut  off  all  thinking  processes  of  every 
kind  when  you  retire  for  the  night,  relax 
every  muscle ;  let  there  be  no  tension  of  mind 
or  body,  and  in  a  short  time  you  will  find  that 
sleep  will  come  to  you  as  easily  and  naturally 
as  to  a  little  child,  and  that  it  will  be  as  un- 
troubled, as  sweet  and  refreshing  as  that  of 
a  child." 

To  all  who  are  troubled  as  this  man  was. 


CHARACTER    BUILDING  59 

I  would  offer  the  same  advice,  for  its  adoption 
has  proved  very  successful  in  his  case. 

It  is  a  great  art  to  be  able  to  shut  the 
gates  of  the  mental  power-house  on  retiring, 
to  control  oneself,  to  put  oneself  in  tune  with 
the  Infinite,  in  sympathy  with  those  about  him, 
and  in  harmony  with  the  world;  to  expel 
from  the  mind  everything  which  jars  or  ir- 
ritates— all  malice,  envy,  and  jealousy,  the 
enemies  of  our  peace  and  happiness — before 
we  go  to  sleep.  Yet  it  is  an  art  that  all  can 
acquire. 

It  is  possible  for  everyone,  either  by  think- 
ing, reading,  or  pleasant  social  influences,  to 
conquer  all  discordant  moods,  to  overcome 
every  unkind  feeling,  to  banish  every  frown 
from  the  face,  every  wrinkle  from  the  mind, 
and  to  go  to  sleep  with  a  smile  on  the  face. 

When  you  go  to  sleep  in  the  right  mental 
attitude  you  will  be  surprised  to  find  how 
serene  and  calm,  how  refreshed  and  cheerful, 
you  will  be  when  you  awake  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  how  much  easier  it  will  be  to  start 
right  and  to  wear  a  smile  for  the  day  than 
it  was  when  you  went  to  bed  worrying,  ill- 
humored,  or  full  of  ungenerous,  uncharitable 
thoughts. 

The  devotional  attitude  on  retiring  to  sleep 


6o     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

is  of  very  great  value,  inasmuch  as  it  tends 
to  soothe,  cahn,  and  reassure  the  mind,  to 
destroy  all  fear,  worry  and  anxious  thoughts 
and  to  put  one  in  tune  with  higher,  nobler 
thoughts. 

Persistency  in  preparing  the  mind  for 
peaceful,  healthful,  happy  sleep  will  prolong 
your  life  and  your  youth.  More  important  still, 
it  will  have  a  far-reaching  influence  on  your 
health  and  the  foundation  of  your  character. 
The  habit  of  clearing  the  mental  temple  of 
all  discords,  error,  hatred,  revenge,  every- 
thing which  tends  to  gloom  and  darkness  be- 
fore going  to  sleep,  and  persisting  in  holding 
bright  pictures  in  the  mind,  in  dwelling  on 
noble  and  uplifting  thoughts,  will  in  time 
revolutionize  the  whole  life. 

We  are  just  beginning  to  realize  that  there 
is  an  enormous  power  lying  dormant  in  the 
Great  Within  of  us,  and  that  this  latent  force 
or  power  seems  to  be  very  susceptible  to 
stimulus  during  sleep,  when  the  objective 
world  and  its  many  disturbing  conditions  are 
absent. 

We  little  realize  the  amount  of  activity — 
undirected  activity — that  goes  on  in  our  sub- 
conscious minds  during  sleep. 

There  is  a  lot  of  unconscious  philosophy  in 


CHARACTER    BUILDING  6i 

the  expression  one  so  often  utters,  "  I  would 
like  to  sleep  over  this  proposition,"  problem — 
or  whatever  it  is.  Without  knowing  the  secret 
of  it,  we  realize  that  things  somehow  clear  up 
during  sleep  in  a  remarkable  way.  We  see 
things  in  a  different  light  in  the  morning. 
Perhaps  the  thing  we  were  most  enthusiastic 
over  the  night  before,  and  which,  had  we 
carried  out,  would  have  been  obviously  in- 
jurious, often  seems  silly,  ill-advised,  im- 
possible to  us  in  the  morning,  not  because  we 
really  consciously  thought  much  about  it,  but 
because  there  is  something  in  our  subcon- 
scious mentality  M'hich  often  solves  knotty 
problems  for  us  while  asleep — problems  which 
staggered  us  in  our  waking  hours. 

Great  mathematicians,  scientists,  and  as- 
tronomers have  many  times  been  surprised  to 
find  very  difficult  problems  that  their  reason 
could  not  elucidate  during  the  day  solved 
without  apparent  effort  during  sleep. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  much  of  our  moral 
education  and  character-forming  is  carried  on 
during  sleep  subconsciously,  and  since  the 
psychology  of  this  education  and  character- 
forming  during  sleep  is  based  on  the  fact  that 
the  processes  which  are  going  on  in  the  brain 
when  we  fall  asleep  tend  to  continue  during 


62     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

the  night,  we  can  readily  see  what  marvellous 
possibilities  lie  in  the  right  direction  and 
guidance  of  this  mysterious  subconscious 
power. 

I  know  persons  who  have  performed  won- 
ders in  reforming  themselves  by  self-sugges- 
tion on  retiring  at  night,  holding  the  happy, 
inspiring,  helpful  suggestion  in  the  mind  up 
to  the  point  of  unconsciousness.  Persons  have 
overcome  ugly  tempers  and  dispositions  in 
this  way  as  well  as  other  unfortunate  traits. 
The  holding  of  the  vigorous,  robust,  healthy 
ideal — the  ideal  and  the  spirit  of  youth — has 
immense  possibilities  in  the  way  of  self-re- 
freshment, reinvigoration,  and  rejuvenation, 
and  is  especially  helpful  to  those  who  are  ad- 
vanced in  years. 

If  those  who  are  inclined  to  melancholy  and 
the  "  blues  "  would,  just  before  going  to  sleep, 
insist  on  the  nothingness  of  these  delusions, 
and  substitute  the  bright,  cheerful,  hopeful, 
optimistic  thought,  they  would  very  soon  over- 
come this  unfortunate  tendency. 

If  poverty  is  grinding  us  under  its  heel,  we 
should  affirm  before  going  to  sleep  that  the 
Creator  has  provided  sufficient  to  give  every- 
one the  necessaries  and  comforts  of  life,  with- 
out any  worry  about  them  on  our  part.  Instead 


CHARACTER    BUILDING  63 

of  thinking  of  poverty  we  should  hold  in  the 
mind  the  suggestion  of  opulence,  of  pros- 
perity. We  thus  make  the  action  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind  attract  to  us  what  we  need 
and  desire. 

If  we  have  any  defect  or  weakness,  we 
should  hold  firmly  and  persistently  in  mind, 
before  we  go  to  sleep,  just  the  opposite  char- 
acteristic or  quality ;  this  will  tend  to  attract 
to  us  the  thing  we  long  for.  If  we  desire  to 
overcome  any  vice,  we  should  plead  the  whole- 
ness, the  completeness  which  we  long  to  attain. 

Bad  tem.per,  inebriety,  selfishness  and  deceit- 
fulness,  all  sorts  of  vicious  and  immoral  ten- 
dencies, have  been  eradicated  in  this  manner. 

Children  seem  especially  susceptible  to  sug- 
gestion, or  what,  for  a  better  name,  may  be 
called  the  "  going-to-sleep  "  treatment.  This  is 
because  the  subconscious  mind  is  particularly 
active  in  the  young  and  much  more  easily 
reached,  especially  during  the  first  stages  of 
sleep,  when  just  dropping  into  unconscious- 
ness. 

Truths  emphasized  at  this  time  will  be 
remembered  more  readily  by  the  child  and  are 
more  likely  to  be  acted  upon  during  the  wak- 
ing hours  than  those  which  are  emphasized 
while  he  is  awake,  for  when  he  is  in  the  sub- 


64     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

conscious  state  he  does  not  antagonize  ad- 
vice. 

Some  very  remarkable  results  in  the  cor- 
rection of  vicious  tendencies  in  children  have 
recently  been  accomplished  by  appealing  to 
their  divine  natures — their  better  selves — 
through  mental  suggestion  during  sleep. 

The  effective  treatment  of  sickness  in  in- 
fants and  children  through  the  medium  of 
such  suggestioij  shows  how  easily  the  subcon- 
sciousness can  be  influenced  when  the  child 
is  in  the  unconscious,  or  semiconscious  state. 

If  a  child  is  naturally  timid,  and  afraid  of 
"  ghosts,"  the  darkness,  or  any  other  thing, 
the  mother  can  often  help  it  to  overcome  these 
fears  by  talking  to  it  while  it  is  dropping  to 
sleep.  If  it  is  weak,  delicate  or  ill,  she  can 
suggest  the  healing  Christ-truth,  the  health- 
ideal,  strength,  vigor,  harmony.  If  it  is  timid, 
she  can  suggest  confidence  and  courage. 

The  suggestion  of  success  to  the  child  who 
has  been  backward  in  school,  or  who  has 
failed  in  his  studies,  will  often  have  a  wonder- 
ful effect  in  the  way  of  establishing  confidence 
and  hope. 

If  the  mother  talks  to  her  child  and  reasons 
with  it  as  it  drops  off  into  sleep,  just  as  she 
would  if  the  child  were  awake,  she  will  find 


CHARACTER    BUILDING  65 

that  her  words  will  have  far  more  effect  than 
if  he  were  conscious,  for  the  stubbornness,  the 
natural  inclination  to  resist,  to  do  that  which 
is  forbidden,  which  is  present  in  the  child's 
mind  during  its  waking  hours,  is  quiescent, 
and  it  listens  to  and  heeds  its  mother's  advice 
quietly,  naturally,  unquestioningly.  The  wise 
mother  who  makes  all  sorts  of  good  sugges- 
tions to  her  children  in  her  talks — substituting 
the  good  for  the  bad,  love  for  hatred  and  jeal- 
ousy, unselfishness  for  selfishness — soon  finds 
a  marked  change  in  their  dispositions.  By  in- 
jecting into  the  little  Hfe  confidence,  hope, 
love,  joy,  courage,  self-reliance,  purity — all 
the  higher  and  nobler  attributes — she  can 
wonderfully  change  her  child's  disposition. 

The  time  will  come  when  all  mothers  will 
understand  the  importance  of  suggestion  in 
influencing  a  child's  conduct  and  shaping  its 
character. 

A  few  already  recognize  the  power  of 
mental  suggestion  in  all  its  forms,  but  in  the 
new  age  that  is  coming,  none  will  be  ignorant 
of  its  wonderful  character-forming  and  life- 
transforming  possibilities. 

If  those  who  have  not  tried  it  before  begin 
now,  I  am  sure  that  in  a  very  short  time  they 
will  be  surprised  at  the  beneficent  results  that 


66     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

will  follow  this  persistent  practice  of  flooding 
the  mind  with  pure  and  noble  thoughts  before 
going  to  sleep — close  up  to  the  very  point  of 
unconsciousness. 

I  am  sure  those  who  try  it  will  find  delight 
and  satisfaction  in  the  habit  not  only  of  clear- 
ing the  mind  before  going  to  sleep  of  all 
worry  and  anxiety,  all  grudges  and  jealousies 
— of  everything  that  clouds  the  intellect — but 
also  in  stoutly  and  persistently  claiming  the 
things  which  they  long  for  as  already  theirs. 

Be  sure  that  when  you  fall  asleep  there  is 
only  that  in  your  consciousness  which  will 
help  you  to  be  more  of  a  man — more  of  a 
woman.  Determine  that  your  mind,  when  you 
lose  conscious  thought,  shall  have  in  it  no 
black  images  and  no  dark  spots,  but  only 
beautiful  images  and  thoughts  of  hope  and 
good  will  toward  every  living  creature ;  that 
there  shall  be  no  failure  thought,  no  poverty 
thought,  no  ugly,  discordant  thought,  but  that 
everything  shall  be  bright,  cheerful,  hopeful, 
helpful  and  optimistic. 


V.    HEALTH    THROUGH    RIGHT 
THINKING 


V.    HEALTH 
THINKING 


THROUGH   RIGHT 


There  is  a  nobleness  of  mind  that  heals 
Wounds  beyond  salves. 

— Cartwright. 

"God  never  made  his  work  for  man  to  mend." 


ROFESSOR  WILLIAM 
JAMES,  of  Harvard  Univer- 
sity, says  "  we  are  just  now 
witnessing  a  very  copious  un- 
locking of  new  ideas  through 
the  converts  to  metaphysical 
healing,  or  other  forms  of 
spiritual  philosophy.  The  ideas  are  healthy- 
minded  and  optimistic.  The  power,  small  or 
great,  comes  in  various  shapes  to  the  individ- 
ual ;  power  not  to  '  mind  '  things  that  used  to 
vex  one ;  power  to  concentrate  one's  mind ; 
good  cheer ;  good  temper ;  a  firmer  and  more 
elastic  tone.  The  most  saintly  person  I  have 
ever  known  is  a  friend  now  suffering  from  can- 
cer of  the  breast.  I  do  not  assume  to  judge  of 
the  wisdom  or  unwisdom  of  her  disobedience 
to  the  doctors,  but  cite  her  case  here  solely  as 
an  example  of  what  an  idea  can  do.  Her  ideas 
have  kept  her  practically  a  well  woman  for 

69 


70     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

months  after  she  would  otherwise  have  given 
up  and  gone  to  bed.  They  have  annulled  pain 
and  weakness  and  given  her  a  cheerful,  active 
life ;  a  life  unusually  beneficent  to  those 
around  her." 

Few  people  realize  how  largely  their  health 
depends  upon  the  saneness  of  their  thinking. 
You  cannot  hold  ill-health  thoughts,  disease 
thoughts,  in  the  mind  without  having  them 
outpictured  in  the  body.  The  thought  will  ap- 
pear in  the  body  somewhere,  and  its  quality 
will  determine  the  results — sound  or  unsound, 
healthful  or  unhealthful.  As  it  is  impossible 
for  a  person  to  remain  absolutely  pure  who 
habitually  holds  pictures  of  impurity  in  the 
imagination,  so  it  is  just  as  impossible  to  be 
healthy  while  holding  the  disease  thought. 
There  cannot  be  harmony  in  the  body  with 
disease  in  the  mind. 

The  health  stream,  if  polluted  at  all,  is 
polluted  at  the  fountain-head — in  the  thought, 
in  the  ideal. 

The  different  organs  seem  to  be  especially 
susceptible  to  certain  kinds  of  mental  in- 
fluence. Excessive  selfishness,  covetousness, 
envy,  especially  affect  the  liver  and  the  spleen.  \ 
Hatred  and  anger  have  a  very  aggravating 
influence  upon  some  diseases  of  the  Hdneys. 


HEALTH  71 

Jealousy  seriously  affects  both  the  liver  and 
the  heart. 

If  there  is  fear,  worry,  anxiety  in  the  mind, 
the  heart's  action  indicates  it  quickly.  There 
is  no  doubt  that  where  mental  discord,  such 
as  worry,  anxiety  and  jealousy,  have  become 
chronic,  the  heart  suffers  accordingly.  Thou- 
sands of  people  have  died  from  heart  troubles 
which  have  been  induced  by  mental  discord. 

Dr.  Snow  in  the  London  Lancet  asserts  his 
conviction  that  the  vast  majority  of  cases  of 
cancer,  especially  of  breast  and  uterine  cancer, 
are  due  to  mental  anxiety  and  worry.  Jaun- 
dice from  anxiety  is  reported  by  Dr.  Churton 
in  the  British  Medical  Journal. 

The  liver  is  affected  very  materially  by  dis- 
cordant thought.  Jaundice  often  follows  great 
mental  shocks,  especially  frequent  great  and 
prolonged  outbursts  of  temper. 

It  is  well  known  that  many  people  are  made 
bilious  by  long-continued  despondency  and 
worry. 

Dr.  Murchison,  an  eminent  authority,  says : 
"  I  have  been  surprised  how  often  patients 
with  primary  cancer  of  the  liver  have  traced 
the  cause  of  this  ill-health  to  protracted  grief  or 
anxiety.  The  cases  have  been  far  too  numer- 
ous to  be  accounted  for  as  mere  coincidences." 


72     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

The  functions  of  the  skin  are  seriously 
affected  by  the  emotions. 

Sir  B.  W.  Richardson,  in  his  work  "  The 
Field  of  Disease,"  says : 

"  Eruptions  on  the  skin  will  follow  ex- 
cessive mental  strain.  In  all  these,  and  in 
cancer,  epilepsy,  and  mania  from  mental 
causes,  there  is  a  predisposition.  It  is  remark- 
able," he  adds,  "  how  little  the  question  of  the 
origin  of  physical  disease  from  mental  in- 
fluences has  been  studied." 

We  can  never  gain  health  by  contemplating 
disease,  any  more  than  we  can  reach  perfection 
by  dwelling  upon  imperfection,  or  harmony 
by  dwelling  upon  discord. 

We  should  keep  a  high  ideal  of  health  and 
harmony  constantly  before  the  mind ;  and  we 
should  fight  every  discordant  thought  and 
every  enemy  of  harmony  as  we  would  fight 
a  temptation  to  crime.  Never  aiHrm  or  repeat 
about  your  health  what  you  do  not  zvish  to 
\e  true.  Do  not  dwell  upon  your  ailments  nor 
-Vudy  your  symptoms.  Physicians  tell  us  that 
perfect  health  is  impossible  to  the  self-dis- 
sector, who  is  constantly  thinking  of  himself, 
studying  himself,  and  forever  on  the  alert  for 
the  least  symptom  of  disease. 

Librarians  report  that  there  is  an  astonish- 


HEALTH  73 

ing  demand  among  readers  for  medical  books. 
Many  who  imagine  they  have  some  particular 
disease  often  develop  a  morbid  curiosity  or 
desire  to  read  everything  they  can  get  hold 
of  that  bears  upon  the  subject.  When  they 
find,  as  they  do  frequently,  that  some  of  the 
symptoms  of  the  disease  they  are  reading 
about  coincides  with  their  own,  the  conviction 
is  still  more  deeply  fastened  in  thtlr  minds 
that  they  have  this  disease.  The  strength  of 
this  conviction  is  often  their  greatest  hindrance 
to  a  cure. 

Nervous  people  with  vivid  imaginations 
rarely  see  life  in  a  perfectly  sane  and  health- 
ful way ;  they  are  very  apt  to  become  morbid 
and  to  make  mountains  out  of  molehills.  Every 
little  ache  or  pain  is  exaggerated  and  inter- 
preted as  a  symptom  of  something  worse  t<^ 
come. 

These  people  are  powerfully  affected  by 
hereditary  convictions.  If  they  have  an  unfor- 
tunate family  history ;  if  their  ancestors  died 
of  consumption,  cancer,  or  any  other  of  the 
dread  diseases,  the  conviction  that  they  are 
likely  to  develop  one  or  the  other  of  these 
fatal  maladies  hangs  like  a  pall  over  their 
lives,  seriously  impairs  their  health,  and  para- 
lyzes their  efficiency. 


74     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

What  a  terrible  thing-  to  go  through  life 
with  such  a  nightmare  staring  one  in  the  face ! 
How  foolish,  and  destructive  of  all  power,  to 
live  with  the  spectre  of  death  constantly  by 
one's  side;  to  drag  through  years  with  the 
settled  conviction  that  you  are  not  going  to 
live  long ;  that  there  are  terrible  disease  seeds 
within  you  which  are  liable  to  develop  at  any 
time  and  carry  you  off! 

Think  of  a  person  spending  years  in  getting 
a  college  and  professional  education,  and  more 
years  still  in  training  for  a  specialty,  while  all 
the  time  haunted  by  the  possibility  that  he 
may  be  thwarted  by  the  development  of  some 
terrible  hereditary  disease  which  may  prema- 
turely cut  off  his  life !  It  would  be  enough  to 
kill  the  ambition  of  a  Napoleon. 

I  know  people  in  delicate  health  who  habitu- 
ally hold  in  their  minds  sick  and  discordant 
thoughts.  They  are  always  thinking  and  talk- 
ing of  their  ailments.  They  gloat  over  their 
symptoms,  watch  them,  study  them,  look  for 
them,  until  they  have  what  they  expect — for 
like  produces  like ;  it  cannot  produce  anything 
else.  A  reversal  of  the  thought — thinking  of 
health  instead  of  disease,  and  holding  in  mind 
the  health  picture  instead  of  the  disease  pic- 
ture— would   cure  many   an   invalid   without 


HEALTH  75 

medicine.  Healthy  thought  is  the  greatest 
panacea  in  the  world. 

Many  people  not  only  cripple  their  effi- 
ciency, but  keep  themselves  sick,  or  in  a  con- 
dition of  semi-invalidism  or  diminished  power, 
by  holding  constantly  in  their  minds  negative 
suggestions  as  indicated  by  such  expressions 
as :  "  Oh,  I  do  not  feel  well  to-day  " ;  "  I  feel 
miserable  "  ;  "  I  am  weak  "  ;  "  I  am  half  sick  " ; 
"  My  food  does  not  agree  with  me  " ;  "I  did 
not  sleep  well  last  night,  and  I  know  I  shall 
not  be  good  for  much  to-day." 

If  you  are  constantly  saying  to  yourself,  "  I 
am  wretched,  weak  and  sick,"  "  I  am  running 
down  all  the  time,"  how  can  you  expect  to  be- 
come strong  and  well  ?  '*  According  to  thy 
word  be  it  unto  thee." 

Health  and  vigor  will  never  come  to  you  if 
you  perpetually  harp  upon  your  weakness  and 
pity  yourself  because  of  your  poor  health. 
Health  is  integrity.  Health  is  wholeness,  com- 
pleteness, n  you  talk  anything  else,  you  will 
get  it,  for  "  According  to  thy  word  be  it  unto 
thee." 

Imagine  yourself  an  attorney  pleading  the 
cause  of  your  health.  Summon  up  every  bit  of 
evidence  you  can  possibly  find.  Do  not  give 
away  your  case  to  your  opponent.   Plead  it 


76     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

vigorously  with  all  the  strength  you  can  com- 
mand. 

You  will  be  surprised  to  see  how  your  body 
will  respond  to  such  mental  pleading;  such 
robust,  vigorous,  healthy  affirmative  argument. 

I  know  of  a  case  where  a  physician  in  pass- 
ing through  a  ward  thoughtlessly  said  to  the 
nurse,  in  a  voice  loud  enough  for  the  patient 
to  overhear,  "  That  man  cannot  live."  The 
young  man  happened  to  know  enough  about 
the  power  of  the  mind  as  a  restorative  to  as- 
sert himself,  and  said  to  the  nurse  with  great 
emphasis,  "  I  will  live."  He  got  well. 

We  do  not  realize  how  we  weaken  our- 
selves and  destroy  our  powers  of  disease 
resistance  by  harboring  the  sick,  the  disease 
thought,  by  holding  in  the  mind  the  idea  of 
physical  weakness  and  debility. 

If  we  could  always  keep  in  the  mind  the 
strong,  robust,  vigorous  ideal,  the  health  ideal, 
the  ideal  of  power  instead  of  weakness,  the 
ideal  of  perfection,  wholeness,  completeness ; 
if  we  could  only  keep  in  the  mind  the  ideal  of 
the  divine  man  God  intended,  and  not  the  mere 
burlesque  of  a  man  which  the  breaking  of 
laws,  bad  living,  and  sinning  have  produced ; 
if  we  could  only  carry  the  ideal  of  personal 
power,  which  is  our  birthright,  there  would 


HEALTH 


77 


be  -no  room  for  the  harboring-  of  the  sickly 
ideal — the  weak,  debilitated,  decrepit  ideal. 

If  it  were  possible  to  have  the  mind  in  us 
which  was  in  Christ,  we  should  not  have  dis- 
ease. Disease  could  not  attack  us  any  more 
than  impurity  or  sin  could  find  lodgment  in 
His  mind.  The  time  will  come  when  right 
thinking  will  be  the  great  preventive  medicine 
for  all  mankind,  and  when  physical  discord 
will  indicate  that  someone  has  sinned  in  his 
thought.  Humboldt  said,  "  The  time  will  come 
when  it  will  be  considered  a  disgrace  for  a 
man  to  be  sick,  when  the  world  will  look  upon 
it  as  a  misdemeanor,  the  result  of  some  vicious 
thinking." 

I  believe  the  time  will  come  when  disease 
will  not  be  able  to  fasten  itself  upon  those 
whose  thought  is  pure,  clean,  and  strong,  be- 
cause this  quality  of  thought  is  healing.  We 
used  to  regard  dyspepsia,  for  example,  as  the 
result  of  a  disordered  stomach.  Now  we  know 
it  is  the  result  of  the  disordered,  discordant 
thought.  It  is  the  legitimate  child  of  worry 
and  anxiety,  of  jealousy  and  remorse. 

The  time  will  come  when  greed  and  all 
forms  of  selfishness  will  be  looked  upon  as  a 
disease  which  we  pay  very  dearly  for  in  the 
outpicturing  of  some  physical  discord.  People 


78     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

little  realize  what  price  they  pay  in  physical 
suffering  for  their  selfishness. 

We  cannot  think  ill-health ;  we  cannot  hold 
the  thought  of  disease ;  we  cannot  harbor  con- 
victions that  this  disease  or  that  is  lurking  in 
the  system — that  there  are  seeds  of  disease 
within  us  only  waiting  for  an  opportunity  to 
develop  and  destroy  us  without  seriously  im- 
pairing the  harmony  of  the  body  and  its  ef- 
ficiency. 

Every  discordant  thought,  every  thought  of 
ill-health,  all  the  vivid  pictures  of  unfortunate 
physical  conditions  held  in  the  imagination, 
all  the  horrible  ghosts  of  fear — the  things  we 
dread  and  are  anxious  about — all  the  passions 
of  anger  and  hatred,  jealousy  and  envy,  greed 
and  selfishness,  impair  or  ruin  digestion  and 
assimilation,  and  affect  the  integrity  of  all 
physical  functions. 

The  mind  is  the  health  sculptor,  and  we 
cannot  surpass  the  mental  health  pattern.  If 
there  is  a  weakness  or  a  flaw  in  the  thinking 
model,  there  will  be  corresponding  deficiencies 
in  the  health  statue. 

So  long  as  we  think  ill-health  and  doubt 
our  ability  to  be  strong  and  vigorous ;  so  long 
as  we  hold  the  conviction  of  the  presence  of 
inherited  weaknesses  and  disease  tendencies ; 


HEALTH  79 

so  long  as  the  model  is  defective — perfect 
health  is  impossible.  The  life,  the  health  follow 
the  thought,  the  conviction. 

Somehow  most  people  seem  to  think  that 
health  is  something  fixed  by  a  sort  of  destiny 
or  fate ;  that  it  is  largely  a  question  of  heredity 
and  constitution  which  cannot  be  materially 
altered. 

But  why  should  we  not  think  the  same 
about  our  happiness,  about  our  vocation?  We 
take  infinite  pains  and  spend  many  years  in 
preparing  ourselves  for  our  life-work.  We 
know  that  a  successful  career  must  be  based 
upon  scientific  principles  of  training,  of  sys- 
tem and  order ;  that  every  step  of  a  successful 
career  must  be  taken  only  after  great  thought 
and  consideration.  We  know  that  it  means 
years  of  hard  work  to  establish  ourselves  in 
life  in  a  profession  or  business  ;  but  our  health, 
upon  which  everything  else  hangs — upon 
which  it  depends  absolutely — we  take  very 
little  trouble  to  establish. 

When  we  remember  that  the  integrity  and 
efficiency  of  all  the  mental  faculties  depend 
upon  health ;  that  robust  health  multiplies  ten- 
fold the  power  of  our  initiative ;  increases 
our  creative  ability ;  generates  enthusiasm  and 
spontaneity;  strengthens  the  quality  of  judg- 


8o     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ment,  the  power  of  discrimination,  and  the 
force  of  decision,  the  power  of  execution,  we 
should  be  very  diligent  to  establish  it. 

We  should  lay  a  foundation  for  our  health 
just  as  we  establish  anything  of  importance — 
by  studying  and  adopting  the  sanest  and  the 
most  scientific  methods.  We  should  think 
health,  talk  health,  hold  the  health  ideal,  just 
as  a  law  student  should  think  law,  talk  law, 
read  law,  live  in  a  law  atmosphere. 

Health  is  largely  a  moral  question.  Sys- 
tematic living  alone  will  not  produce  it.  We 
must  establish  it  by  right  thinking,  sane  think- 
ing. 

Health  can  be  established  only  by  thinking 
health  instead  of  disease,  strength  instead  of 
weakness,  harmony  instead  of  discord,  truth 
thoughts  instead  of  error  thoughts,  love 
thoughts  instead  of  hatred  thoughts ;  by  up- 
building thoughts  which  are  constructive  in- 
stead of  destructive — tearing  down. 

Confidence  is  a  powerful  factor  in  health. 
We  should  thoroughly  believe  in  our  ability 
to  keep  ourselves  well  by  healthful,  harmo- 
nious, happy  thinking. 

So  long  as  we  doubt  our  ability  to  maintain 
health,  so  long  as  we  picture  to  ourselves  dis- 
ease and  physical  weakness  and  vicious  or  in- 


HEALTH  8i 

herited  tendencies — it  is  impossible  to  attain 
*n  a  strong,  normal  physical  condition, 
'mfhe  time  will  come  when  we  will  no  more 
cXVow  discordant  thoughts  in  our  mind  than 
we  would  scatter  thistle  seeds  over  our  gar- 
dens. Knowing  well  that  thinking  is  building, 
our  thinking  will  be  reflected  in  our  bodies. 

To  make  ill-health  an  excuse  for  non-per- 
formance of  our  great  life  duties  will  be  a 
reflection  upon  our  integrity;  will  indicate 
weakness  or  deception.  Sickness  and  disease 
will  show  that  we  have  not  been  true  in  our 
thought — in  our  motives — that  we  have  sinned 
and  are  paying  the  penalty  in  suffering  and 
thwarted  ambition. 

Many  people  to-day  are  ashamed  to  say 
they  are  ill,  because  they  know  that  it  indi- 
cates sin  somewhere — a  violation  of  the  law  of 
harmony,  of  health.  We  are  beginning  to  see 
that  it  is  not  only  unnecessary  to  be  sick,  but 
that  it  is  a  disgrace  for  God's  creatures  to  be 
whining  and  ailing  and  complaining  when  they 
ought  to  be  doing  the  great  things  they  were 
made  to  do.  We  ought  to  be  living  the  abun- 
dant life  which  it  was  intended  that  we  should 
live.  We  were  so  planned  that  existence  alone 
should  be  a  perpetual  joy. 

When  we  get  a  glimpse  of  our  real  divinity, 


82     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

we  shall  absolutely  refuse  to  be  sick.  We  shall 
be  as  much  ashamed  to  confess  that  we  a^'* 
suffering  from  a  cold,  rheumatism,  dyspep 
or  gout  as  we  should  now  be  to  acknowledges, 
theft.  The  coming  man  will  radiate  health 
and  gladness  as  naturally  as  the  rose  exhales 
beauty  and  fragrance.  He  will  radiate  life  and 
vigor  as  naturally  as  he  breathes.  Because  he 
will  think  only  healthful  thoughts,  he  cannot 
possibly  radiate  anything  unhealthful.  We  re- 
flect only  the  results  of  our  thinking. 

Thoughts  are  things,  and  they  leave  their 
characteristic  marks  on  the  mind.  No  joy 
thought  can  produce  gloom,  or  health  thought 
disease.  The  fear  thought  held  constantly  in 
the  mind  cannot  produce  a  state  of  courage. 
It  is  only  the  courageous  thought  that  can  pro- 
duce confidence. 

Some  great  physician  has  said  that  there 
is  something  in  man  which  was  never  born, 
is  never  sick,  and  never  dies ;  and  it  is  this 
something — this  divine,  omnipotent  force — 
which  heals  our  diseases.  No  matter  what  else 
we  may  call  it,  it  is  the  force  that  creates,  that 
restores  us.  We  may  call  it  the  God  principle, 
the  Christ  within  us,  the  divine  principle,  the 
omnipotent  force,  or  any  name  we  please;  it 
is  the  creative,  the  all-sustaining,  infinite  force.  - 


HEALTH  83 

The  same  Power  that  created  us  repairs  us. 
H  we  could  only  harmonize  our  lives  with  this 
immortal  principle,  this  best  thing  in  us,  we 
would  reach  our  highest  efficiency,  our  great- 
est possible  happiness ;  and  until  we  can  har- 
monize ourselves  with  this  something  within 
us  which  was  never  born  and  never  dies,  this 
divine  principle  which  never  sins,  we  can 
never  be  efficient  or  very  happy.  This  is  the 
only  reality  in  us — the  only  truth  of  our  being. 

The  rust  which  gradually  eats  away  the 
piano  strings  cannot  destroy  the  great  law  of 
harmony.  The  disease  which  destroys  the  nerve 
cells,  the  brain  cells,  does  not  affect  in  the  least 
our  reality — the  truth  of  our  being.  That  is  in- 
destructible, immortal — beyond  the  reach  of 
what  we  call  death.  We  all  feel,  like  the  great 
German  physician,  that  there  is  something 
within  us  which  can  never  be  sick,  which  is  not 
subject  to  disease,  and  which  is  as  immortal  as 
God  Himself. 

Man  is  Mind.  That  is  the  great  reality  of 
life.  The  way  to  establish  health  is  to  think 
hourly  that  you  "  live  and  move  and  have  your 
being  "  in  the  great  God  principle.  That  is  the 
underlying  truth  in  all  harmony.  Like  Paul, 
believe  that  no  power  can  separate  you  from 
this    divine    love    principle,    this    omnipotent 


84     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

power.  Love  and  truth  are  always  working 
for  you.  Carry  the  conviction  constantly  that 
the  God  principle  is  the  only  power  in  the  uni- 
verse. All  creation,  all  life,  have  their  origin 
in  this. 


VI.    MENTAL   CHEMISTRY 


VI.    MENTAL    CHEMISTRY 

Every  volition  and  thought  of  man  is  inscribed  on  his 
brain.  Thus  a  man  writes  his  life  in  his  physique,  and 
thus  the  angels  discover  his  autobiography  in  his 
structure. — Swedexborg. 


HE  experiments  made  by  Pro- 
fessor Elmer  C.  Gates  have 
shown  that  irascible,  malev- 
olent, and  depressing  emo- 
tions generate  in  the  system 
injurious  compounds,  some 
of  which  are  extremely  poi- 
sonous ;  and  that  agreeable,  happy  emotions 
generate  chemical  compounds  of  nutritious 
value,  which  stimulate  the  cells  to  manufac- 
ture energy. 

"  For  each  bad  emotion,"  says  Professor 
Gates,  "  there  is  a  corresponding  chemical 
change  in  the  tissues  of  the  body.  Every  good 
emotion  makes  a  life-promoting  change.  Every 
thought  which  enters  the  mind  is  registered 
in  the  brain  by  a  change  in  the  structure  of 
its  cells.  The  change  is  a  physical  change  more 
or  less  permanent. 

"  Any  one  may  go  into  the  business  of 
building  his  own  mind  for  an  hour  each  day, 
calling  up  pleasant  memories  and  ideas.  Let 

87 


88     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

him  summon  feelings  of  benevolence  and  un- 
selfishness, making-  this  a  regular  exercise  like 
swinging  dumb-bells.  Let  him  gradually  in- 
crease the  time  devoted  to  these  psychical 
gymnastics  until  it  reaches  sixty  or  ninety 
minutes  per  diem.  At  the  end  of  a  month  he 
will  find  the  change  in  himself  surprising.  The 
alteration  will  be  apparent  in  his  actions  and 
thoughts.  It  will  have  registered  in  the  cell 
structure  of  his  brain." 

There  are  many  ways  of  ruining  the  body 
besides  smoking  or  getting  drunk,  or  indulg- 
ing in  other  sensual  vices.  Anger  changes  the 
chemical  properties  of  the  saliva  to  a  poison 
dangerous  to  life.  It  is  well  known  that  sud- 
den and  violent  emotions  have  not  only  weak- 
ened the  heart  in  a  few  hours,  but  have  also 
caused  death  and  insanity. 

It  has  been  discovered  by  scientists  that 
there  is  a  chemical  difference  between  that 
sudden  cold  exudation  of  a  person  under  a 
deep  sense  of  guilt,  and  the  ordinary  perspira- 
tion ;  and  the  state  of  the  mind  of  a  criminal 
can  sometimes  be  determined  by  chemical 
analysis  of  the  perspiration,  which,  when 
brought  into  contact  with  selenic  acid,  pro- 
duces a  distinctive  pink  color. 

"  Suppose  half  a  dozen  men  in  a  room,"  says 


MENTAL    CHEMISTRY  89 

Professor  Gates;  "one  feels  depressed,  another 
remorseful,  another  ill-tempered,  another  jeal- 
ous, another  cheerful,  another  benevolent. 
Samples  of  their  perspiration  are  placed  in  the 
hands  of  the  psychophysicist.  Under  his  ex- 
amination they  reveal  all  those  emotional  con- 
ditions distinctly  and  unmistakably." 

It  is  well  known  that  fear  has  killed  thou- 
sands of  victims,  while,  on  the  other  hand, 
courage  is  a  great  restorer. 

Anger  in  the  mother  may  poison  a  nursing 
child.  Rarey,  the  celebrated  horse-tamer,  said 
that  an  angry  word  would  sometimes  raise  the 
pulse  of  a  horse  ten  beats  in  a  minute.  Experi- 
ments with  dogs  show  similar  results. 

If  this  is  true  of  a  beast,  what  can  we  say 
of  its  power  upon  human  beings,  especially 
upon  a  child?  Strong  mental  emotion  often 
causes  vomiting.  Extreme  anger  or  fright  may 
produce  jaundice.  A  violent  paroxysm  of  rage 
has  caused  apoplexy  and  death.  Indeed,  in 
more  than  one  instance,  a  single  night  of 
mental  agony  has  wrecked  a  life. 

The  Almighty  never  intended  that  wc  should 
be  the  sport  of  our  passions,  or  the  victims  of 
harmful  suggestions.  The  power  of  mastery 
is  within  ourselves,  but  we  must  develop  it, 
cultivate  it,  use  it. 


90     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

That  man  is  truly  great  who  can  rule  his 
mental  kingdom,  who  at  will  can  master  his 
moods ;  who  knows  enough  of  mental  chemis- 
try to  neutralize  a  fit  of  the  "  blues,"  to  anti- 
dote any  evil,  poisonous  thought  with  the 
opposite  thought,  just  as  a  chemist  neutralizes 
an  acid  which  is  eating  into  his  flesh  by  apply- 
ing an  alkaline  antidote.  A  man  ignorant  of 
chemistry  might  apply  another  acid  which 
would  eat  still  deeper  into  his  flesh ;  but  the 
chemist  knows  the  antidote  of  the  particular 
acid  that  is  doing  the  mischief,  and  can  kill 
its  corrosive,  eating  quality  in  an  instant. 

So  the  mental  chemist  knows  how  to  coun- 
teract the  corrosive,  wearing,  tearing  power 
of  the  despondent,  depressing  thought  by  its 
-cheerful  antidote.  He  knows  that  the  optimis- 
tic thought  is  sure  death  to  the  pessimistic 
thought ;  that  harmony  will  quickly  neutral- 
ize any  form  of  discord ;  that  the  health 
thought  will  antidote  the  ailing,  sick  thought; 
that  the  love  thought  will  kill  the  hatred 
thought,  the  jealous,  revengeful  thought.  He 
does  not  need  to  suffer  mental  anguish,  be- 
cause he  always  has  his  mental  remedy  with 
him.  The  moment  he  applies  its  antidote,  the 
fatal  corrosive  power  of  the  malignant  thought 
is  neutralized. 


MENTAL   CHEMISTRY  91 

If  children  were  taught  mental  chemis- 
try, as  they  are  taught  physical  chemistry, 
there  would  be  no  ailing  pessimists,  no  victims 
of  the  "  blues."  We  should  not  see  so  many 
long,  dejected,  gloomy  faces  everywhere.  We 
should  not  see  so  many  criminals,  so  many 
sorrowful,  tragic  failures  in  every  rank  of 
society,  in  every  walk  of  life. 

Many  of  us  keep  our  minds  more  or  less 
poisoned  much  of  the  time  because  of  our 
ignorance  of  mental  chemistry.  We  suffer 
from  mental  self-poison  and  do  not  know  it. 
Neither  do  we  know  how  to  antidote  the 
poison  passions  which  are  working  havoc  in 
our  bodies. 

Nothing  else  will  so  exhaust  the  vitality  and 
whittle  away  life  as  violent  fits  of  hatred, 
bitter  jealousy,  or  a  determination  for  revenge.. 
We  see  the  victims  of  these  passions  worn  out, 
haggard,  old,  even  before  they  have  reached 
middle  life.  There  are  cases  on  record  where 
fierce  jealousy  and  hatred  raging  through  the 
system  aged  the  victims  by  years  in  a  few 
days  or  weeks. 

Yet  these  mental  poisons  are  just  as  easily 
antidoted,  conquered,  as  physical  poisons 
which  have  well-known  antidotes.  If  we  are 
sick  with  a  fever  we  go  to  a  physician  for  an 


92     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

antidote;  but  when  jealousy  or  hatred  is  rag- 
ing within  us  we  suffer  tortures  until  the  fever 
gradually  wears  itself  out,  not  knowing  that 
by  an  application  of  love  which  would  quickly 
antidote  it,  we  could  easily  have  avoided  not 
only  the  suffering  but  also  the  wear  and  tear 
of  the  entire  system,  especially  of  the  delicate 
brain  structure. 

As  there  is  no  filth,  no  impurity,  in  any 
water  which  cannot  be  removed  by  the  science 
of  chemistry,  so  there  is  no  human  mind  so 
filthy,  so  poisoned  with  vicious  thinking  and 
vicious  habits,  so  saturated  with  vice,  that  it 
cannot  be  cleared  up  by  right  thinking;  by 
the  counter  suggestion  of  the  thing  that  has 
polluted  it. 

It  is  the  poison-specialist's,  the  toxicologist's 
duty  to  know  what  will  antidote  every  kind 
of  poison.  He  would  not  try  to  save  a  patient 
from  arsenic  poison  with  the  antidote  for 
morphine.  He  must  have  the  arsenic  antidote, 
and  he  can  tell  by  the  symptoms  in  each  case 
what  poison  has  been  taken. 

Many  a  precious  life  has  been  lost  which 
could  have  been  saved  if  people  around  the 
victim  at  the  time  had  only  known  the  anti- 
dote of  the  poison  taken.  I  have  known  a  man 
poisoned  with  carbolic  acid  to  be  given  the 


MENTAL   CHEMISTRY  93 

antidote  for  prussic  acid,  which,  of  course, 
did  not  save  the  patient,  because  it  was  not 
the  right  antidote. 

The  time  will  come  when  every  intelligent 
person  will  be  expert  enough  in  mental  chemis- 
try to  be  able  to  apply  the  proper  antidotes 
for  special  forms  of  mental  poisoning. 

We  shall  find  that  it  is  just  as  easy  to  coun- 
teract an  unfriendly,  disagreeable,  vicious 
thought  by  turning  on  the  counter  thought,  as 
it  is  to  rob  the  hot  water  of  its  burning  power 
by  turning  on  the  cold-water  faucet.  We  shall 
be  able  to  regulate  the  temperature  of  our 
thought  as  the  temperature  of  w^ater.  If  the 
water  is  too  hot  we  simply  turn  on  the  cold 
faucet.  If  we  feel  our  brain  heating  up  with 
hot  temper,  we  shall  simply  turn  on  the  love 
thought,  the  peace  thought,  and  the  anger 
heat  will  be  instantly  counteracted. 

In  other  words,  it  is  perfectly  possible,  and 
not  very  difficult,  to  absolutely  control  the 
quality  of  the  thought,  to  regulate  our  peace 
of  mind,  to  maintain  poise  and  balance,  a 
sweet,  peaceful  mental  serenity,  under  the 
most  trying  circumstances. 

It  will  be  absolutely  impossible,  by  any  kind 
of  aggravation  or  work  or  passion  or  torture, 
to  disturb  the  balance,  the  dignified  serenity, 


94     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

of  the  coming'  man.  It  will  be  impossible  to 
make  him  suffer,  because  he  knows  the  secret 
of  counteracting  the  vicious,  harmful  thought 
so  that  it  will  be  neutralized  or  will  fall  flat. 
If  the  coming  man  feels  the  "  blues  "  coming 
on,  he  will  be  able  to  counteract  this  condition 
in  an  instant.  He  will  know  how  to  stop  the 
eating  of  the  acid  thought  with  the  alkali 
thought.  If  he  feels  a  sense  of  weakness  com- 
ing on  he  will  immediately  annihilate  it  by  a 
flood  thought  of  strength  and  robustness — 
vigor. 

Think,  for  example,  how  many  human  ills 
can  be  antidoted  by  the  magical  chemistry  of 
the  love  thought !  It  is  a  solvent  for  selfishness 
and  greed,  a  destroyer  of  hatred,  envy,  and 
jealousy,  of  revenge,  criminal  intent,  and  a 
score  of  other  mental  and  physical  enemies. 

Think  what  it  would  mean  if  we  could 
only  keep  the  mind  filled  with  loving,  helpful, 
hopeful,  encouraging,  cheerful,  fearless  sug- 
gestions! We  would  not  then  need  to  deny 
their  opposites,  for,  when  the  positive  is  pres- 
ent, the  negative  flees. 

We  cannot  drive  the  darkness  out  of  a 
room.  We  let  in  the  light  and  the  darkness 
flees. 

The  way  to  get  rid  of  discord  is  to  flood 


MENTAL    CHEMISTRY  95 

the    mind    with    harmony ;    then    the    discord 
vanishes,  as  darkness  flees  before  the  light. 

The  way  to  get  despondency  and  discour- 
agement out  of  the  mind  is  to  fill  it  with  en- 
couraging, hopeful,  cheerful  pictures.  Discour- 
agement and  despondency  are  killed  by  their 
opposites.  They  are  the  natural  antidotes. 

An  acid  is  instantly  killed  by  the  presence 
of  an  alkali.  Fire  cannot  exist  in  the  presence 
of  its  opposite,  carbonic-acid  gas  or  water.  We 
cannot  drive  hatred,  jealousy,  revenge  out  of 
the  mind  by  will  power,  by  trying  to  force 
them  out.  Love  is  the  alkali  which  will  im- 
mediately neutralize,  antidote  them. 

Hatred  cannot  live  an  instant  in  the  presence 
of  love.  The  Golden  Rule  will  kill  all  jealousy 
and  revenge.  They  cannot  live  together. 

The  trouble  with  most  people  is  that  they 
try  to  drive  out  the  bad  in  themselves  instead 
of  antidoting  it  with  the  good.  They  try  to 
force  hatred  out  of  their  minds  without  the 
assistance  of  its  antidote. 

Change  the  mental  attitude — think  love,  feel 
love  for  that  object  which  we  hated,  and  the 
hatred  is  instantly  neutralized.  Whenever  you 
are  timid,  inclined  to  express  doubt,  fear  or 
anxiety  in  any  form,  expel  these  destructive 
suggestions  with  their  counter  suggestions. 


96     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Remember  that  every  morbid  mood,  every 
discordant,  weak  thought  is  a  symptom  of  a 
poisoned  mind.  You  have  the  antidote — just 
the  opposite  thought.  Your  mind  remedy  is 
always  present.  The  antidote  for  all  error  is 
truth,  for  all  discord,  is  harmony.  You  do 
not  have  to  pay  a  physician.  You  have  your 
own  recipe  always  with  you.  When  you  have 
learned  the  secrets  of  mental  chemistry  you 
can  instantly  stop  every  symptom  and  check 
every  approach  of  mind  disease. 

Every  true,  beautiful,  and  helpful  thought 
is  a  suggestion  which,  if  held  in  the  mind, 
tends  to  reproduce  itself  there — clarifies  the 
ideals  and  uplifts  the  life.  While  these  inspir- 
ing and  helpful  suggestions  fill  the  mind  their 
opposites  cannot  put  in  their  deadly  work,  be- 
cause the  two  cannot  live  together.  They  are 
mutually  antagonistic,  natural  enemies.  One 
excludes  the  other. 

I  know  a  woman  of  beautiful  character  who 
has  acquired  the  art  of  quickly  refreshing  her 
mind  even  in  the  most  trying  and  exacting 
conditions.  Knowing  the  power  of  mental  im- 
ages to  renew  the  mind,  she  has  made  a  study 
of  her  thought  enemies  and  learned  to  elimi- 
nate all  those  which  suggest  dark,  unfortunate 
images,  by  dwelling  on  their  opposites — those 


MENTAL   CHEiMISTRY  97 

which  bring  beautiful,  cheerful,  uplifting,  en- 
couraging pictures  to  her  mind. 

By  cherishing  one  and  excluding  the  other, 
she  freshens  and  clarifies  her  thought  and  re- 
juvenates her  life  at  will. 

Through  her  thorough  knowledge  and  prac- 
tice of  mental  chemistry,  she  has  been  able  to 
maintain  a  calm,  sweet  serenity,  a  cheerful 
mental  balance  and  harmony  of  disposition 
which  endears  her  to  all  who  know  her. 

The  human  body  is  made  exclusively  of 
cells.  We  are  nothing  but  a  mass  of  cells  of 
twelve  different  varieties,  such  as  brain  cells, 
bone  cells,  muscle  cells,  etc.  The  maximum  of 
health  and  power  depends  upon  the  absolute 
integrity  of  every  cell.  Sickness  and  disease 
simply  mean  that  some  of  the  cells  in  the  body 
are  impaired. 

Many  people  seem  to  think  that  thought 
only  affects  the  brain ;  but  the  fact  is  ive  think 
all  over. 

Physiologists  have  found  gray  brain  matter 
in  the  tips  of  the  fingers  of  the  blind.  The 
marvellous  feats  of  the  blind;  the  fact  that 
they  can  distinguish  most  delicate  textures, 
denominations  of  money,  colors,  even  fine 
tints,  shades,  all  show  that  thinking  is  not 
confined  to  the  brain.  We  think  all  over. 


98     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

The  body  is  a  sort  of  extended  brain.  Every 
thought  that  enters  the  brain  cells  is  quickly 
communicated  to  every  cell  in  the  entire  body, 
thus  accounting  for  the  tremendous  instan- 
taneous influence  of  a  shock  caused  by  fatal 
news  or  some  terrible  catastrophe  to  every 
part  of  the  body,  instantly  affecting  all  the 
secretions  and  functions. 

The  effect  of  bad  news  in  a  telegram  often 
instantly  affects  the  heart,  stomach,  and  brain. 
This  explains  the  numerous  cases  in  medical 
history  where  the  hair  has  turned  white  in  a 
few  hours,  sometimes  in  a  few  minutes,  from 
the  shock  of  bad  news.  The  transmission  of 
the  shock  from  the  brain  to  every  cell  in  the 
body  is  almost  instantaneous. 

The  billions  of  cells  in  the  body  are  all  tied 
together  in  the  closest  contact — by  affinity, 
sympathy.  What  injures  or  helps  one,  injures 
or  helps  all.  Every  cell  suffers  or  is  a  gainer, 
gets  a  life  impulse  or  a  death  impulse,  accord- 
ing to  the  character  of  the  thought. 

It  has  been  established  by  experiments  that 
we  pay  for  all  our  unfortunate,  vicious  think- 
ing in  impaired  cell  life.  Innumerable  ex- 
periments have  established  the  fact  that  all 
healthful,  hopeful,  joyous,  encouraging,  up- 
lifting, optimistic,  cheerful  thoughts  improve 


MENTAL   CHEMISTRY  99 

the  cell  life  of  the  entire  body.  They  are  crea- 
tive, while  the  opposite  thoughts  are  destructive 
of  cell  life. 

When  we  learn  the  fact  that  every  thought 
and  emotion  is  quickly  registered,  even  in  the 
remotest  cell  in  the  body,  then  we  shall  learn 
to  be  extremely  careful  of  the  character  of  the 
thought  and  the  emotion.  We  shall  then  know 
that  the  harboring  of  sick,  discouraged,  de- 
spondent thoughts,  thoughts  of  fear,  worry, 
jealousy,  hatred,  anger,  and  selfishness,  will 
deteriorate  the  integrity  of  the  entire  cell  life, 
and  that  the  health  standards  will  not  only 
drop,  but  that  our  mental  and  physical  energy 
alike  will  be  diminished  accordingly.  We  shall 
then  know  that  the  health  thought,  the  robust, 
vigorous  thought  will  react  upon  and  give  an 
uplift  to  every  cell  in  the  body. 

The  greatest  work  a  human  being  can  do 
is  to  keep  his  entire  cell  life  in  the  superbest 
possible  condition.  Then  he  will  be  absolutely 
normal ;  and  when  normal  he  will  be  right, 
truthful,  honest,  sincere,  noble. 

Much  of  the  unhappiness,  the  inefficiency 
and  the  wretched,  slipshod  work,  much  of  the 
crime  of  the  world,  are  due  to  impaired  cell 
life  from  vicious,  unscientific  thinking. 

When  a  person  is  perfectly  normal,  he  has 


loo     PEACE,  rOWER,  AND  PLENTY 

no  desire  to  do  wrong.  It  is  when  his  cell  life 
is  deiiuM-alized  by  bad  thinking-,  which  leads  to 
vicious  living;,  dissipated  habits,  that  he  is 
tempted  to  go  wrong.  So,  not  only  the  highest 
morality,  the  supremest  hapi)iness,  but  the 
highest  efficiency,  depend  upon  the  healthy 
condition  of  the  cell  life. 

How  comparatively  easy  it  would  be  to  do 
right  and  to  be  successful  if  the  body  were 
always  in  the  best  condition! 

It  is  when  the  cell  life  is  demoralized  that 
the  standard  is  lowered;  it  is  because  we  are 
abnormal,  that  we  are  tempted  to  vicious  liv- 
ing. The  blood  is  poisoned  from  vicious  think- 
ing and  we  go  wrong  in  spite  of  ourselves. 

Every  individual  is  afloat  in  a  sea  of  thought, 
wdiere  currents  are  running  in  every  direction. 
When  we  are  subject  to  all  sorts  of  opposing 
influences,  conflicting  thought-currents,  we 
soon  come  to  grief  in  this  turbulent  sea,  if 
we  do  not  know  the  laws  of  mental  chemistry. 
We  must  know  how  to  neutralize  our  enemy 
thoughts  by  applying  their  antidotes.  We  must 
be  able  to  master  our  moods,  to  direct  our 
thoughts,  and  thus  protect  our  lives  from  all 
evil  influences  within  and  without. 

One  of  the  great  problems  in  establishing 
wireless  telegraphy   was  the   neutralizing  or 


MENTAL   CHEMISTRY  loi 

getting  rid  of  the  influence  of  conflicting  cur- 
rents going  in  every  direction  through  the 
atmosphere.  The  great  problem  of  character- 
building,  life-building,  is  to  counteract,  to 
nullify  conflicting  thought-currents,  discord- 
ant thought-currents,  which  bring  all  sorts 
of  bad,  injurious  suggestions  to  the  mind. 
Tens  of  thousands  have  already  solved  this 
problem.  Everyone  can  apply  mental  chemis- 
try, the  right  thought-current  to  neutralize  the 
wrong  one. 

He  is  a  fortunate  man  who  early  learns  the 
secret  of  scientific  mental  culture,  and  who 
acquires  the  inestimable  art  of  holding  the 
right  suggestion  in  his  mind,  so  that  he  can 
triumph  over  the  dominant  note  in  his  environ- 
ment when  it  is  unfriendly  to  his  highest  good. 

There  is  nothing  truer  than  that  "  we  can 
make  ourselves  over  by  using  and  developing 
the  right  kind  of  thought-forces." 

Not  long  ago  a  young  man  whom  I  had  not 
seen  for  several  vears  called  on  me,  and  I  was 
amazed  at  the  tremendous  change  in  him. 
When  I  had  last  seen  him  he  was  pessimistic, 
discouraged,  almost  despairing ;  he  had  soured 
on  life,  lost  confidence  in  human  nature  and  in 
himself.  During  the  interval  he  had  completely 
changed.    The   sullen,   bitter   expression  that 


I02     PEACE,  POWER,  AXD  PLENTY 

used  to  characterize  his  face  was  replaced  by 
one  of  joy  and  gladness.  He  was  radiant, 
cheerful,  hopeful,  and  happy. 

f  The  young  man  had  married  an  optimistic 
wife,  who  had  the  happy  faculty  of  laughing 
/  him  out  of  his  "  blues  "'  or  melancholy,  chang- 
ing the  tenor  of  his  thoughts,  cheering  him  up, 
and  making  him  put  a  higher  estimate  on  him- 
self. His  removal  from  an  unhappy  environ- 
ment, together  with  his  wife's  helpful  "  new- 
thought  "  influence  and  his  own  determination 
to  make  good,  had  all  worked  together  to 
bring  about  a  revolution  in  his  mental  make- 
up. The  love-principle  and  the  use  of  the  right 
thought-force  had  verily  made  a  new  man  of 
him. 

We  are  beginning  to  learn  that  man  carries 
the  great  panacea  for  all  ills  within  himself; 
that  the  antidotes  for  the  worst  poisons — tlie 
poisons  of  hatred,  jealousy,  anger,  revenge, 
a  false  ambition,  and  of  all  evil  thoughts  and 
passions — exist  in  his  own  mind  in  the  form 
of  love,  charity,  and  good-will  essences. 

/ 


VII.    IMAGINATION   AND    HEALTH 


VII.    IMAGINATION   AND   HEALTH 


Fancy  can  save  or  kill;  it  hath  closed  up 

Wounds  when  the  balsam  could  not,  and  without 
The  aid  of  salves — to  think  hath  been  a  cure. 

— Caetwright. 


OT  long  ago  a  clergyman  was 
sent  to  a  hospital,  suffering 
terribly,  and  so  weak  that  he 
could  scarcely  hold  up  his 
head.  He  said  he  had  swal- 
lowed several  false  teeth  and 
the  plate,  and  that  he  felt  the 
horrible  grinding  and  cutting  of  these  in  his 
stomach. 

The  physician  in  attendance  tried  to  talk 
him  out  of  this  idea,  but  to  no  purpose.  A  little 
while  later  a  telegram  from  his  wife  informed 
him  that  the  teeth  had  been  found  under  the 
bed.  Mortified  and  chagrined  at  having  made 
such  a  fool  of  himself,  the  clergyman,  free 
from  his  imaginary  suffering,  immediately  got 
up,  dressed  himself,  paid  his  bill  and  went 
home  without  assistance. 

As  long  as  the  man  was  convinced  that  the 
false  teeth  were  in  his  stomach,  all  the  talking 
in  the  world  could  not  have  made  him  believe 
that  his  suffering  was  a  delusion.  This  con- 
viction had  to  be  changed  first. 


io6     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Physicians  tell  us  that  susceptibility  to  con- 
tagious diseases  depends  very  largely  upon 
the  mental  condition,  that  it  is  possible  for  a 
person  during  great  excitement  to  work  with 
perfect  immunity  among  patients  suffering 
from  the  most  malignant  diseases. 

I  have  seen  a  vigorous,  athletic  man  so  com- 
pletely paralyzed  by  the  shock  from  an  ac- 
cident that  he  could  scarcely  lift  a  pound 
weight.  He  was  as  weak  and  nerveless  as  a 
child.  No  material  substance  had  touched  him 
or  opposed  him — just  a  terrifying  thought, 
which  came  like  lightning,  did  the  work,  made 
a  pvgmy  of  a  giant  in  an  instant. 

Well-authenticated  cases  have  been  recorded 
by  physicians  where  patients,  who  had  a  mortal 
fear  of  chloroform,  went  into  syncope  before 
a  whiff  of  chloroform  had  been  given.  They 
became  perfectly  unconscious  through  the 
suggestion  of  their  own  minds. 

I  know  of  a  physician  who,  while  away 
from  home  on  a  fishing  trip,  was  summoned 
to  attend  a  patient  who  was  suffering  inde- 
scribable agony.  He  had  no  medicine  case,  no 
drugs  with  him;  but  the  tactful  physician, 
knowing  the  power  of  suggestion,  made  small 
powders  out  of  ordinary  flour  and  gave  in- 
structions  with   the  greatest  care  as   to  the 


IMAGINATION   AND   HEALTH     107 

exact  time  and  manner  of  taking.  They  were 
to  be  given  every  few  minutes. 

The  patient  was  told  that  he  was  being 
treated  by  a  noted  physician,  and  his  great 
faith  in  the  physician  and  the  remedy  in  a 
short  time  wrought  a  marvellous  change  in  his 
condition.  He  said  that  he  felt  the  effects  of 
the  medicine  throughout  his  entire  being. 
Flour  and  faith  did  the  work. 

In  the  medical  report,  after  the  great  epi- 
demic of  yellow  fever  in  Philadelphia,  we  find 
this  reference  to  the  remarkable  healing  balm 
in  the  spiritual  influence  of  the  great  Dr.  Rush. 

"  Dr.  Rush's  presence  zvas  a  powerful  stimu- 
lant; men  recovered  to  zvhom  he  gave  no 
medicine,  as  if  his  word  was  enough  to  turn 
the  fever." 

The  sick  thought  must  go  before  the  sick 
condition  will  depart.  When  the  diseased 
thought  goes,  the  body  at  once  rebounds  and 
becomes  normal. 

I  recently  heard  of  a  young  lady  who, 
while  at  the  theatre  with  her  fiance,  com- 
plained suddenly  of  feeling  faint.  Her  fiance, 
a  young  doctor,  took  something  out  of  his 
pocket,  and,  giving  it  to  her,  whispered,  "  Keep 
this  tabloid  in  your  mouth,  but  don't  swallow 
it."  The  young  lady  did  as  directed,  and  im- 


io8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

mediately  felt  better.  Curious  to  know  what 
the  "  tabloid  "  was,  which,  although  it  had  not 
dissolved,  had  given  her  such  relief,  she  ex- 
amined it  on  her  return  home,  and  found — 
a  small  button ! 

Medical  history  shows  that  thousands  of 
people  have  died  the  victims  of  their  imagina- 
tion. They  were  convinced  they  had  diseases 
which  in  reality  they  never  had.  The  trouble 
was  not  in  the  body  but  in  the  mind. 

Few  of  us  realize  the  almost  superhuman 
power  of  the  imagination  in  its  effect  upon  the 
body.  Nothing  is  better  known  than  that  many 
people  every  year  die  with  imaginary  hydro- 
phobia. It  is  a  very  common  thing  to  regard  a 
dog  as  mad  which  simply  has  a  fit,  or  is  so 
frightened  at  being  pursued  by  those  who  are 
afraid  of  it,  and  who  project  their  state  of 
mind  to  its  brain  that  it  appears  to  be  mad. 

A  short  time  ago  I  read  a  story  about  a 
young  officer  in  India  who  consulted  a  great 
physician  because  he  felt  fagged  from  the  ex- 
cessive heat  and  long  hours  of  service.  The 
physician  examined  him  and  said  he  would 
write  to  him  on  the  morrow.  The  letter  the  pa- 
tient received  informed  him  that  his  left  lung 
was  entirely  gone,  his  heart  seriously  affected, 
and  advised  him  to  adjust  his  business  affairs 


IMAGINATION   AND   HEALTH    109 

at  once,  "  Of  course,  you  may  live  for  weeks," 
it  said,  "  but  you  had  best  not  leave  important 
matters  undecided." 

Naturally  the  young  ofificer  was  dismayed 
by  this  death  warrant.  He  grew  rapidly  worse, 
and  in  twenty-four  hours  respiration  was  dif- 
ficult and  he  had  an  acute  pain  in  the  region 
of  the  heart.  He  took  to  his  bed  with  the  con- 
viction that  he  should  never  rise  from  it. 
During  the  night  he  grew  rapidly  worse  and 
his  servant  sent  for  the  doctor. 

"  What  on  earth  have  you  been  doing  to 
yourself?"  demanded  the  physician.  "There 
was  no  indication  of  this  sort  when  I  saw  you 
yesterday." 

"  It  is  my  heart,  I  suppose,"  weakly  an- 
swered the  patient  in  a  whisper. 

"  Your  heart !  "  repeated  the  doctor.  "  Your 
heart  was  all  right  yesterday." 

"  My  lungs,  then,"  said  the  patient. 

"  What  is  the  matter  with  you,  man  ?  You 
don't  seem  to  have  been  drinking." 

"  Your  letter,  your  letter !  "  gasped  the  pa- 
tient. "  You  said  I  had  only  a  few  weeks  to 
live." 

"  Are  you  crazy  ?  "  said  the  doctor.  "  I 
wrote  you  to  take  a  week's  vacation  in  the 
hills  and  you  would  be  all  right." 


no     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

The  patient,  with  the  pallor  of  death  in  his 
face,  could  scarcely  raise  his  head  from  the 
pillows,  but  he  drew  from  under  the  bed- 
clothes the  doctor's  letter. 

"  Heavens,  man !  "  cried  the  physician ; 
"  this  was  meant  for  another  patient !  My  as- 
sistant misplaced  the  letters." 

The  young  officer  sat  up  in  bed  immediately, 
and  was  entirely  well  in  a  few  hours. 

When  I  was  in  the  Harvard  Medical 
School,  one  of  the  best  professors  there,  a 
celebrated  physician,  who  had  been  lecturing 
upon  the  power  of  the  imagination,  warned 
the  students  against  the  dangers  of  imagining 
that  they  themselves  had  the  disease  about 
which  they  studied.  During  this  very  time  the 
professor  told  me  that  he  got  it  into  his  head 
that  he  was  developing  Bright's  disease  in  his 
own  system.  This  conviction  became  so  strong 
that  he  did  not  even  dare  to  have  an  examina- 
tion made.  He  was  so  certain  that  he  was  in 
the  grasp  of  this  so-called  fatal  disease  that  he 
preferred  to  die  rather  than  be  told  of  his  con- 
dition by  another  physician.  He  lost  his  ap- 
petite, lost  flesh  rapidly,  and  became  almost 
incapable  of  lecturing,  until  one  day  a  medical 
friend,  astonished  at  the  change  in  his  appear- 
ance, asked  what  was  the  matter  with  him. 


IMAGINATION    AND    HEALTH    m 

"  I  have  Bright's  disease,"  was  the  reply. 
"  I  am  sure  of  it,  for  I  have  every  symptom." 

"  Nonsense,"  said  his  friend ;  "  you  have 
nothing  of  the  kind." 

After  a  great  deal  of  persuasion,  the  pro- 
fessor was  induced  to  submit  to  an  examina- 
tion, and  it  was  discovered  that  there  was  not 
the  slightest  evidence  of  Bright's  disease  in  his 
system.  He  rallied  so  quickly  that  even  in  a 
dav  those  who  knew  him  noticed  the  chansre. 
His  appetite  returned,  his  flesh  came  back,  and 
he  was  a  new  man. 

Medical  history  is  full  of  examples  of  peo- 
ple who  have  been  made  sick  purely  through, 
the  domination  of  the  imagination.  A  London 
medical  journal  gives  the  following  instances : 

"  Two  London  men  stayed  in  the  country 
at  a  house  where  scarlet  fever  was  reported. 
One,  an  unimaginative,  healthy-minded  fellow, 
awoke  all  right  in  the  morning.  The  other,  a 
nervous,  sensitive  man,  was  very  ill — had  not 
slept  and  had  broken  out  into  a  terrible  rash, 
which  both  declared  to  be  scarlet  fever.  A 
wire  to  a  London  medical  man  was  despatched, 
and  by  the  first  train  he  hurried  down.  The 
supposed  fever  patient  proved  to  have  no 
fever  at  all  beyond  an  imaginative  one.  In 
fact,  there  was  no  scarlet  fever  in  the  house. 


112     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

The  case  had  been  wrongly  diagnosed,  and 
the  frightened  visitor  had  tortured  himself 
into  a  violent  rash,  all  without  cause. 

"  At  another  house  two  men  stayed,  where 
an  inmate  had  died  of  cholera.  One  man 
placed  in  the  room  in  which  the  patient  had 
died  was  in  ignorance  of  what  had  occurred. 
He  slept  well  and  was  no  worse.  The  other, 
wrongly  told  that  the  room  in  which  he  slept 
was  that  in  which  the  cholera  patient  had  died, 
spent  a  night  of  mental  agony  and  in  the 
morning  was  actually  found  to  be  suffering 
from  this  complaint.  He  died  of  cholera." 

People  read  these  stories  and  believe  them, 
yet  cannot  see  that  their  own  perverted  im- 
aginations, their  own  sick,  discordant,  dis- 
couraged thoughts  will  produce  similar  effects 
upon  themselves. 

We  are  all  at  some  time  in  our  lives  victims 
of  the  imagination.  The  conviction  that  we 
have  been  exposed  to  a  terrible  malady,  to 
some  incurable,  contagious  disease,  completely 
upsets  the  entire  system  and  reverses  the  proc- 
esses of  the  various  functions ;  the  mind  does 
not  act  with  its  customary  vitality  and  power 
and  there  is  a  general  dropping  of  physical 
and  mental  standards  all  along  the  line,  until 
we  become  the  victims  of  the  thing  we  fear. 


VIII.    HOW    SUGGESTION    INFLU- 
ENCES   HEALTH 


VIII.   HOW   SUGGESTION   INFLU- 
ENCES  HEALTH 


By  holding  the  thought  of  what  we  wish  to  become, 
we  can  in  a  large  measure  become  what  we  desire. 

Man  is  beginning  to  find  that  the  same  Principle 
which  created  him,  repairs,  restores,  renews  him. 


OMEONE  has  said:  "The 
mortalest  enemy  you  can 
have  is  the  friend  who  meets 
you  and  says :  '  You  are  not 
looking  well  to-day;  what's 
the  matter  ? '  From  that  mo- 
ment you  don't  feel  well. 
Your  friend  has  blasted  your  hope  and  spread 
a  pall  over  your  brain." 

The  power  of  suggestion  is  strikingly  illus- 
trated by  the  fact  that  a  hypnotic  subject  under 
control  may  be  burned  until  a  blister  is  raised, 
by  the  application  of  a  cold  coin. 

Now,  if  it  is  possible  for  the  thought  sug- 
gested by  another  to  produce  a  blister  on  the 
body,  it  does  not  seem  strange  that  a  sugges- 
tion can  cause  or  cure  dyspephbo  and  other 
ills.  If  it  is  possible  to  make  the  hypnotic  sub- 
ject stagger  and  reel  like  a  drunken  man,  just 
by  holding  in  his  mind  the  suggestion  that  a 
glass  of  pure  water  he  drank  was  whiskey,  it 

"5 


ii6     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

is  certainly  possible  to  produce  all  sorts  of 
effects  by  mental  suggestion. 

Some  examples  of  the  marvellous  power 
of  suggestion  are  given  by  Dr.  Frederik  Van 
Eden,  a  graduate  of  medicine  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Amsterdam,  and  an  advocate  of  the 
psychotherapeutic  method  of  healing  the  sick. 
In  speaking  of  Professor  Debove,  of  Paris, 
an  authority  in  such  cases,  he  said: 

"  At  his  clinic  in  the  hospital  of  St.  Andral 
he  showed  me  how  he  could  give  a  patient  a 
glass  of  water,  telling  him  that  it  was  wine, 
and  how  the  patient  took  it  for  wine.  I  saw 
how  he  told  a  man  that  a  cold  silver  spoon 
was  glowing  hot,  and  how  the  man  dropped 
it  with  every  token  of  burning  pain.  How  he 
gave  another  a  book  and  said :  '  Look  at  it ; 
it's  all  white  paper !  all  blank !  .  .  .  Now  blow 
on  it.  Look  again ! — it's  all  portraits,  all  por- 
traits !  Now  blow  again ! — all  landscapes  and 
pictures !  Look ! '  And  the  man  saw  every- 
thing in  great  amazement,  and  even  described 
the  landscapes  and  portraits  which  nobody 
saw  but  1  self.  '  Well,  I  never  saw  magic 
like  this,'  said  the  man. 

"  '  ril  do  better,'  said  Debove.  '  Shut  your 
eyes.  When  you  open  them,  I  have  no  head.' 
And  as  the  man  looked  up  he  stared  at  the 


SUGGESTION   AND   HEALTH     117 

professor  with  a  wild,  scared  look.  '  Well,* 
said  Debove,  '  how  do  you  like  me  without 
my  head  ? '  And  the  poor  man  struck  his  own 
head  with  a  violent  blow  and  said :  '  For  sure, 
I  have  gone  mad ! '  " 

I  have  seen  an  experiment  tried  on  a  horse, 
to  make  him  believe  he  was  sick.  He  was 
covered  with  blankets,  rubbed  with  medicines, 
pitied  and  petted  until  he  lost  his  appetite,  and 
could  not  be  induced  to  eat  or  drink.  Another 
perfectly  sound  horse  was  so  thoroughly  con- 
vinced, in  a  short  time,  by  the  holding  up  of 
his  foot,  feeling  of  it,  bandaging  it,  and  rub- 
bing it  with  liniment,  that  he  was  lame,  that 
he  actually  limped  when  he  attempted  to  walk. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  fears,  the  anxieties, 
and  the  worries  of  mothers  have  a  great  deal 
to  do  with  the  diseases  of  their  children. 

The  expectant  mental  attitude  of  nervous 
mothers  who  are  always  on  the  lookout  for 
the  enemies  of  their  darlings  tends  to  invite,  to 
attract,  the  very  things  they  fear.  Constantly 
watching  for  symptoms  of  any  disease  that 
happens  to  be  in  their  neighborhood,  the 
mental  pictures  photographed  on  their  brains 
are  quickly  communicated  to  the  impression- 
able mind  of  the  child  and  impair  his  bodily 
functions. 


ii8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

In  a  home  which  I  visited  recently,  the 
mother  kept  telling  her  little  boy  how  ill  he 
looked,  asking  him  how  he  felt,  and  giving 
him  doses  of  this  and  doses  of  that.  At  least 
half  a  dozen  times  during  the  evening  she 
asked  the  different  children  of  the  family  how 
they  felt,  if  they  had  a  headache  or  a  cold. 
She  was  worried  all  the  time  about  them; 
afraid  they  would  get  into  draughts,  go  out- 
doors bareheaded,  or  get  their  feet  wet.  She 
was  constantly  warning  them  to  avoid  these 
things,  and  telling  them  that  if  they  didn't 
they  would  get  croup,  or  pneumonia,  or  some- 
thing terrible  would  happen  to  them.  In  other 
words,  she  kept  the  picture  of  physical  discord 
constantly  in  the  minds  of  her  children.  The 
result  was  that  some  member  of  the  family 
was  sick  most  of  the  time.  The  mother  said 
she  could  not  go  out  much  because  there  was 
so  much  sickness  in  her  family. 

The  father  was  almost  as  bad  as  the  mother 
in  worrying  about  the  health  of  the  family. 
He  would  call  his  little  boy  to  him,  feel  his 
pulse,  tell  him  his  skin  was  hot,  that  he  was 
feverish ;  he  would  look  at  his  tongue  and 
remark  that  he  was  a  sick  boy.  The  result  was 
the  boy  actually  thought  himself  sick  and  had 
to  go  to  bed. 


SUGGESTION    AND    HEALTH     119 

How  little  parents  realize  the  harm  they  do 
in  projecting  their  own  discordant  thoughts 
and  fears  into  their  children's  receptive  minds, 
thus  tending  to  develop  the  very  thing  they 
are  trying  to  avoid ! 

Think  of  children  being  brought  up  in  such 
an  atmosphere  of  fear  and  anxiety  and  disease- 
picturing,  constantly  warned  of  danger,  and 
cautioned  all  the  time  not  to  do  this  or  that, 
until  they  begin  to  think  there  are  very  few 
things  that  a  person  can  do  with  safety !  They 
grow  up  with  a  terrible  fear  of  disease  that 
becomes  a  perpetual  nightmare. 

If  parents  only  knew  what  an  unmitigated 
curse  fear  of  disease  is,  they  would  try  to 
drive  it  out  of  their  children's  minds ;  they 
never  would  picture  symptoms  of  physical 
discord  of  any  kind. 

We  are  just  beginning  to  appreciate  the 
marvellous  power  of  suggestion  to  uplift  or 
depress  the  mind.  Only  recently  I  heard  a  very 
intelligent  woman  say  that  she  was  forced  to 
take  to  her  bed  for  the  greater  part  of  a  day 
because  of  the  depressing  influence  of  a  maga- 
zine story  she  had  just  read.  The  story  was 
written  by  a  famous  writer.  It  was  strong, 
but  brutal.  It  appealed  to  what  was  morbid  in 
her  mind  and  completely  prostrated  her. 


I20     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

It  is  common  for  medical  students  to  be- 
come ill  through  the  horrible  suggestions  of 
the  dissecting  rooms,  and  the  depressing  in- 
fluence which  comes  from  the  constant  study 
of  disease  conditions. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  constant  mental  con- 
tact with  cheerful,  hopeful,  health  thoughts, 
must  tend  to  reproduce  the  corresponding 
qualities  in  the  body. 

The  mind  of  a  sick  person  is  in  more  or  less 
of  a  helpless,  subjective,  negative  condition, 
and  is  very  susceptible  to  thought  influences, 
good  or  bad.  In  health,  the  positive,  creative 
mental  attitude  gives  the  mind  the  power  of 
resistance,  which  protects  it  from  its  enemies. 

Most  of  us  know  what  a  glorious  uplift  and 
stimulus  we  have  received  when  ill,  from  a 
call  from  one  who  is  cheerful  and  optimistic, 
and  who  injects  hope  and  courage  into  us. 
And  we  know  how  we  dread  to  have  some 
people  call  on  us  when  we  are  ill,  because  they 
rob  us  of  hope  and  leave  us  in  such  a  dejected 
mood  by  their  long  faces  and  pessimistic 
minds.  They  always  leave  the  depressing  shad- 
ows of  gloom  and  discouragement  behind  them. 

Sick  people,  like  children,  require  a  great 
deal  of  encouragement.  They  want  hope  held 
out  to  them. 


SUGGESTION   AND   HEALTH     121 

Imagine  what  an  uplift  it  would  be  to  a 
patient  if  his  physician,  nurse,  relatives,  and 
friends  were  all  trying  to  radiate  hope,  good 
cheer,  and  courage,  as  will  be  the  common 
custom  in  the  future ! 

The  cheerful,  optimistic  physician,  who  is 
always  reassuring  his  patients,  arousing  their 
healing  energies  (potencies  which  are  in  all 
of  us),  telling  them  how  well  they  look,  hold- 
ing out  hope  to  them,  and  trying  to  cheer 
them  up,  has  a  powerful  influence  for  good. 
The  optimism  of  many  physicians  is  worth 
infinitely  more  to  their  patients  than  all  the 
remedies  they  prescribe. 

I  once  knew  two  physicians  in  hospitals  in 
Boston  who  illustrated  this  point.  One  was  an 
extreme  optimist  with  a  keen  sense  of  humor. 
He  was  always  cracking  jokes  with  the  pa- 
tients, cheering  them  up,  and  telling  funny 
stories.  The  whole  atmosphere  of  the  wards 
was  entirely  changed  after  he  had  passed 
through  them.  His  bright,  cheerful  face  and 
sunny  optimism  gave  the  patients  a  great  up- 
hft. 

The  other  physician  was  morose,  stern, 
silent,  profound,  a  man  of  great  learning  but 
of  few  words  and  who  seldom  smiled.  If  he 
found  a  patient  not  looking  quite  so  well  as 


122     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

usual  he  did  not  hesitate  to  tell  him  so,  and 
that  he  was  losing  ground. 

He  was  conscientious  and  always  said  what 
he  thought,  even  when  it  was  cruel.  The 
sick  one,  thus  discouraged,  would  often  im- 
mediately lose  heart  and  collapse. 

Physicians  little  realize  how  implicitly  pa- 
tients pin  their  faith  to  them  and  how  closely 
they  watch  their  faces  for  signs  of  encourage- 
ment, a  ray  of  hope. 

The  most  advanced  physicians  of  all  schools 
are  beginning  to  see  the  uplifting  force  and 
healing  power  in  a  patient's  own  confidence  in 
his  recovery. 

Some  conscientious  physicians  think  they 
should  always  tell  the  patient  exactly  how 
he  is,  that  it  is  his  right  to  know,  especially 
when  in  extreme  danger.  Now,  there  might 
be  reason  in  this  if  the  physician  were  om- 
niscient, if  he  never  erred  in  his  diagnosis, 
if  he  could  measure  with  exactitude  every 
force  acting  in  the  man ;  but  even  the  most 
learned  physicians  feel  that  they  know  com- 
paratively little  about  the  human  mechanism. 
They  know  that  patients  often  recover  after 
eminent  physicians  in  consultation  have  given 
up  all  hope.  Why  should  they  not  give  the 
patient  the  benefit  of  a  doubt,  especially  when 


SUGGESTION   AND   HEALTH     123 

they  know  the  power  of  a  depressing  thought 
or  unfavorable  verdict  on  one  in  an  extremely 
weak  condition?  Does  a  physician  owe  his 
patient  a  greater  duty  than  to  help  him  all  he 
can  to  recover?  There  is  a  great  healing 
power  in  hope,  in  confidence. 

The  influence  of  the  strong  mind  of  the 
physician  on  the  weak,  discouraged,  exhausted 
patient  is  far-reaching  and  he  should  give  him 
as  much  mental  uplift  and  hope  as  possible 
There  are  times  when  a  physician  owes  his 
patient  an  infinitely  greater  duty  than  to  tell 
him  the  truth,  or  what  he  believes  to  be  the 
truth. 

The  power  of  suggestion  on  expectant  minds 
is  often  little  less  than  miraculous.  An  invalid 
with  a  disappointed  ambition,  who  thinks  he 
has  been  robbed  of  his  chances  in  life,  and 
who  has  suffered  for  years,  becomes  all 
wrought  up  over  some  new  remedy  which  is 
advertised  to  do  marvels.  He  is  in  such  an 
expectant  state  of  mind  that  he  is  willing  to 
make  any  sacrifice  to  obtain  the  remedy,  and 
when  he  gets  it,  he  is  in  such  a  receptive  mood 
that  he  responds  quickly  to  the  suggestion  and 
thinks  it  is  the  medicine  he  has  taken  which 
has  worked  the  magic. 

Religious  history  is  full  of  examples  of  peo- 


124     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

pie  who  have  been  cured  by  going  to  famed 
springs,  by  bathing  in  sacred  waters,  or 
streams  supposed  to  have  great  curative 
qualities. 

People  who  go  to  health  resorts  attribute 
their  improvement  to  change  of  air  or  to  the 
waters  they  drink,  when,  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
it  has  probably  been  wrought  by  change  of 
environment,  change  of  mental  suggestion,  as 
much  as  by  the  change  of  air  or  water. 

Buoyancy  of  mind,  courage,  hope,  and 
cheerfulness  are  factors  that  far  outweigh 
drugs  in  the  cure  of  the  sick,  and  should  be 
encouraged  in  every  possible  way. 

The  trouble  with  us  is  that  we  do  not  realize 
the  omnipotent  remedies  that  lie  within  our 
own  minds.  There  is  not  a  human  ill  which 
does  not  have  its  specific  remedy — not  a  pallia- 
tive, but  an  absolute  cure — named  in  the  Bible. 

Nothing  is  more  strongly  emphasized  in  the 
Sacred  Book  than  the  fact  that  love  heals. 
We  have  suggestions  of  this  in  the  balm  of 
the  mother  love  which  soothes  and  cures  the 
child's  fears  and  all  its  little  hurts  and  ills. 
How  naturally  the  child  runs  to  the  mother  for 
a  kiss  to  heal  its  bruises,  and  into  the  shelter 
of  her  arms  to  ward  ofif  whatever  it  fears ! 

If  the  child  feels  this  healing  power  of  the 


SUGGESTION   AND   HEALTH     125 

mother  love,  what  shall  we  say  of  the  potency 
of  divine  love — love  that  is  selfless  ?  The  Bible 
assures  us  that  "  perfect  love  casteth  out 
fear,"  and  fear  is  one  of  the  most  potent 
sources  of  discord  and  disease. 

What  better  remedy  could  be  imagined  for 
those  suffering  from  fear — the  greatest  enemy 
of  the  human  race — than  is  to  be  found  in  the 
study  and  application  of  the  ninety-first  psalm  ? 
Could  anything  be  more  reassuring  than  the 
opening  words  of  this  grand  psalm — "  He  that 
dwelleth  in  the  secret  place  of  the  Most  High 
shall  abide  under  the  shadow  of  the  Almighty  "  ? 

There  is  no  fear,  no  fit  of  the  "  blues,"  no 
despondency  or  discouragement,  which  this 
psalm,  if  properly  studied  and  applied,  would 
not  cure.  Think  what  its  realization  would 
mean  to  those  who  are  in  the  very  depths  of 
despair.  Could  there  be  any  other  refuge  such 
as  that  "  under  the  shadow  of  the  Almighty  "? 

He  who  lives  close  to  God  (good),  who 
abides  in  His  love,  fears  nothing,  is  not  wor- 
ried or  anxious,  because  he  feels  always  the 
protection  of  omnipotent  Power  and  infinite 
Wisdom. 

A  few  passages  from  the  Scriptures  will 
show  how  freely  and  fully  abundant  life, 
health,  strength — all  good  things — are  prom- 


126     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ised  to  those  who  heed  the  words  of  God,  who 
love  Him  and  put  their  faith  in  Him. 

Attend  to  my  words.  .  .  .  For  they  are  life 
unto  those  that  find  them,  and  health  to  all 
their  flesh. — Prov.  iv,  20,  22. 

They  that  wait  upon  the  Lord  shall  renew 
their  strength  ;  they  shall  mount  up  with  wings 
as  eagles  ;  they  shall  run,  and  not  be  weary  ;  and 
they  shall  walk,  and  not  faint. — Isaiah  xl,  31. 

He  sent  his  word  and  healed  them. — Psalm 
cvii,  20. 

I  cried  unto  thee,  and  thou  hast  healed  me. 
— Psalm  XXX,  2. 

His  flesh  shall  be  fresher  than  a  child's. — 
Job  xxxiii,  25. 

For  I  will  restore  health  unto  thee,  and  I 
will  heal  thee  of  thy  wounds. — Jer.  xxx,  17. 

Behold,  I  will  heal  thee. — H  Kings  xx,  5. 

Then  shall  thy  light  break  forth  as  the 
morning,  and  thine  health  shall  spring  forth 
speedily. — Isaiah  Iviii,  8. 

I  am  the  Lord  that  healeth  thee. — Exodus 
XV,  26. 

There  shall  be  no  more  death,  neither  sor- 
row, nor  crying,  neither  shall  there  be  any 
more  pain ;  for  the  former  things  are  passed 
away. — Rev.  xxi,  4. 

"  Neither    shall   any   plague "    (discord   or 


SUGGESTION    AND    HEALTH     127 

harm)  "come  nigh  thy  dwelHng"  (Psalm  xci, 
10),  is  the  promise  to  him  that  "  dwelleth  in  the 
secret  place  of  the  Most  High"  (Psalm  xci,  i). 

Let  thine  heart  keep  my  commandments : 
For  length  of  days,  and  long  life,  and  peace, 
shall  they  add  to  thee. — Prov.  iii,  1-3. 

When  we  are  thoroughly  intrenched  in  the 
conviction  of  our  unity  with  the  All-good ; 
when  we  realize  that  we  do  not  take  on  health 
from  outside  by  acquiring  it,  but  that  we  are 
health ;  that  we  do  not  absorb  a  bit  of  justice, 
here  and  there,  but  that  we  are  justice;  that 
we  do  not  take  on  truth,  a  little  here  and  a 
little  there,  but  that  we  are  truth  itself,  prin- 
ciple, then  we  shall  really  begin  to  live. 

I  believe  that  most  people  are  conscious  of 
a  power  deep  in  their  nature  which  would 
remedy  all  their  ills  if  they  only  knew  how 
to  get  hold  of  it.  We  all  feel  that  there  is 
something  divine  in  us,  something  in  the  flesh 
that  is  not  of  it,  a  power  back  of  the  flesh 
that  will  ultimately  redeem  us  and  bring  us 
into  the  state  of  blessedness  which  we  instinc- 
tively feel  is  the  right  of  the  children  of  the 
King  of  kings.  ("The  great  end  of  life  is  to 
train  ourselves  to  find  this  creative,  rejuvenat- 
ing, life-giving  force  and  to  ai)ply  it  to  our 
everyday  life.  ) 


IX.    WHY   GROW   OLD? 


IX.    WHY   GROW    OLD? 


"The  face  cannot  betray  the  years  until  the  mind  has 
given  its  consent.     The  mind  is  the  sculptor." 

"We  renew  our  bodies  by  renewing  our  thoughts; 
change   our    bodies,    our    habits,    by    changing    our 


thoughts." 


OT  long  ago  the  former  secre- 
tary to  a  justice  of  the  New 
York  Supreme  Court  com- 
mitted suicide  on  his  seven- 
tieth birthday. 

"  The  Statute  of  Limita- 
tions ;  a  Brief  Essay  on  the 
Osier  Theory  of  Life,"  was  found  beside  the 
dead  body.    It  read  in  part : 

"  Threescore  and  ten — this  is  the  scriptural 
statute  of  limitations.  After  that,  active  work 
for  man  ceases,  his  time  on  earth  has  ex- 
pired. .  .  . 

"  I  am  seventy — threescore  and  ten — and  I 
am  fit  only  for  the  chimney-corner.  .  .  ." 

This  man  had  dwelt  so  long  on  the  so-called 
Osier  theory — that  a  man  is  practically  use- 
less and  only  a  burden  to  himself  and  the 
world  after  sixty — and  the  biblical  limitation 
of  life  to  threescore  years  and  ten,  that  he 
made  up  his  mind  he  would  end  it  all  on  his 
seventieth  birthday. 

131 


132     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Leaving  aside  Dr.  Osier's  theory,  there  is  no 
doubt  that  the  acceptance  in  a  strictly  literal 
sense  of  the  biblical  life  limit  has  proved  a 
decided  injury  to  the  race.  We  are  powerfully 
influenced  by  our  self-imposed  limitations  and 
convictions,  and  it  is  well  known  that  many 
people  die  very  near  the  limit  they  set  for 
themselves,  even  though  they  are  in  good 
health  when  this  conviction  settles  upon  them. 
Yet  there  is  no  probability  that  the  Psalmist 
had  any  idea  of  setting  any  limit  to  the  life 
period,  or  that  he  had  any  authority  whatever 
for  so  doing.  Many  of  the  sayings  in  the  Bible 
which  people  take  so  literally  and  accept 
blindly  as  standards  of  living  are  merely  fig- 
ures of  speech  used  to  illustrate  an  idea.  So 
far  as  the  Bible  is  concerned,  there  is  just  as 
much  reason  for  setting  the  life  limit  at  one 
hundred  and  twenty  or  even  at  Methuselah's 
age  (nine  hundred  and  sixty-nine)  as  at  sev- 
enty or  eighty.  There  is  no  evidence  in  the 
Scriptures  that  even  suggests  the  existence 
of  an  age  limit  beyond  which  man  was  not 
supposed  or  allowed  to  pass. 

In  fact  the  whole  spirit  of  the  Bible  is  to 
encourage  long  life  through  sane  and  health- 
ful living.  It  points  to  the  duty  of  living  a 
useful  and  noble  life,  of  making  as  much  of 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  133 

ourselves   as  possible,   all   of   which  tends  to 
prolong  our  years  on  earth. 

It  would  be  a  reflection  upon  the  Creator  to 
suggest  that  He  would  limit  human  life  to  less 
than  three  times  the  age  at  which  it  reaches 
maturity  (about  thirty)  when  all  the  analogy 
of  nature,  especially  in  the  animal  kingdom, 
points  to  at  least  five  times  the  length  of  the 
maturing  period.  Should  not  the  highest  mani- 
festation of  God's  creation  have  a  length  of 
life  at  least  equal  to  that  of  the  animal? 
Infinite  wisdom  does  not  shake  the  fruit  off 
the  tree  before  it  is  ripe. 

We  do  not  half  realize  what  slaves  we  are  to 
our  mental  attitudes,  what  power  our  convic- 
tions have  to  influence  our  lives.  Multitudes 
of  people  undoubtedly  shorten  their  lives  by 
many  years  because  of  their  deep-seated  con- 
victions that  they  will  not  live  beyond  a  certain 
age — the  age,  perhaps,  at  which  their  parents 
died.  How  often  we  hear  this  said :  "  I  do  not 
expect  to  live  to  be  very  old ;  my  father  and 
mother  died  young." 

Not  long  ago  a  New  York  man,  in  perfect 
health,  told  his  family  that  he  was  certain  he 
should  die  on  his  next  birthday.  On  the  morn- 
ing of  his  birthday  his  family,  alarmed  because 
he   refused   to  go   to   work,    saying  that  he 


134     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

should  certainly  die  before  midnight,  insisted 
upon  calling  in  the  family  physician,  who  ex- 
amined him  and  said  there  was  nothing  the 
matter  with  him.  But  the  man  refused  to  eat, 
grew  weaker  and  weaker  during  the  day,  and 
actually  died  before  midnight.  The  conviction 
that  he  was  going  to  die  had  become  so  in- 
trenched in  his  mind  that  the  whole  force  of 
his  mentality  acted  to  cut  off  the  life  force,  and 
finally  to  strangle  completely  the  life  processes. 

Now,  if  this  man's  conviction  could  have 
been  changed  by  some  one  who  had  sufficient 
power  over  him,  or  if  the  mental  suggestion 
that  he  was  going  to  live  to  a  good  old  age 
had  been  implanted  in  his  mind  in  place  of  the 
death  idea,  he  would  probably  have  lived  many 
years  longer. 

If  you  have  convinced  yourself,  or  if  the 
idea  has  been  ingrained  into  the  very  structure 
of  your  being  by  your  training  or  the  multi- 
tudes of  examples  about  you,  that  you  will  be- 
gin to  show  the  marks  of  age  at  about  fifty, 
that  at  sixty  you  will  lose  the  power  of  your 
faculties,  your  interest  in  life ;  that  you  will 
become  practically  useless  and  have  to  retire 
from  your  business,  and  that  thereafter  you 
will  continue  to  decline  until  you  are  cut  off 
entirely,  there  is  no  power  in  the  world  that 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  135 

can  keep  the  old-age  processes  and  signs  from 
developing  in  you. 

Thought  leads.  If  it  is  an  old-age  thought, 
old  age  must  follow.  If  it  is  a  youthful  thought, 
a  perennial  young-life  thought,  a  thought  of 
usefulness  and  helpfulness,  the  body  must 
correspond.  Old  age  begins  in  the  mind.  The 
expression  of  age  in  the  body  is  the  harvest 
of  old-age  ideas  which  have  been  planted  in 
the  mind.  We  see  others  about  our  age  begin- 
ning to  decline  and  show  marks  of  decrepitude, 
and  we  imagine  it  is  about  time  for  us  to  show 
the  same  signs.  Ultimately  we  do  show  them, 
because  we  think  they  are  inevitable.  But  they 
are  only  inevitable  because  of  our  old-age 
mental  attitude  and  race  habit  beliefs. 

If  we  actually  refuse  to  grow  old ;  if  we 
insist  on  holding  the  youthful  ideal  and  the 
young,  hopeful,  buoyant  thought,  the  old-age 
ear-marks  will  not  show  themselves. 

The  elixir  of  youth  lies  in  the  mind  or  no- 
where. You  cannot  be  young  by  trying  to 
appear  so,  by  dressing  youthfully.  You  must 
first  get  rid  of  the  last  vestige  of  thought  that 
you  are  aging.  As  long  as  that  is  in  the  mind, 
cosmetics  and  youthful  dress  will  amount 
to  very  little  in  changing  your  appearance. 
The   conviction   must  first   be   changed;   the 


136     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

thought  which  has  produced  the  aging  con- 
dition must  be  reversed. 

If  we  can  only  establish  the  perpetual-youth 
mental  attitude,  so  that  we  feel  young,  we  have 
won  half  the  battle  against  old  age.  Be  sure  of 
this,  that  whatever  you  feel  regarding  your 
age  will  be  expressed  in  your  body. 

It  is  a  great  aid  to  the  perpetuation  of 
youth  to  learn  to  feel  young,  however  long 
we  may  have  lived,  because  the  body  ex- 
presses the  habitual  feeling,  habitual  thought. 
Nothing  in  the  world  will  make  us  look  young 
as  long  as  we  are  convinced  that  we  are 
aging. 

Nothing  else  more  effectually  retards  age 
than  the  keeping  in  mind  the  bright,  cheerful, 
optimistic,  hopeful,  buoyant  picture  of  youth, 
in  all  its  splendor,  magnificence ;  the  picture 
of  the  glories  which  belong  to  youth — youth- 
ful dreams,  ideals,  hopes,  and  all  the  qualities 
which  belong  to  young  life. 

One  great  trouble  with  us  is  that  our  im- 
aginations age  prematurely.  The  hard,  exact- 
ing conditions  of  our  modern,  strenuous  life 
tend  to  harden  and  dry  up  the  brain  and 
nerve  cells,  and  thus  seriously  injure  the 
power  of  the  imagination,  which  should  be 
kept  fresh,  buoyant,  elastic.  The  average  rou- 


WHY   GROW   OLD?  137 

tine  habit  of  modern  business  life  tends  to 
destroy  the  flexibility,  the  delicacy,  the  sensi- 
tiveness, the  exquisite  fineness  of  the  percep- 
tive faculties. 

C People  who  take  life  too  seriously,  who 
seem  to  think  everything  depends  upon  their 
own  individual  efforts,  whose  lives  are  one 
continuous  grind  in  living-getting,  have  a 
hard  expression,  their  thought  outpictures 
itself  in  their  faces.  These  people  dry  up 
early  in  life,  become  wrinkled ;  their  tissues 
become  as  hard  as  their  thought.  ) 

The  arbitrary,  domineering,  overbearing 
mind  also  tends  to  age  the  body  prematurely, 
because  the  thinking  is  hard,  strained,  ab- 
normal. 

People  who  live  on  the  sunny  and  beautiful 
side  of  life,  who  cultivate  serenity,  do  not  age 
nearly  so  rapidly  as  do  those  who  live  on  the 
shady,  the  dark  side. 

Another  reason  why  so  many  people  age 
prematurely  is  because  they  cease  to  grow. 
It  is  a  lamentable  fact  that  multitudes  of  men 
seem  incapable  of  receiving  or  accepting  new 
ideas  after  they  have  reached  middle  age. 
Many  of  them,  after  they  have  reached  the 
age  of  forty  or  fifty,  come  to  a  standstill  in 
their  mental  reaching  out. 


138     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Don't  think  that  you  must  "  begin  to  take 
in  sail,"  to  stop  growing",  stop  progressing, 
just  because  you  have  gotten  along  in  years. 
By  this  method  of  reasoning  you  will  decline 
rapidly.  Never  allow  yourself  to  get  out  of 
the  habit  of  being  young.  Do  not  say  that 
you  cannot  do  this  or  that  as  you  once  did. 
Live  the  life  that  belongs  to  youth.  Do  not  be 
afraid  of  being  a  boy  or  girl  again  in  spirit, 
no  matter  how  many  years  you  have  lived. 
Carry  yourself  so  that  you  will  not  suggest 
old  age  in  any  of  its  phases.  Remember  it  is 
the  stale  mind,  the  stale  mentality,  that  ages 
the  body.  Keep  growing,  keep  interested  in 
everything  about  you. 

It  has  been  shown  that  the  conviction  that 
one  is  going  to  die  at  about  a  certain  time,  a 
certain  age,  tends  to  bring  about  the  expected 
dissolution  by  strangling  the  life  processes. 

If  you  wish  to  retain  your  youth,  forget 
unpleasant  experiences,  disagreeable  inci- 
dents. A  lady  eighty  years  old  was  recently 
asked  how  she  managed  to  keep  herself  so 
youthful.  She  replied :  "  I  know  how  to  for- 
get disagreeable  things." 

No  one  can  remain  youthful  who  does  not 
continue  to  grow,  and  no  one  can  keep  grow- 
ing who  does  not  keep  alive  his  interest  in  the 


WHY   GROW   OLD?  139 

great  world  about  him.  We  are  so  constituted 
that  we  draw  a  large  part  of  our  nourishment 
from  others.  No  man  can  isolate  himself,  can 
cut  himself  off  from  his  fellows,  without 
shrinking  in  his  mental  stature.  The  mind  that 
is  not  constantly  reaching  out  for  the  new,  as 
well  as  keeping  in  touch  with  the  old,  soon 
reaches  its  limit  of  growth. 

Nothing  else  is  easier  than  for  a  man  to  age. 
All  he  has  to  do  is  to  think  he  is  growing  old ; 
to  expect  it,  to  fear  it,  and  prepare  for  it;  to 
compare  himself  with  others  of  the  same  age 
who  are  prematurely  old  and  to  assume  that 
he  is  like  them. 

To  think  constantly  of  the  "  end,"  to  plan 
for  death,  to  prepare  and  provide  for  declin- 
ing years,  is  simply  to  acknowledge  that  your 
powers  are  waning,  that  you  are  losing  your 
grip  upon  life.  Such  thinking  tends  to  weaken 
your  hold  upon  the  life  principle,  and  your 
body  gradually  corresponds  with  your  con- 
viction. 

The  very  belief  that  our  powers  are  waning ; 
the  consciousness  that  we  are  losing  strength, 
that  our  vitality  is  lessening;  the  conviction 
that  old  age  is  settling  upon  us  and  that  our 
life  forces  are  gradually  ebbing  away,  has  a 
blighting,  shrivelling  influence  upon  the  mental 


140      PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

faculties  and  functions ;  the  whole  character 
deteriorates  under  this  old-age  belief. 

The  result  is  that  we  do  not  use  or  develop 
the  age-resisting  forces  within  us.  The  refresh- 
ening, renewing,  resisting  powers  of  the  body 
are  so  reduced  and  impaired  by  the  conviction 
that  we  are  getting  on  in  years  and  cannot 
stand  what  we  once  could,  that  we  become  an 
easy  prey  to  disease  and  all  sorts  of  physical 
infirmities. 

The  mental  attitude  has  everything  to  do 
with  the  hastening  or  the  retarding  of  the  old- 
age  condition. 

Dr.  Metchnikoff,  of  the  Pasteur  Institute  in 
Paris,  says  that  men  should  live  at  least  one 
hundred  and  twenty  years.  There  is  no  doubt 
that,  as  a  race,  we  shorten  our  lives  very  ma- 
terially through  our  false  thinking,  our  bad 
living,  and  our  old-age  convictions. 

A  few  years  ago  the  London  Lancet,  the 
highest  medical  authority  in  the  world,  gave 
a  splendid  illustration  of  the  power  of  the  mind 
to  keep  the  body  young.  A  young  woman,  de- 
serted by  her  lover,  became  insane.  She  lost 
all  consciousness  of  the  passing  of  time.  She 
believed  her  lover  would  return,  and  for  years 
she  stood  daily  before  her  window  watching 
for   him.    When   over   seventy   years   of  age, 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  141 

some  Americans,  including  physicians,  who 
saw  her,  thought  she  was  not  over  twenty. 
She  did  not  have  a  single  gray  hair,  and 
no  wrinkles  or  other  signs  of  age  were  vis- 
ible. Her  skin  was  as  fair  and  smooth  as  a 
young  girl's.  She  did  not  age  because  she  be- 
lieved she  was  still  a  girl.  She  did  not  count 
her  birthdays  or  worry  because  she  was  get- 
ting along  in  years.  She  was  thoroughly  con- 
vinced that  she  was  still  living  in  the  very  time 
that  her  lover  left  her.  This  mental  belief  con- 
trolled her  physical  condition.  She  was  just  as 
old  as  she  thought  she  zvas.  Her  conviction 
outpictured  itself  in  her  body  and  kept  it 
youthful. 

It  is  an  insult  to  your  Creator  that  your  brain 
should  begin  to  ossify,  that  your  mental  pow- 
ers should  begin  to  decline  when  you  have 
only  reached  the  half-century  milestone.  You 
ought  then  to  be  in  your  youth.  What  has  the 
appearance  of  old  age  to  do  with  youth  ?  What 
have  gray  hair,  wrinkles,  and  other  evidences 
of  age  to  do  with  youth?  Mental  power 
should  constantly  increase.  There  should  be  no 
decline  in  years.  Increasing  wisdom  and  power 
should  be  the  only  signs  that  you  have  lived 
long,  that  you  have  been  many  years  on  this 
planet.  Strength,  beauty,  magnificence,  supe- 


142     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

riority,  not  weakness,  uselessness,  decrepitude, 
should  characterize  a  man  who  has  Uved  long. 

As  long  as  you  hold  the  conviction  that  you 
are  sixty,  you  will  look  it.  Your  thought  will 
outpicture  itself  in  your  face,  in  your  whole 
appearance.  If  you  hold  the  old-age  ideal,  the 
old-age  conviction,  your  expression  must  cor- 
respond. The  body  is  the  bulletin  board  of  the 
mind. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  you  think  of  yourself 
as  perpetually  young,  vigorous,  robust,  and 
buoyant,  because  every  cell  in  the  body  is  con- 
stantly being  renewed,  decrepitude  will  not 
get  hold  of  you. 

If  you  would  retain  your  youth,  you  must 
avoid  the  enemies  of  youth,  and  there  are  no 
greater  enemies  than  the  convictions  of  age 
and  the  gradual  loss  of  interest  in  things, 
especially  in  youthful  amusements  and  in  the 
young  life  about  you.  When  you  are  no 
longer  interested  in  the  hopes  and  ambitions 
of  young  people ;  when  you  decHne  to  enter 
into  their  sports,  to  romp  and  play  with  chil- 
dren, you  confess  in  effect  that  you  are  grow- 
ing old ;  that  you  are  beginning  to  harden ; 
that  your  youthful  spirits  are  drying  up,  and 
that  the  juices  of  your  younger  days  are 
evaporating.  Nothing  helps  more  to  the  per- 


WHY   GROW   OLD?  143 

petuation  of  youth  than  much  association  with 
the  young. 

A  man  quite  advanced  in  years  was  asked 
not  long  ago  how  he  retained  such  a  youthful 
appearance  in  spite  of  his  age.  He  said  that 
he  had  been  the  principal  of  a  high  school  for 
over  thirty  years ;  that  he  loved  to  enter  into 
the  life  and  sports  of  the  young  people  and 
to  be  one  of  them  in  their  ambitions  and  in- 
terests. This,  he  said,  had  kept  his  mind  cen- 
tred on  youth,  progress,  and  abounding  life, 
and  the  old-age  thought  had  had  no  room  for 
entrance. 

There  is  not  even  a  suggestion  of  age  in 
this  man's  conversation  or  ideas,  and  there  is 
a  life,  a  buoyancy  about  him  which  is  won- 
derfully refreshing. 

There  must  be  a  constant  activity  in  the 
mind  that  would  not  age.  "  Keep  growing  or 
die "  is  nature's  motto,  a  motto  written  all 
over  everything  in  the  universe. 

Hold  stoutly  to  the  conviction  that  it  is 
natural  and  right  for  you  to  remain  young. 
Constantly  repeat  to  yourself  that  it  is  wrong, 
wicked  for  you  to  grow  old  in  appearance; 
that  weakness  and  decrepitude  could  not  have 
l)ecn  in  the  Creator's  plan  for  the  man  made 
in  His  image  of  perfection ;  that  it  nuist  have 


144     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

been  acquired — the  result  of  wrong  race  and 
individual  training  and  thinking. 

Constantly  affirm :  "  I  am  always  well,  al- 
ways young,  I  cannot  grow  old  except  by 
producing  the  old-age  conditions  through  my 
thought.  The  Creator  intended  me  for  con- 
tinual growth,  perpetual  advancement  and 
betterment,  and  I  am  not  going  to  allow  my- 
self to  be  cheated  out  of  my  birthright  of 
perennial  youth.'M 

No  matter  if  people  do  say  to  you :  "  You 
are  getting  along  in  years,"  "  You  are  begin- 
ning to  show  signs  of  age."  Just  deny  these 
appearances.  Say  to  yourself :  "  Principle  does 
not  age,  Truth  does  not  grow  old.  I  am 
Principle.  I  am  Truth." 

Never  go  to  sleep  with  the  old-age  picture 
or  thought  in  your  mind.  It  is  of  the  utmost 
importance  to  make  yourself  feel  yovmg  at 
night;  to  erase  all  signs,  convictions,  and 
feelings  of  age ;  to  throw  aside  every  care  and 
worry  that  would  carve  its  image  on  your 
brain  and  express  itself  in  your  face.  The 
worrying  mind  actually  generates  calcareous 
matter  in  the  brain  and  hardens  the  cells. 

You  should  fall  asleep  holding  those  desires 
and  ideals  uppermost  in  the  mind  which  are 
dearest  to  you ;  which  you  are  the  most  anxious 


WHY   GROW    OLD?  145 

to  realize.  As  the  mind  continues  to  work 
during  sleep,  these  desires  and  ideals  are  thus 
intensified  and  increased.  It  is  well  known  that 
impure  thoughts  and  desires  work  terrible 
havoc  then.  Purity  of  thought,  loftiness  of 
purpose,  the  highest  possible  aims,  should 
dominate  the  mind  when  you  fall  asleep. 

When  you  first  wake  in  the  morning,  espe- 
cially if  you  have  reached  middle  life  or  later, 
picture  the  youthful  qualities  as  vividly  as  pos- 
sible. Say  to  yourself :  "  I  am  young,  always 
young — strong — buo}'ant.  I  cannot  grow  old 
and  decrepit,  because  in  the  truth  of  my  being 
I  am  divine,  and  Divine  Principle  cannot  age. 
It  is  only  the  negative  in  me,  the  unreality, 
that  can  take  on  the  appearance  of  age." 

The  great  thing  is  to  make  the  mind  cre- 
ate the  youth  pattern  instead  of  the  old-age 
pattern.  As  the  sculptor  follows  the  model 
which  he  holds  in  the  mind,  so  the  life  proc- 
esses reproduce  in  the  body  the  pattern  which 
is  in  our  thought,  our  conviction. 

We  must  get  rid  of  the  idea  embedded  in 
our  very  nature  that  the  longer  we  live,  the 
more  experiences  we  have,  the  more  work  we 
do,  the  more  inevitably  we  wear  out  and  be- 
come old,  decrepit,  and  useless.  We  must  learn 
that  living,  acting,   experiencing,   should  not 


146     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

exhaust  life  but  create  more  life.  It  is  a  law 
that  action  increases  force.  Where,  then,  did 
the  idea  come  from  that  man  should  wear 
out  through  action? 

C  As  a  matter  of  fact.  Nature  has  bestowed 
upon  us  perpetual  youth,  the  power  of  per- 
petual renewal.  There  is  not  a  single  cell  in 
our  bodies  that  can  possibly  become  old ;  the 
body  is  constantly  being  made  new  through 
cell-renewal ;  and  as  the  cells  of  these  parts  of 
the  body  that  are  most  active  are  renewed 
oftenest,  it  must  follow  that  the  age-producing 
process  is  largely  artificial  and  unnatural. 

Physiologists  tell  us  that  the  tissue  cells  of 
some  muscles  are  renewed  every  few  hours, 
others  every  few  days  or  weeks.  The  cells  of 
the  bone  tissues  are  slower  of  renewal,  but 
some  authorities  estimate  that  eighty  or  ninety 
per  cent  of  all  the  cells  in  the  body  of  a  person 
of  ordinary  activity  are  entirely  renewed  in 
from  six  to  twelve  months. 

Scientists  have  proved  beyond  question  that 
the  chemistry  of  the  body  has  everything  to 
do  with  the  perpetuation  of  youthful  condi- 
tions. Every  discordant  thought  produces  a 
chemical  change  in  the  cells,  introducing  for- 
eign substances  and  causing  reaction  which  is 
injurious  to  the  integrity  of  the  cells. 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  147 

The  impression  of  age  is  thus  made  upon 
new  cells.  This  impression  is  the  thought.  If 
the  thought  is  old,  the  age  impress  appears 
upon  the  cells.  If  the  spirit  of  youth  dominates 
the  thought,  the  impression  upon  the  cells  is 
youthful.  In  other  words,  the  processes  which 
result  in  age  cannot  possibly  operate  except 
through  the  mind,  and  the  billions  of  cells 
composing  the  body  are  instantly  affected  by 
every  thought  that  passes  through  the  brain. 

Putting  old  thoughts  into  a  new  set  of  cells 
is  like  putting  old  wine  into  new  bottles.  They 
don't  agree ;  they  are  natural  enemies.  The  re- 
sult is  that  two-year-old  cells  are  made  to  look 
fifty,  sixty,  or  more  years  old,  according  to 
the  thought.  It  is  marvellous  hozu  quickly  old 
thoughts  can  make  new  cells  appear  old. 

All  discordant  and  antagonistic  thought 
materially  interferes  with  the  laws  of  recon- 
struction and  self-renewal  going  on  in  the 
body,  and  the  great  thing  is,  therefore,  to  form 
thought  habits  which  will  harmonize  with  this 
law  of  rejuvenation — perpetual  renewal. 

Hard,  selfish,  worry,  and  fear  thoughts, 
and  vicious  habits  of  all  kinds,  produce  the 
appearance  of  age  and  hasten  its  coming. 

Pessimism  is  one  of  the  worst  enemies  of 
youth.    The   pessimist   ages    prematurely   be- 


148     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

cause  his  mind  dwells  upon  the  black,  dis- 
cordant, and  diseased  side  of  things.  The  pes- 
simist does  not  progress,  does  not  face  toward 
youth ;  he  goes  backward,  and  this  retrogres- 
sion is  fatal  to  youthful  conditions.  Brightness, 
cheerfulness,  hopefulness  characterize  youth. 

Everything  that  is  abnormal  tends  to  pro- 
duce old-age  conditions.  No  one  can  remain 
young,  no  matter  to  what  expedients  he  may 
resort  to  enable  him  to  erase  the  marks  of 
age,  who  worries  and  indulges  in  excessive 
passion.  The  mental  processes  produce  all 
sorts  of  things,  good  or  bad,  according  to  the 
pattern  in  the  mind. 

Selfishness  is  abnormal  and  tends  to  harden 
and  dry  up  the  brain  and  nerve  cells.  We  are 
so  constituted  that  we  must  be  good  to  be 
happy,  and  happiness  spells  youthfulness. 
Selfishness  is  an  enemy  of  happiness  because 
it  violates  the  very  fundamental  principle  of 
our  being — justice,  fairness.  We  protest 
against  it,  we  instinctively  despise  and  think 
less  of  ourselves  for  practising  it.  It  does  not 
tend  to  produce  health,  harmony,  or  a  sense 
of  well-being,  because  it  does  not  harmonize 
with  the  fundamental  principle  of  our  being. 

With  many  people,  old  age  is  a  perpetual 
horror,  which  destroys  comfort  and  happiness 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  149 

and  makes  life  a  tragedy,  which,  but  for  it, 
might  have  been  a  perpetual  joy. 

Many  wealthy  people  do  not  really  enjoy 
their  possessions  because  of  that  awful  con- 
sciousness that  they  may  at  any  moment  be 
forced  to  leave  everything. 

Discordant  thought  of  every  kind  tends  to 
shorten  life. 

As  long  as  you  think  old,  hard,  grasping, 
envious  thoughts,  nothing  in  the  world  can 
keep  you  from  growing  old.  As  long  as  you 
harbor  these  enemies  of  youth,  you  cannot  re- 
main in  a  youthful  condition.  New  thoughts 
create  new  life ;  old  thoughts — canned,  stereo- 
typed thoughts — are  injurious  to  growth,  and 
anything  which  stops  growth  helps  the  aging 
processes. 

Whatever  thought  dominates  the  mind  at 
any  time  is  constantly  modifying,  changing 
the  life  ideal,  so  that  every  suggestion  that 
comes  into  the  mind  from  any  source  is 
registered  in  the  cell  life,  etched  in  the  char- 
acter, and  outpictured  in  the  expression  and 
appearance.  If  the  ideal  of  continual  youth, 
of  a  body  in  a  state  of  perpetual  rejuvenation, 
dominates  the  mind,  it  neutralizes  the  aging 
processes.  All  of  the  body  follows  the  dominat- 
ing thought,  motive  and  feeling,  and  takes  on 


ISO     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

its  expression.  For  example,  a  man  who  is 
constantly  worrying,  fretting,  a  victim  of 
fear,  cannot  possibly  help  outpicturing  this 
condition  in  his  body.  Nothing  in  the  world 
can  counteract  this  hardening,  aging,  ossify- 
ing process  but  a  complete  reversal  of  the 
thought,  so  that  the  opposite  ideas  dominate. 
The  effect  of  the  mind  on  the  body  is  always 
absolutely  scientific.  It  follows  an  inexorable 
law. 

There  is  a  power  of  health  latent  in  every 
cell  of  the  body  which  would  always  keep 
the  cell  in  harmony  and  preserve  its  integrity 
if  the  thought  were  right.  This  latent  power 
of  health  in  the  cell  can  be  so  developed  by 
right  thinking  and  living  as  to  retard  very 
materially  the  aging  processes. 

One  of  the  most  effective  means  of  develop- 
ing it  is  to  keep  cheerful  and  optimistic.  As 
long  as  the  mind  faces  the  sun  of  life  it  will 
cast  no  shadow  before  it. 

Hold  ever  before  you,  like  a  beacon  light, 
the  youth  ideal — strength,  buoyancy,  hopeful- 
ness, expectancy.  Hold  persistently  to  the 
thought  that  your  body  is  the  last  two  years' 
product;  that  there  may  not  be  in  it  a  single 
cell  more  than  a  year  and  a  half  old ;  that  it  is 
constantly  young  because  it  is  perpetually  be- 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  151 

ing  renewed  and  that,  therefore,  it  ought  to 
look  fresh  and  youthful. 

Constantly  say  to  yourself:  "If  Nature 
makes  me  a  new  body  every  few  months,  com- 
paratively, if  the  billions  of  tissue  cells  are 
being  perpetually  renewed,  if  the  oldest  of 
these  cells  are,  perhaps,  rarely,  if  ever,  more 
than  two  years  old,  why  should  they  appear 
to  be  sixty  or  seventy-five  ?  "  A  two-year-old 
cell  could  not  look  like  a  seventy-year-old  cell 
of  its  own  accord,  but  we  know  from  experi- 
ence that  the  old-age  conviction  can  make 
these  youthful  cells  look  very  old.  If  the  body 
is  always  young,  it  should  always  look  young ; 
and  it  would  if  we  did  not  make  it  look  old 
by  stamping  old  age  upon  it.  We  Americans 
seem  very  adept  in  putting  the  old-age  stamp 
upon  new  tissue  cells.  Yet  it  is  just  as  easy  to 
form  the  youthful-thought  habit  as  the  old- 
age-thought  habit. 

If  you  would  keep  young,  you  must  learn 
the  secret  of  self-rejuvenation,  self-refresh- 
ment, self-renewal,  in  your  thought,  in  your 
work.  Hard  thoughts,  too  serious  thoughts, 
mental  confusion,  excitement,  worry,  anxiety, 
jealousy,  the  indulgence  of  explosive  passions, 
all  tend  to  shorten  life. 

You    will    find   a    wonderful    rejuvenating 


152     PEACE,  PO\VER,  AND  PLENTY 

power  in  the  cultivation  of  faith  in  the  im- 
mortal Principle  of  health  in  every  atom  of 
your  being.  We  are  all  conscious  that  there 
is  something  in  us  which  is  never  sick  and 
which  never  dies,  something  which  connects 
us  "with  the  Divine.  There  is  a  wonderful  heal- 
ing influence  in  holding  the  consciousness  of 
this  great  truth. 

Some  people  are  so  constituted  that  they 
perpetually  renew  themselves.  They  do  not 
seem  to  get  tired  or  weary  of  their  tasks,  be- 
cause their  minds  are  constantly  refreshing 
themselves.  They  are  self-lubricators,  self-re- 
newers.  To  keep  from  aging,  we  must  keep 
the  picture  of  youth  in  all  its  beauty  and  glory 
impressed  upon  the  mind.  It  is  impossible  to 
appear  youthful,  to  be  young,  unless  we  feel 
young. 

Without  realizing  it,  most  people  are  using 
the  old-age  thought  as  a  chisel  to  cut  a  little 
deeper  the  wrinkles.  Their  old-age  thought  is 
stamping  itself  upon  the  new  cells  only  a  few 
months  old,  so  that  they  very  soon  look  to  be 
forty,  fifty,  sixty,  or  seventy  years  old. 

Never  allow  yourself  to  think  of  yourself 
as  growing  old.  Constantly  affirm,  if  you  feel 
yourself  aging,  "  I  am  young  because  I  am 
perpetually  being  renewed ;  my  life  comes  new 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  153 

every  moment  from  the  Infinite  Source  of  life. 
I  am  new  every  morning  and  fresh  every 
evening  because  I  live,  move,  and  have  my 
being  in  Him  who  is  the  Source  of  all  life." 
Not  only  affirm  this  mentally,  but  verbally 
when  you  can.  Make  this  picture  of  perpetual 
renewal,  constant  refreshment,  re-creation,  so 
vivid,  that  you  will  feel  the  thrill  of  youthful 
renewal  through  your  entire  system.  Under 
no  circumstances  allow  the  old-age  thought 
and  suggestion  to  remain  in  the  mind.  Re- 
member that  it  is  what  you  feel,  what  you  are 
convinced  of,  that  will  be  outpictured  in  your 
body.  If  you  think  you  are  aging,  if  you  walk, 
talk,  dress,  and  act  like  an  old  person,  these 
conditions  will  be  outpictured  in  your  expres- 
sion, face,  manner,  and  body  generally. 

Youthful  thought  should  be  a  life  habit. 

Cling  to  the  thought  that  the  truth  of  your 
being  can  never  age,  because  it  is  Divine  Prin- 
ciple. Picture  the  cells  of  the  body  being  con- 
stantly made  over.  Hold  this  perpetual-re- 
newal picture  in  your  mind,  and  the  old-age 
thought,  the  old-age  conviction  will  become 
inoperative. 

The  new  youth-thought  habit  will  drive  out 
the  old-age-thought  habit.  If  you  can  only  feel 
your  whole  body  being  perpetually  made  over, 


154     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

constantly  renewed,  you  will  keep  the  body 
young,  fresh. 

There  is  a  tremendous  youth  -  retaining 
power  in  holding  high  ideals  and  lofty  senti- 
ments. The  spirit  cannot  grow  old  while  one 
is  constantly  aspiring  to  something  better, 
higher,  nobler.  Employment  which  develops 
the  higher  self ;  the  frequent  dwelHng  upon 
lofty  themes  and  high  purposes — all  are 
powerful  preservatives  of  youth.  It  is  senility 
of  the  soul  that  makes  people  old. 

The  living  of  life  should  be  a  perpetual  joy. 
Youth  and  joy  are  synonymous.  If  we  do  not 
enjoy  life,  if  we  do  not  feel  that  it  is  a  de- 
light to  be  alive,  if  we  do  not  look  upon  our 
work  as  a  grand  privilege,  we  shall  age  pre- 
maturely. 

Live  always  in  a  happy  mental  attitude. 
Live  in  the  ideal,  and  the  aging  processes 
cannot  get  hold  of  you.  It  is  the  ideal  that 
keeps  one  young.  When  we  think  of  age,  we 
think  of  weakness,  decrepitude,  imperfection; 
we  do  not  think  of  wholeness,  vigor.  Every 
time  you  think  of  yourself  make  a  vivid  men- 
tal picture  of  your  ideal  self  as  the  very  pic- 
ture of  youth,  of  health  and  vigor.  Think 
health.  Feel  the  spirit  of  youth  and  hope  surg- 
ing through  your  body.  Form  the  most  per- 


-     WHY    GROW    OLD?  155 

feet  picture  of  physical  manhood  or  woman- 
hood that  is  possible  to  the  human  mind. 

The  elixir  of  youth  which  alchemists  sought 
so  long  in  chemicals,  we  find  lies  in  ourselves. 
The  secret  is  in  our  own  mentality.  Perpetual 
rejuvenation  is  possible  only  by  right  think- 
ing. We  look  as  old  as  we  think  and  feel  be- 
cause it  is  thought  and  feeling  that  change 
our  appearance. 

Let  us  put  beauty  into  our  lives  by  thinking 
beautiful  thoughts,  building  beautiful  ideals, 
and  picturing  beautiful  things  in  our  imagina- 
tion. 

I  know  of  no  remedy  for  old-age  conditions 
so  powerful  as  love — love  for  our  work,  love 
for  our  fellow-men,  love  for  everything. 

It  is  the  most  powerful  life-renewer,  re- 
freshener, re-creator,  known.  Love  awakens 
the  noblest  sentiments,  the  finest  sensibilities, 
the  most  exquisite  qualities  in  man. 

Try  to  find  and  live  in  the  soul  of  things, 
to  see  the  best  in  everybody.  When  you  think 
of  a  person,  hold  in  your  mind  the  ideal  of  that 
person — that  which  God  meant  him  to  be — 
not  the  deformed,  weak,  ignorant  creature 
which  vice  and  wrong  living  may  have  made. 
This  habit  of  refusing  to  see  anything  but  the 
ideal   will   not  only  be   a  wonderful  help  to 


156     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

others,  but  also  to  yourself.  Refuse  to  see 
deformity  or  weakness  anywhere,  but  hold  per- 
sistently your  highest  ideals.  Other  things  be- 
ing equal,  it  is  the  cleanest,  purest  mind  that 
lives  longest. 

Harmony,  peace,  and  serenity  are  absolutely 
necessary  to  perpetuate  youthful  conditions. 
All  discord,  all  unbalanced  mental  operations, 
tend  to  produce  aging  conditions.  The  con- 
templation of  the  eternal  verities  enriches  the 
ideals  and  freshens  life  because  it  destroys 
fear,  uncertainty,  and  worry  by  adding  assur- 
ance and  certainty  to  life. 

Old-age  conditions  can  only  exist  in  cells 
which  have  become  deteriorated  and  hardened 
by  wrong  thinking  and  vicious  living.  Unre- 
strained passion  or  fits  of  temper  burn  out  the 
cells  very  rapidly. 

People  who  are  very  useful,  who  are  doing 
their  work  grandly,  growing  vigorously,  re- 
tain their  youthful  appearance.  We  can  form 
the  habit  of  staying  young  just  as  well  as  the 
habit  of  growing  old. 

Increasing  power  and  wisdom  ought  to  be 
the  only  sign  of  our  long  continuance  on  this 
earth.  We  ought  to  do  our  best  work  after 
fifty,  or  even  after  sixty  or  seventy ;  and  if  the 
brain  is  kept  active,  fresh,  and  young,  and  the 


WHY    GROW    OLD?  157 

brain  cells  are  not  ruined  by  too  serious  a  life, 
by  worry,  fear,  selfishness,  or  disease,  the 
mind  will  constantly  increase  in  vigor  and 
power. 

If  we  are  convinced  that  the  life  processes 
can  perpetuate  youth  instead  of  age,  they  will 
obey  the  command.  The  fact  that  man's  sin, 
his  ignorance  of  true  living,  made  the  three- 
score years,  with  the  possible  addition  of  ten 
more,  the  average  limit  of  life  centuries  ago, 
is  no  reason  why  any  one  in  this  man-emanci- 
pating age  should  narrow  himself  to  this  limit. 

An  all-wise  and  benevolent  Creator  could 
not  make  us  with  such  a  great  yearning  for 
long  life,  a  longing  to  remain  young,  with- 
out any  possibility  of  realizing  it.  The  very 
fact  of  this  universal  protest  in  all  human  be- 
ings against  the  enormous  disproportion  be- 
tween the  magnitude  of  our  mission  upon  earth 
and  the  shortness  of  the  time  and  the  meagre- 
ness  of  the  opportunities  for  carrying  it  out ; 
the  universal  yearning  for  longevity ;  and  all 
analogy  in  the  animal  kingdom,  all  point  to 
the  fact  that  man  was  not  only  intended  for  a 
much  longer  life,  but  also  for  a  much  greater 
freedom  from  the  present  old-age  weaknesses 
and  handicaps. 

There  is  not  the  slightest  indication  in  the 


158     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

marvellous  mechanism  of  man  that  he  was 
intended  to  become  weak,  crippled,  and  use- 
less after  a  comparatively  few  years.  Instead, 
all  the  indications  are  toward  progress  into  a 
larger,  completer,  fuller  manhood,  greater 
power.  A  dwarfed,  weak,  useless  man  was 
never  in  the  Creator's  plan.  Retrogression  is 
contrary  to  all  principle  and  law.  Progress, 
perpetual  enlargement,  growth,  are  the  truth 
of  man.  The  Creator  never  made  anything  for 
retrogression ;  it  is  contrary  to  the  very  nature 
of  Deity.  ''  Onward  and  upward  "  is  written 
upon  every  atom  in  the  universe.  Imagine  the 
Creator  fashioning  a  man  in  his  own  likeness 
for  only  a  few  years  of  activity  and  growth, 
and  then — retrogression,  crippled  helplessness  ! 
There  is  nothing  of  God  in  this  picture.  What- 
ever the  Deity  makes  bears  the  stamp  of  per- 
petual progress,  everlasting  growth.  There  is 
no  going  backward  in  his  plans,  everything 
moves  forward  to  one  eternal  divine  purpose. 
A  decrepit,  helpless  old  man  or  woman  is  a 
burlesque  of  the  human  being  God  made.  His 
image  does  not  deteriorate  or  go  backward,  but 
moves  forever  onward,  eternally  upward.  If 
human  beings  could  only  once  grasp  this  idea, 
that  the  reality  of  them  is  divine,  and  that 
divinity  does  not  go  backward  or  grow  old. 


WHY   GROW   OLD?  159 

they  would  lose  all  sense  of  fear  and  worry, 
all  enemies  of  their  progress  and  happiness 
would  slink  away,  and  the  aging  processes 
would  cease. 

The  coming  man  will  not  grow  old.  Per- 
petual youth  is  his  destiny. 
{'The  time  will  come  when  people  will  look 
upon  old  age  as  an  unreality,  a  negative,  a 
mere  phantom  of  the  real  man.  The  rose  that 
fades  is  not  the  real  rose.  The  real  rose  is  the 
ideal — the  idea  which  pushes  out  a  new  one 
every  time  we  pluck  the  one  that  fades. 

The  real  man  is  God's  ideal,  and  in  the  light 
of  the  new  day  that  is  dawning  man  will 
glimpse  that  perfect  ideal.  He  will  know  the 
truth,  and  the  truth  will  make  him  free.  In 
that  new  day  he  will  cast  from  him  the  ham- 
pering, age-worn  vestures  woven  in  the 
thought-loom  of  mankind  through  the  cen- 
turies, and  stand  erect — the  perfect  being,  the 
ideal  man. 


X.   THE   MIRACLE   OF    SELF- 
CONFIDENCE 


X.  THE  MIRACLE  OF  SELF- 
CONFIDENCE 


If  there  be  a  faith  that  can  remove  mountains,  it  is 
faith  in  one's  own  power.— Marie  Ebister-Eschen- 

BACH. 

"Instead  of  being  the  victims  of  fate,  we  can  alter  our 
fate,  and  largely  determine  what  it  shall  be." 

"Your  ideal  is  a  prophecy  of  what  you  shall  at  last 
unveil." 

HY,"  asked  Mirabeau,  "should 
we  call  ourselves  men,  unless 
it  be  to  succeed  in  everything 
everywhere  ?  "  Nothing  else 
will  so  nerve  you  to  accom- 
plish great  things  as  to  be- 
lieve in  your  own  greatness, 
in  your  own  marvellous  possibilities.  Count 
that  man  an  enemy  who  shakes  your  faith  in 
yourself,  in  your  ability  to  do  the  thing  you 
have  set  your  heart  upon  doing,  for  when 
your  confidence  is  gone,  your  power  is  gone. 
Your  achievement  will  never  rise  higher  than 
your  self- faith.  It  would  be  as  reasonable  for 
Napoleon  to  have  expected  to  get  his  army 
over  the  Alps  by  sitting  down  and  declaring 
that  the  undertaking  was  too  great  for  him, 
as  for  you  to  hope  to  achieve  anything  sig- 

163 


i64     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

nificant  in  life  while  harboring  grave  doubts 
and  fears  as  to  your  ability. 

The  miracles  of  civilization  have  been  per- 
formed by  men  and  women  of  great  self-con- 
fidence, who  had  unwavering  faith  in  their 
power  to  accomplish  the  tasks  they  undertook. 
The  race  would  have  been  centuries  behind 
what  it  is  to-day  had  it  not  been  for  their  grit, 
their  determination,  their  persistence  in  find- 
ing and  making  real  the  thing  they  believed 
in  and  which  the  world  often  denounced  as 
chimerical  or  impossible. 

There  is  no  law  by  which  you  can  achieve 
success  in  anything  without  expecting  it,  de- 
manding it,  assuming  it.  There  must  be  a 
strong,  firm  self -faith  first,  or  the  thing  will 
never  come.  There  is  no  room  for  chance  in 
God's  world  of  system  and  supreme  order. 
Everything  must  have  not  only  a  cause,  but 
a  sufficient  cause — a  cause  as  large  as  the 
result.  A  stream  cannot  rise  higher  than  its 
source.  A  great  success  must  have  a  great 
source  in  expectation,  in  self-confidence,  and 
in  persistent  endeavor  to  attain  it.  No  matter 
how  great  the  ability,  how  large  the  genius, 
or  how  splendid  the  education,  the  achieve- 
ment will  never  rise  higher  than  the  con- 
fidence. He  can  who  thinks  he  can,  and  he 


SELF-CONFIDENXE  165 

can't  who  thinks  he  can't.  This  is  an  inexor- 
able, indisputable  law. 

'  "It  does  not  matter  what  other  people  think 
/^of  you,  of  your  plans,  or  of  your  aims.  No 
^matter  if  they  call  you  a  visionary,  a  crank, 
or  a  dreamer;  you  must  believe  in  yourself. 
You  forsake  yourself  when  you  lose  your  con- 
fidence. Never  allow  anybody  or  any  misfor- 
tune to  shake  your  belief  in  yourself.  You  may 
lose  your  property,  your  health,  your  reputa- 
tion, other  peoples'  confidence,  even ;  but  there 
is  always  hope  for  you  so  long  as  you  keep 
a  firm  faith  in  yourself.  If  you  never  lose  that, 
but  keep  pushing  on,  the  world  will,  sooner  or 
later,  make  way  for  you. 

A  soldier  once  took  a  message  to  Napoleon 
in  such  great  haste  that  the  horse  he  rode 
dropped  dead  before  he  delivered  the  paper. 
Napoleon  dictated  his  answer  and,  handing  it 
to  the  messenger,  ordered  him  to  mount  his 
own  horse  and  deliver  it  with  all  possible 
speed. 

The  messenger  looked  at  the  magnificent 
animal,  with  its  superb  trappings,  and  said, 
"  Nay,  General,  but  this  is  too  gorgeous,  too 
magnificent  for  a  common  soldier." 

Napoleon  said,  "  Nothing  is  too  good  or  too 
magnificent  for  a  French  soldier." 


i66     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

The  world  is  full  of  people  like  this  poor 
French  soldier,  who  think  that  what  others 
have  is  too  good  for  them ;  that  it  does  not 
fit  their  humble  condition;  that  they  are  not 
expected  to  have  as  good  things  as  those  who 
are  "  more  favored."  They  do  not  realize  how 
they  weaken  themselves  by  this  mental  attitude 
of  self-depreciation  or  self-effacement.  They 
do  not  claim  enough,  expect  enough,  or  de- 
mand enough  of  themselves. 

You  will  never  become  a  giant  if  you  only 
make  a  pygmy's  claim  for  yourself;  if  you 
only  expect  a  pygmy's  part.  There  is  no  law 
which  can  cause  a  pygmy's  thinking  to  pro- 
duce a  giant.  The  statue  follows  the  model. 
The  model  is  the  inward  vision. 

Most  people  have  been  educated  to  think 
that  it  was  not  intended  they  should  have  the 
best  there  is  in  the  world ;  that  the  good  and 
the  beautiful  things  of  life  were  not  designed 
for  them,  but  were  reserved  for  those  espe- 
cially favored  by  fortune.  They  have  grown 
up  under  this  conviction  of  their  inferiority, 
and  of  course  they  will  be  inferior  until  they 
claim  superiority  as  their  birthright.  A  vast 
number  of  men  and  women  who  are  really 
capable  of  doing  great  things,  do  small  things, 
live  mediocre  lives,  because  they  do  not  expect 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  167 

or  demand  enough  of  themselves.  They  do  not 
know  how  to  call  out  their  best. 

One  reason  why  the  hviman  race  as  a  whole 
has  not  measured  up  to  its  possibilities,  to  its 
promise ;  one  reason  why  we  see  everywhere 
splendid  ability  doing  the  work  of  mediocrity ; 
is  because  people  do  not  think  half  enough  of 
themselves.  We  do  not  realise  our  divinity; 
that  -cve  are  a  part  of  the  great  causation  prin- 
ciple of  the  universe. 

We  do  not  think  highly  enough  of  our 
superb  birthright,  nor  comprehend  to  what 
heights  of  sublimity  we  were  intended  and 
expected  to  rise,  nor  to  what  extent  we  can 
really  be  masters  of  ourselves.  We  fail  to  see 
that  we  can  control  our  own  destiny ;  make 
ourselves  do  whatever  is  possible ;  make  our- 
selves become  whatever  we  long  to  be. 

"If  we  choose  to  be  no  more  than  clods  of 
clay,"  says  Marie  Corelli,  "  then  we  shall  be 
used  as  clods  of  clay  for  braver  feet  to  tread 
on." 

The  persistent  thought  that  you  are  not  as 
good  as  others,  that  you  are  a  weak,  ineffect- 
ive being,  will  lower  your  whole  standard  of 
life  and  paralyze  your  ability. 

A  man  who  is  self-reliant,  positive,  optimis- 
tic,  and   undertakes   his   work   with   the   as- 


i68     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

surance  of  success,  magnetizes  conditions.  He 
draws  to  himself  the  literal  fulfillment  of  the 
promise,  "  For  unto  every  one  that  hath  shall 
be  given,  and  he  shall  have  abundance." 

There  is  everything  in  assuming  the  part 
we  wish  to  play,  and  playing  it  royally.  If  you 
are  ambitious  to  do  big  things,  you  must  make 
a  large  programme  for  yourself,  and  assume 
the  part  it  demands. 

There  is  something  in  the  atmosphere  of 
the  man  who  has  a  large  and  true  estimate  of 
himself,  who  believes  that  he  is  going  to  win 
out ;  something  in  his  very  appearance  that 
wins  half  the  battle  before  a  blow  is  struck. 
Things  get  out  of  the  way  of  the  vigorous, 
affirmative  man,  which  are  always  tripping  the 
self-depreciating,  negative  man. 

We  often  hear  it  said  of  a  man,  "  Every- 
thing he  undertakes  succeeds,"  or  "  Every- 
thing he  touches  turns  to  gold."  By  the  force 
of  his  character  and  the  creative  power  of  his 
thought,  such  a  man  wrings  success  from  the 
most  adverse  circumstances.  Confidence  be- 
gets confidence.  A  man  who  carries  in  his  very 
presence  an  air  of  victory,  radiates  assurance, 
and  imparts  to  others  confidence  that  he  can 
do  the  thing  he  attempts.  As  time  goes  on,  he 
is  reenforced  not  only  by  the  power  of  his  own 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  169 

thought,  but  also  by  that  of  all  who  know  him. 
His  friends  and  acquaintances  affirm  and  re- 
affirm his  ability  to  succeed,  and  make  each 
successive  triumph  easier  of  achievement  than 
its  predecessor.  His  self-poise,  assurance,  con- 
fidence and  ability  increase  in  a  direct  ratio 
to  the  number  of  his  achievements.  As  the 
savage  Indian  thought  that  the  power  of  every 
enemy  he  conquered  entered  into  himself,  so 
in  reality  does  every  conquest  in  war,  in  peace- 
ful industry,  in  commerce,  in  invention,  in 
science,  or  in  art  add  to  the  conqueror's  power 
to  do  the  next  thing. 

Set  the  mind  toward  the  thing  you  would 
accomplish  so  resolutely,  so  definitely,  and  with 
such  vigorous  determination,  and  put  so  much 
grit  into  your  resolution,  that  nothing  on  earth 
can  turn  you  from  your  purpose  until  you 
attain  it. 

This  very  assertion  of  superiority,  the  as- 
sumption of  power,  the  affirmation  of  belief 
in  yourself,  the  mental  attitude  that  claims 
success  as  an  inalienable  birthright,  will 
strengthen  the  whole  man  and  give  power  to 
a  combination  of  faculties  which  doubt,  fear, 
and  a  lack  of  confidence  undermine. 

Confidence  is  the  Napoleon  of  the  mental 
army.  It  doubles  and  trebles  the  power  of  all 


I70     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

the  other  faculties.  The  whole  mental  army 
waits  until  confidence  leads  the  way. 

Even  a  race  horse  cannot  win  the  prize  after 
it  has  once  lost  confidence  in  itself.  Courage, 
born  of  self-confidence,  is  the  prod  which 
brings  out  the  last  ounce  of  reserve  force. 

The  reason  why  so  many  men  fail  is  be- 
cause they  do  not  commit  themselves  with  a 
determination  to  win  at  any  cost.  They  do  not 
have  that  superb  confidence  in  themselves 
which  never  looks  back;  which  burns  all 
bridges  behind  it.  There  is  just  uncertainty 
enough  as  to  whether  they  will  succeed  to  take 
the  edge  off  their  effort,  and  it  is  just  this 
little  difference  between  doing  pretty  well  and 
flinging  all  oneself,  all  his  power,  into  his 
career,  that  makes  the  difference  between 
mediocrity  and  a  grand  achievement. 

If  you  doubt  your  ability  to  do  what  you  set 
out  to  do ;  if  you  think  that  others  are  better 
fitted  to  do  it  than  you ;  if  you  fear  to  let  your- 
self out  and  take  chances ;  if  you  lack  bold- 
ness ;  if  you  have  a  timid,  shrinking  nature ; 
if  the  negatives  preponderate  in  your  vocabu- 
lary ;  if  you  think  that  you  lack  positiveness, 
initiative,  aggressiveness,  ability;  you  can 
never  win  anything  very  great  until  you 
change  your  whole  mental  attitude  and  learn 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  171 

to  have  great  faith  in  yourself.  Fear,  doubt, 
and  timidity  must  be  turned  out  of  your  mind.     ^ 

Your  own  mental  picture  of  yourself  is  a  '"' 
good  measure  of  yourself  and  your  possibih- 
ties.  If  there  is  no  out-reach  to  your  mind,  no 
spirit  of  daring,  no  firm  self-faith,  you  will 
never  acccJmplish  much. 

A  man's  confidence  measures  the  height  of 
his  possibilities.  A  stream  cannot  rise  higher 
than  its  fountain  head. 

Power  is  largely  a  question  of  strong, 
vigorous,  perpetual  thinking  along  the  line  of 
the  ambition,  parallel  with  the  aim — the  great 
life  purpose.  Here  is  where  potver  originates. 

The  deed  must  first  live  in  the  thought  or  it 
will  never  be  a  reality ;  and  a  strong,  vigorous 
concept  of  the  thing  we  want  to  do  is  a  tre- 
mendous initial  step.  A  thought  that  is  timidly 
born  will  be  timidly  executed.  There  must  be 
vigor  of  conception  or  an  indifferent  execu- 
tion. 

All  the  greatest  achievements  in  the  world 
began  in  longing — in  dreamings  and  hopings 
which  for  a  time  were  nursed  in  despair,  with 
no  light  in  sight.  This  longing  kept  the  cour- 
age up  and  made  self-sacrifice  easier  until 
the  thing  dreamed  of — the  mental  vision — was 
realized. 


172     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

"  According  to  your  faith  be  it  unto  you." 
Our  faith  is  a  very  good  measure  of  what  we 
get  out  of  Hfe.  The  man  of  weak  faith  gets 
little ;  the  man  of  mighty  faith  gets  much. 

The  very  intensity  of  your  confidence  in 
your  ability  to  do  the  thing  you  attempt,  is 
definitely  related  to  the  degree  of  your  achieve- 
ment. 

If  we  were  to  analyze  the  marvellous  suc- 
cesses of  many  of  our  self-made  men,  we 
should  find  that  when  they  first  started  out  in 
active  life  they  held  the  confident,  vigorous, 
persistent  thought  of  and  belief  in  their  ability 
to  accomplish  what  they  had  undertaken. 
Their  mental  attitude  was  set  so  stubbornly 
toward  their  goal  that  the  doubts  and  fears 
which  dog  and  hinder  and  frighten  the  man 
who  holds  a  low  estimate  of  himself,  who  asks, 
demands,  and  expects  but  little,  of  or  for  him- 
self, got  out  of  their  path,  and  the  world  made 
way  for  them. 

We  are  very  apt  to  think  of  men  who  have 
been  unusually  successful  in  any  line  as  great- 
ly favored  by  fortune;  and  we  try  to  account 
for  it  in  all  sorts  of  ways  but  the  right  one.  The 
fact  is  tliat  their  success  represents  their  ex- 
pectations of  themselves — the  sum  of  their 
creative,  positive,  habitual  thinking.  It  is  their 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  173 

mental  attitude  outpictured  and  made  tangible 
in  their  environment.  They  have  wrought — 
created — what  they  have  and  what  they  are 
out  of  their  constructive  thought  and  their  un- 
quenchable faith  in  themselves. 

We  must  not  only  believe  we  can  succeed, 
but  we  must  believe  it  with  all  our  hearts. 

We  must  have  a  positive  conviction  that  we 
can  attain  success. 

No  lukewarm  energy  or  indifferent  ambi- 
tion ever  accomplished  anything.  There  must 
be  vigor  in  our  expectation,  in  our  faith,  in 
our  determination,  in  our  endeavor.  We  must 
resolve  with  the  energy  that  does  things. 

Not  only  must  the  desire  for  the  thing  we 
long  for  be  kept  uppermost,  but  there  must 
be  strongly  concentrated  intensity  of  effort  to 
attain  our  object. 

As  it  is  the  fierceness  of  the  heat  that  melts 
the  iron  ore  and  makes  it  possible  to  weld  it 
or  mold  it  into  shape ;  as  it  is  the  intensity 
of  the  electrical  force  that  dissolves  the  dia- 
mond— the  hardest  known  substance;  so  it  is 
the  concentrated  aim,  the  invincible  purpose, 
that  wins  success.  Nothing  was  ever  accom- 
plished by  a  half-hearted  desire. 

Many  people  make  a  very  poor  showing  in 
life,  because  there  is  no  vim,  no  vigor  in  their 


174     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

efforts.  Their  resolutions  are  spineless ;  there 
is  no  backbone  in  their  endeavor — no  grit  in 
their  ambition. 

One  must  have  that  determination  which 
never  looks  back  and  which  knows  no  defeat ; 
that  resolution  which  burns  all  bridges  behind 
it  and  is  willing  to  risk  everything  upon  the 
effort.  When  a  man  ceases  to  believe  in  him- 
self— gives  up  the  fight — you  cannot  do  much 
for  him  except  to  try  to  restore  what  he  has 
lost — his  self-faith — and  to  get  out  of  his  head 
the  idea  that  there  is  a  fate  which  tosses  him 
hither  and  thither,  a  mysterious  destiny  which 
decides  things  whether  he  will  or  not.  You 
cannot  do  much  with  him  until  he  compre- 
hends that  he  is  bigger  than  any  fate ;  that  he 
has  within  himself  a  power  mightier  than  any 
force  outside  of  him. 

One  reason  why  the  careers  of  most  of  us 
are  so  pinched  and  narrow,  is  because  we  do 
not  have  a  large  faith  in  ourselves  and  in  our 
power  to  accomplish.  We  are  held  back  by 
too  much  caution.  We  are  timid  about  ventur- 
ing. We  are  not  bold  enough. 

Whatever  we  long  for,  yearn  for,  struggle 
for,  and  hold  persistently  in  the  mind,  we  tend 
to  become  just  in  exact  proportion  to  the  in- 
tensity and  persistence  of  the  thought.    We 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  175 

think  ourselves  into  smallness,  into  inferiority 
by  thinking  downward.  We  ought  to  think  up- 
ward, then  we  would  reach  the  heights  where 
superiority  dwells.  The  man  whose  mind  is 
set  firmly  toward  achievement  does  not  appro- 
priate success,  he  is  success. 

Self-confidence  is  not  egotism.  It  is  knowl- 
edge, and  it  comes  from  the  consciousness  of 
possessing  the  ability  requisite  for  what  one 
undertakes.  Civilization  to-day  rests  upon  self- 
confidence. 

A  firm  self-faith  helps  a  man  to  project 
himself  with  a  force  that  is  almost  irresistible. 
A  balancer,  a  doubter,  has  no  projectile  power. 
If  he  starts  at  all,  he  moves  with  uncertainty. 
There  is  no  vigor  in  his  initiative,  no  positive- 
ness  in  his  energy. 

There  is  a  great  difference  between  a  man 
who  thinks  that  "  perhaps  "  he  can  do,  or  who 
"  will  try "  to  do  a  thing,  and  a  man  who 
"  knows  "  he  can  do  it,  who  is  "  bound  "  to 
do  it ;  who  feels  within  himself  a  pulsating 
power,  an  irresistible  force,  equal  to  any 
emergency. 

This  difference  between  uncertainty  and 
certainty,  between  vacillation  and  decision, 
between  the  man  who  wavers  and  the  man 
who  decides  things,  between  "  I  hope  to  "  and 


176     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

"  I  can,"  between  "  I'll  try  "  and  "  I  will  "— 
this  little  difference  measures  the  distance  be- 
tween weakness  and  power,  between  medioc- 
rity and  excellence,  between  commonness  and 
superiority. 

The  man  who  does  things  must  be  able  to 
project  himself  with  a  mighty  force,  to  fling 
the  whole  weight  of  his  being  into  his  work, 
ever  gathering  momentum  against  the  obstacles 
which  confront  him ;  every  issue  must  be  met 
wholly,  unhesitatingly.  He  cannot  do  this  with 
a  wavering,  doubting,  unstable  mind. 

The  fact  that  a  man  believes  implicitly  that 
he  can  do  what  may  seem  impossible  or  very 
difiicult  to  others,  shows  that  there  is  some- 
thing within  him  that  makes  him  equal  to  the 
work  he  has  undertaken. 

Faith  unites  man  with  the  Infinite,  and  no 
one  can  accomplish  great  things  in  life  unless 
he  works  in  oneness  with  the  Infinite.  When 
a  man  lives  so  near  to  the  Supreme  that  the 
divine  Presence  is  felt  all  the  time,  then  he 
is  in  a  position  to  express  power. 

There  is  nothing  which  will  multiply  one's 
ability  like  self-faith.  It  can  make  a  one-talent 
man  a  success,  while  a  ten-talent  man  without 
it  would  fail. 

Faith  walks  on  the  mountain  tops,  hence  its 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  177 

superior  vision.  It  sees  what  is  invisible  to 
those  who  follow. 

It  was  the  sustaining  power  of  a  mighty 
self-faith  that  enabled  Columbus  to  bear  the 
jeers  and  imputations  of  the  Spanish  cabinet; 
that  sustained  him  when  his  sailors  were  in 
mutiny  and  he  was  at  their  mercy  in  a  little 
vessel  on  an  unknown  sea;  that  enabled  him 
to  hold  steadily  to  his  purpose,  entering  in  his 
diary  day  after  day — "  This  day  we  sailed 
west,  which  was  our  course." 

It  was  this  self- faith  which  gave  courage  and 
determination  to  Fulton  to  attempt  his  first  trip 
up  the  Hudson  in  the  Clermont,  before  thou- 
sands of  his  fellow  citizens,  who  had  gath- 
ered to  howl  and  jeer  at  his  expected  fail- 
ure. He  believed  he  could  do  the  thing  he 
attempted  though  the  whole  world  was  against 
him. 

What  miracles  self-confidence  has  wrought! 
What  impossible  deeds  it  has  helped  to  per- 
form !  It  took  Dewey  past  cannons,  torpedoes, 
and  mines  to  victory  at  Manila  Bay ;  it  carried 
Farragut,  lashed  to  the  rigging,  past  the  de- 
fenses of  the  enemy  in  Mobile  Bay ;  it  led 
Nelson  and  Grant  to  victory ;  it  has  been 
the  great  tonic  in  the  world  of  invention, 
discovery,  and  art;   it  has  won  a  thousand 


178  ,   PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

triumphs  in  war  and  science  which  were 
deemed  impossible  by  doubters  and  the  faint- 
hearted. 

Self-faith  has  been  the  miracle-worker  of 
the  ages.  It  has  enabled  the  inventor  and  the 
discoverer  to  go  on  and  on  amidst  troubles 
and  trials  which  otherwise  would  have  utterly 
disheartened  them.  It  has  held  innumerable 
heroes  to  their  tasks  until  the  glorious  deeds 
were  accomplished. 

The  only  inferiority  in  us  is  what  we  put 
into  ourselves.  If  only  we  better  understood 
our  divinity  we  should  all  have  this  larger 
faith  which  is  the  distinction  of  the  brave  soul. 
We  think  ourselves  into  smallness.  Were  we 
to  think  upward  we  should  reach  the  heights 
where  superiority  dwells. 

Perhaps  there  is  no  other  one  thing  which 
keeps  so  many  people  back  as  their  low  es- 
timate of  themselves.  They  are  more  handi- 
capped by  their  limiting  thought,  by  their 
foolish  convictions  of  inefficiency,  than  by  al- 
most anything  else,  for  there  is  no  power  in 
the  universe  that  can  help  a  man  do  a  thing 
zvhen  he  thinks  he  cannot  do  it.  Self-faith 
must  lead  the  way.  You  cannot  go  beyond  the 
limits  you  set  for  yourself. 

It  is  one  of  the  most  diMcult  things  to  a 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  179 

mortal  to  really  believe  in  his  own  bigness,  in 
his  own  grandeur;  to  believe  that  his  yearn- 
ings and  hungerings  and  aspirations  for 
higher,  nobler  things  have  any  basis  in  reality 
or  any  real,  ultimate  end.  But  they  are,  in  fact, 
the  signs  of  ability  to  match  them,  of  power  to 
make  them  real.  They  are  the  stirrings  of  the 
divinity  within  us ;  the  call  to  something  bet- 
ter, to  go  higher. 

No  man  gets  very  far  in  the  world  or  ex- 
presses great  power  until  self-faith  is  born  in 
him ;  until  he  catches  a  glimpse  of  his  higher, 
nobler  self ;  until  he  realizes  that  his  ambition, 
his  aspiration,  are  proofs  of  his  ability  to 
reach  the  ideal  which  haunts  him.  The  Creator 
would  not  have  mocked  us  with  the  yearning 
for  infinite  achievement  without  giving  us  the 
ability  and  the  opportunity  for  realizing  it, 
any  more  than  he  would  have  mocked  the  wild 
birds  with  an  instinct  to  fly  south  in  the  winter 
without  giving  them  a  sunny  South  to  match 
the  instinct. 

The  cause  of  whatever  comes  to  you  in  life 
is  within  you.  There  is  where  it  is  created. 
The  thing  you  long  for  and  work  for  comes 
to  you  because  your  thought  has  created  it ; 
because  there  is  something  inside  you  that 
attracts  it.  It  comes  because  there  is  an  affinity 


i8o     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

within  you  for  it.  Your  ozvn  comes  to  you;  is 
always  seeking  you. 

Whenever  you  see  a  person  who  has  been 
unusually  successful  in  any  field,  remember 
that  he  has  usually  thought  himself  into  his 
position ;  his  mental  attitude  and  energy  have 
created  it ;  what  he  stands  for  in  his  commu- 
nity has  come  from  his  attitude  toward  life, 
toward  his  fellow  men,  toward  his  vocation, 
toward  himself.  Above  all  else,  it  is  the  out- 
come of  his  self-faith,  of  his  inward  vision 
of  himself;  the  result  of  his  estimate  of  his 
powers  and  possibilities. 

The  men  who  have  done  the  great  things 
in  the  world  have  been  profound  believers  in 
themselves. 

If  I  could  give  the  young  people  of  America 
but  one  word  of  advice,  it  would  be  this — 
"  Believe  in  yourself  with  all  your  might." 
That  is,  believe  that  your  destiny  is  inside  of 
you,  that  there  is  a  power  within  you  which, 
if  awakened,  aroused,  developed,  and  matched 
with  honest  effort,  will  not  only  make  a  noble 
man  or  woman  of  you,  but  will  also  make  you 
successful  and  happy. 

All  through  the  Bilile  we  find  emphasized 
the  miracle-working  power  of  faith.  Faith  in 
himself  indicates  that  a  man  has  a  glimpse  of 


SELF-CONFIDENCE  i8i 

forces  within  him  which  either  annihilate  the 
obstacles  in  the  way,  or  make  them  seem 
insignificant  in  comparison  with  his  ability  to 
overcome  them. 

Faith  opens  the  door  that  enables  us  to  look 
into  the  soul's  limitless  possibilities  and  re- 
veals such  powers  there,  such  unconquerable 
forces,  that  we  are  not  only  encouraged  to  go 
on,  but  feel  a  great  consciousness  of  added 
power  because  we  have  touched  omnipotence, 
have  a  glimpse  of  the  great  source  of  things. 

Faith  is  that  something  within  us  which 
does  not  guess,  but  knows.  It  knows  because 
it  sees  what  our  coarser  selves,  our  animal 
natures  cannot  see.  It  is  the  prophet  within 
us,  the  divine  messenger  appointed  to  accom- 
pany man  through  life  to  guide  and  direct 
and  encourage  him.  It  gives  him  a  glimpse  of 
his  possibilities  to  keep  him  from  losing  heart, 
from  quitting  his  upward  life  struggle. 

Our  faith  knows  because  it  sees  what  we 
cannot  see.  It  sees  resources,  powers,  poten- 
cies which  our  doubts  and  fears  veil  from  us. 
Faith  is  assured,  is  never  afraid,  because  it 
sees  the  way  out ;  sees  the  solution  of  its 
problem.  It  has  dipped  in  the  realms  of  our 
finer  life,  our  higher  and  diviner  kingdom.  All 
things  are  possible  to  him  who  has  faith,  be- 


i82     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

cause  faith  sees,  recognizes  the  power  that 
means  accomplishment. 

If  we  had  faith  in  God  and  in  ourselves  we 
could  remove  all  mountains  of  difficulty,  and 
our  lives  would  be  one  triumphal  march  to 
the  goal  of  our  ambition. 

If  we  had  faith  enough  we  could  cure  all 
our  ills  and  accomplish  the  maximum  of  our 
possibilities. 

Faith  never  fails ;  it  is  a  miracle  worker.  It 
looks  be)'ond  all  boundaries,  transcends  all 
limitations,  penetrates  all  obstacles  and  sees 
the  goal. 

It  is  doubt  and  fear,  timidity  and  cowardice, 
that  hold  us  down  and  keep  us  in  mediocrity 
— doing  petty  things  when  we  are  capable  of 
sublime  deeds. 

If  we  had  faith  enough  we  should  travel 
Godward  infinitely  faster  than  we  do. 

The  time  will  come  when  every  human 
being  will  have  unbounded  faith  and  will  live 
the  life  triumphant.  Then  there  will  be  no 
poverty  in  the  world,  no  failures,  and  the  dis- 
cords of  life  will  all  vanish. 


XI.    AFFIRMATION   AND   AUDIBLE 
SUGGESTION 


XI.   AFFIRMATION   AND   AUDIBLE 
SUGGESTION. 


Look  out  for  the  man  who  dares  assert  the  "I." 
"  What  I  can  do,  I  ought  to  do. 
What  I  ought  to  do,  I  can  do. 
What  I  can  and  ought  to  do, 
By  the  grace  of  God  I  will  do." 


HAVE    promised    my    God 
that  I  will  do  it." 

Who  can  estimate  the  tre- 
mendous, buttressing  power 
which  reenforced  Lincoln 
when  on  the  22d  of  Septem- 
ber, 1862,  he  resolved  upon 
the  Emancipation  Proclamation,  and  entered 
this  solemn  vow  in  his  diary :  "  I  have  prom- 
ised my  God  that  I  will  do  it." 

Up  to  this  time  doubt,  uncertainty,  his  nat- 
ural precaution,  had  influenced  him  and  kept 
him  from  coming  to  a  decision ;  but  now  he 
solemnly  resolved  to  burn  all  bridges  behind 
him  and  henceforth  to  dedicate  himself  to  the 
accomplishment  of  this  great  purpose. 

After  the  false  report  that  Dreyfus  had 
escaped  from  Devil's  Island,  his  guards  were 
doubled,  and  he  was  chained  to  a  plank  every 
night  with  heavy  irons,  until  his  legs  were  so 

185 


i86     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

chafed  that  they  became  bloody  and  gangre- 
nous. The  wretched  prisoner  thought  his  jail- 
ers had  orders  to  torture  him  to  death,  but  he 
doggedly  and  persistently  repeated  to  himself : 
"  I  will  live !  I  will  live !  "  Who  can  doubt  that 
• — conscious  as  he  was  of  his  innocence — this 
vehement  affirmation,  in  conjunction  with  the 
man's  almost  superhuman  will-power,  had 
much  to  do  with  his  survival  of  the  revolting 
cruelty  to  which  he  was  subjected  in  his  island 
prison. 

Few  people  realize  the  force  that  exists  in  a 
vigorous,  perpetual  affirmation  of  the  thing 
we  long  to  be  or  are  determined  to  accomplish. 
Great  things  are  done  under  the  stress  of  an 
overmastering  conviction  of  one's  ability  to 
do  what  he  undertakes ;  under  the  tremendous 
power  of  the  affirmative,  expressed  with  un- 
flinching determination.  The  very  intensity  of 
your  affirmation  of  confidence  in  your  ability 
to  do  what  you  attempt  is  definitely  related  to 
the  degree  of  your  achievement.  We  need 
great  projectile  power.  It  is  easier  to  force  a 
huge  shell  through  the  steel  plates  of  a  ship 
when  projected  with  lightning  speed  from  the 
cannon  than  to  push  it  through  slowly. 

People  who  always  say  "  God  willing,"  or 
"  If  Providence  so  wills,"  they  will  do  this 


AFFIRMATION  187 

or  that,  little  realize  how  the  doubt  expressed 
by  the  "  if  "  takes  the  edge  from  their  positive- 
ness,  and  tends  to  produce  negative  minds.  If 
the  Creator  has  given  a  man  the  inclination 
and  the  power  to  do  a  thing  that  is  right  and 
good  He  is  always  willing  that  he  should 
do  it. 

Yet  I  know  a  man — and  there  are  thousands 
like  him — who  says  that  he  never  makes  a 
positive  statement  of  what  he  is  going  to  do, 
because  it  would  be  questioning  the  will  of 
God — a  reflection  upon  the  Deity. 

There  is  no  one  thing  which  will  give  a 
timid  soul  such  assurance,  which  will  so  brace 
up  one  who  is  inclined  to  depreciate  and  efface 
himself,  as  the  constant  afiirmation  of  the  "  I 
am."  "  I  am  courage ;  I  am  health,  vigor, 
strength ;  I  am  power ;  I  am  peace ;  I  am 
plenty ;  I  am  a  part  of  abundance,  because  I 
am  one  with  the  very  Source  of  Infinite  Sup- 
ply. I  am  rich,  because  I  am  heir  to  all  the 
resources  of  the  universe." 

Stoutly,  constantly,  everlastingly  afiirm  that 
you  will  become  what  your  ambitions  indicate 
as  fitting  and  possible.  Do  not  say  "  I  shall  be 
a  success  sometime  " ;  say,  "  I  am  a  success. 
Success  is  my  birthright."  Do  not  say  that  you 
are  going  to  be  happy  in  the  future.  Say  to 


i88     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

yourself,  "  I  was  intended  for  happiness,  made 
for  it,  and  I  am  happy." 

The  habit  of  claiming  as  our  own,  as  a  vivid 
reality  that  which  zve  desire,  has  a  tremendous 
magnetic  power.  The  constant  vigorous  as- 
sertion of  "  I  am  health ;  I  am  vigor ;  I  am 
power;  I  am  principle;  I  am  truth;  I  am 
justice;  I  am  beauty;  because  made  in  the 
image  of  perfection,  of  harmony,  of  truth,  of 
justice,  of  immortal  beauty" — tends  to  the 
manifestation  of  these  things  in  our  lives. 

"  I  am  that  which  I  think  I  am — and  I  can 
be  nothing  else."  The  man  immersed  in  ma- 
terial things  and  who  lives  only  to  make 
money,  believes  he  can  make  it;  knows  that 
he  can  make  it.  He  does  not  say  to  himself 
every  morning,  "  Well,  I  do  not  know  whether 
I  can  make  anything  to-day.  I  will  try.  I  may 
succeed  and  I  may  not,"  He  simply  and  posi- 
tively asserts  that  he  can  do  what  he  desires 
and  then  starts  out  to  put  into  operation  plans 
and  forces  which  will  bring  it  about. 

If  you  affirm  "  I  am  health ;  I  am  prosperity ; 
I  am  this  or  that,"  but  do  not  believe  it,  you 
will  not  be  helped  by  affirmation.  You  must 
believe  what  you  affirm. 

Few  people  realize  the  tremendous  creative 
power  there  is  in  stout  self-assertion;  in  the 


AFFIRMATION  189 

vigorous  affirmation  of  the  ego,  the  "  I,"  the 
"  I  am."  But  those  who  have  once  properly 
put  it  in  practice  never  again  doubt  its  ef- 
ficacy. 

A  prominent  music  master  in  New  York 
who  trains  opera  singers  advised  a  girl  with 
great  musical  ability,  but  with  deficient  self- 
confidence  and  self-assertion,  to  stand  before 
a  mirror  every  day  and,  assuming  a  mag- 
nificent pose,  say  to  herself,  "  I,  I,  I,"  with  all 
the  emphasis  and  power  she  could  muster.  He 
told  her  to  assert  herself  and  to  think  of  her- 
self as  a  prima  donna  of  great  power ;  that 
by  constantly  assuming  the  part,  playing  the 
role,  she  would  acquire  the  habit  of  self-con- 
fidence, which  would  be  worth  everything  to 
her.  "  Imagine  that  you  are  Nordica  or  Patti," 
he  said.  "  Assume  that  part  boldly  and  fear- 
lessly— and  hold  yourself  with  a  dignity  and 
power  corresponding  with  the  character." 
This  advice,  which  she  followed  literally,  was 
worth  more  to  this  timid  girl  than  scores  of 
music  lessons.  The  practice  in  it  increased  her 
confidence  in  herself  wonderfully,  and  she 
was  soon  cured  of  her  shyness  and  timidity. 

Audible  self-suggestion,  which  is  merely  a 
continuation  or  extension  of  the  affirmation 
principle,  is  one  of  the  greatest  aids  to  self- 


igo     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

development.  This  form  of  suggestion — talk- 
ing to  oneself  vigorously,  earnestly — seems  to 
arouse  the  sleeping  forces  in  the  subconscious 
self  even  more  effectually  than  thinking  the 
same  thing.  We  all  know  how  we  are  strength- 
ened by  the  vigorous  affirmation  of  our  de- 
termination to  do  this  or  to  do  that.  We  know 
the  virtue  in  a  robust  determination  backed 
by  the  vigorously  spoken  resolve.  These  are 
but  other  forms  of  arousing  in  our  subcon- 
scious selves  latent  powers  which,  when  under- 
stood and  developed,  will  do  wonders  for  us. 
There  is  a  force  in  words  spoken  aloud 
which  is  not  stirred  by  going  over  the  same 
words  mentally.  They  sometimes  arouse  slum- 
bering energies  within  us  which  thinking  does 
not  stir  up — especially  if  we  have  not  been 
trained  to  think  deeply ;  to  focus  the  mind 
closely.  They  make  a  more  lasting  impression 
upon  the  mind — just  as  words  which  pass 
through  the  eye  from  the  printed  page  make 
a  greater  impression  on  the  brain  than  we  get 
by  thinking  the  same  words ;  as  seeing  objects 
of  nature  makes  a  more  lasting  impression 
upon  the  mind  than  thinking  about  them.  A 
vividness,  a  certain  force,  accompanies  the  spo- 
ken word — especially  if  earnestly,  vehemently 
uttered — which   is  not  apparent  to  many  in 


AFFIRMATION  191 

merely  thinking-  about  what  words  express. 
If  you  repeat  to  yourself  aloud,  vigorously, 
even  vehemently,  a  firm  resolve,  you  are  more 
likely  to  carry  it  to  reality  than  if  you  merely 
resolve  in  silence. 

We  become  so  accustomed  to  our  silent 
thoughts  that  the  voicing  of  them,  the  giving 
audible  expression  to  our  yearnings,  makes 
a  much  deeper  impression  upon  us. 

The  audible  self-encouragement  treatment 
may  be  used  with  marvellous  results  in  cor- 
recting our  weaknesses;  overcoming  our  de- 
ficiencies. 

A  remarkably  successful  friend  of  mine  says 
that  he  has  been  wonderfully  helped  by  talk- 
ing to  himself  about  his  faults  and  short- 
comings. "  Heart-to-heart  talks  "  with  himself 
he  calls  these  little  exhortations. 

If  he  thinks  his  ambition  is  lagging,  he  gives 
himself  a  mental  exercise  which  tends  to 
sharpen  and  improve  it.  If  he  thinks  his 
standards  are  lowering,  he  braces  up  his  ideal 
by  perpetually  affirming  his  ability  to  do  better 
and  to  climb  higher  every  day. 

He  says  that  he  starts  out  every  morning 
with  the  determination  that  he  is  going  to  be 
a  bigger  man  at  ni.^ht  than  he  was  in  the 
morning ;  that  he  is  going  to  stand  for  more ; 


192     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

that  he  is  going  to  carry  more  weight  in  his 
community.  He  talks  to  himself  about  his 
failures  of  the  day  before  and  about  his  pro- 
gramme for  the  day,  while  he  is  dressing  in 
the  morning,  something  after  this  fashion : 

"  Now,  John,  you  lost  your  temper  yester- 
day ;  you  went  all  to  pieces  over  a  mistake  that 
some  one  made  in  the  office ;  you  made  a  fool 
of  yourself,  so  that  your  employees  thought 
less  of  you  than  before,  and  it  totally  unfitted 
your  mind  for  doing  the  large  things  that 
were  clamoring  for  your  attention.  Don't 
make  that  mistake  to-day.  You  are  a  pretty 
small  man  if  you  cannot  rise  above  the  petty 
details  which  confuse  and  block  shallow  minds. 
If  you  cannot  rise  above  the  trivial  details  of 
your  office  you  are  not  a  leader." 

One  of  his  great  weaknesses  was  that  of 
indecision.  He  had  a  perfect  horror  of  settling 
an  important  thing  so  that  it  could  not  be 
reopened  for  consideration.  He  would  always 
leave  things  until  the  last  minute — his  letters 
unsealed,  papers  unsigned,  contracts  open, 
until  he  was  actually  forced  to  close  them,  for 
fear  he  might  want  to  reconsider  his  decisions. 

He  tells  me  that  he  finally  overcame  this 
weakness  by  constantly  telling  himself  how 
foolish    it    was;    how    this    vacillating    habit 


AFFIRMATION  193 

would  handicap  his  whole  career,  and  how  all 
men  of  executive  abiUty — men  who  do  great 
things — are  characterized  by  their  quick, 
strong  decisions. 

It  does  not  matter  what  the  fault  is — 
whether  it  is  the  habit  of  dawdling,  of  being 
late  in  keeping  appointments,  of  losing  his 
temper,  of  being  fractious  and  unreasonable 
with  his  employees — whatever  it  may  be,  he 
talks  himself  out  of  it.  In  his  talks,  he  calls 
himself  by  name,  and  carries  a  picture  of  his 
other,  better,  diviner  self  in  his  mind ;  persist- 
ently holding  before  himself  the  image  of  the 
man  he  wants  to  be,  longs  to  be,  and  constantly 
affirms  his  ability  to  be.  He  says  that  nothing 
else  has  done  half  as  much  for  him  as  this 
habit  of  talking  things  over  with  himself. 

Another  young  man  in  New  York  recently 
told  me  that  he  tries  to  walk  through  Central 
Park  every  morning  on  his  way  to  business 
in  order  to  get  a  chance  to  talk  to  himself 
alone.  During  these  talks,  he  tells  himself  that, 
let  what  will  come  during  the  day,  he  must 
not  lose  his  self-control ;  he  must  be  a  gentle- 
man under  all  circumstances ;  that  he  must 
not  allow  worry,  anxiety,  or  unfortunate 
moods  to  waste  his  energy,  but  must  work  it 
all  up  into  effectiveness. 


194     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

He  says  that  this  self  "  jacking-np  " — as  he 
calls  it — this  self-tuning  in  the  morning,  not 
only  helps  him  to  get  a  larger  efficiency  into 
his  day's  work,  but  also  to  do  the  work  with 
much  less  wear  and  tear.  It  is  a  tremendous 
tonic.  It  stimulates  him  to  better  and  better 
work.  Since  he  has  adopted  the  self-com- 
muning, self-bracing  habit,  he  has  gone  ahead 
by  leaps  and  bounds. 

Every  man  would  be  helped  as  these  young 
men  have  been  by  the  habit  of  talking  to  him- 
self just  as  though  he  were  another  person 
in  whom  he  was  very  much  interested  and  to 
whom  he  was  giving  his  best  advice. 

Whenever  you  can  do  so,  it  is  a  good  plan 
to  get  so  far  away  from  others  that  you  will 
not  be  conscious  of  their  presence,  and  then 
go  through  your  resolutions  verbally — with 
vehemence,  if  necessary.  You  will  soon  be 
surprised  to  find  how  much  better  they  will 
stick  in  your  consciousness,  and  how  much 
more  likely  you  are  to  follow  your  own  advice 
when  you  give  it  orally. 

If  you  have  some  vicious  habit  which  is 
keeping  you  back,  sapping  the  life  out  of  you, 
you  will  be  greatly  strengthened  in  your  power 
to  overcome  it  by  constantly  saying  to  your- 
self, "  I  know  this  thing  (calling  it  by  name) 


AFFIR^IATION  195 

is  destroying  my  vitality.  I  am  not  so  vigor- 
ous ;  so  robust  physically  and  mentally ;  I  am 
not  so  efficient  as  I  should  be ;  I  do  not  think 
so  clearly,  I  cannot  control  my  mind  so  well 
as  I  could  were  I  not  hampered  by  this  weak- 
ness. 

"  The  paralyzing  habit  is  placing  me  at  a 
great  disadvantage  in  life ;  it  is  holding  me  up 
to  ridicule,  to  unfavorable  comparison  with 
others.  I  know  that  I  have  more  ability  than 
many  of  those  about  me  who  are  accomplish- 
ing a  great  deal  more.  Now,  I  am  going  to 
conquer  this  thing  which  is  destroying  my 
prospects.  I  am  going  to  get  freedom  for  my- 
self at  any  cost." 

If  your  sin  is  immorality  say  to  yourself: 
"  Nothing  will  blacken  my  soul  quicker  than 
this.  I  am  ruining  my  chances  of  future  hap- 
piness. This  cursed  thing  is  an  insult  to  my 
ideal  of  womanhood,  an  insult  to  my  future 
wife,  a  crime  to  my  future  children.  There  is 
no  other  thing  which  will  so  deteriorate  my 
manhood,  which  will  so  honeycomb  my  very 
character  and  destroy  my  self-respect  as  this 
damnable  thing.  I  hereby  take  a  sacred  oath 
never  to  repeat  that  which  will  lessen  my 
chances  in  life,  that  which  will  make  me  think 
less  of  myself.  I  despise  the  thing  which  will 


196     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

keep  me  back  in  life,  which  will  tend  to  make 
me  a  failure  and  anything  less  than  a  man.  I 
will  not  take  the  risk  of  indulging  a  little  lon- 
ger with  the  hope  that  something  may  help  me 
break  the  habit,  or  that  something  will  assist 
me  to  get  strength  later,  because  I  know  that 
every  indulgence  in  the  vicious  habit  binds  me 
more  strongly  to  it,  and  makes  my  chance  of 
breaking  away  so  much  less.'" 

Just  talk  to  yourself  in  this  way  whenever 
alone  and  you  will  be  surprised  to  see  how 
quickly  the  audible  suggestion  will  weaken  the 
grip  of  the  vicious  habit.  In  a  short  time  your 
self-talks  will  so  strengthen  your  will  power 
that  you  will  be  able  to  entirely  eradicate  your 
weakness. 

But  you  must  be  very  positive  in  the  affirma- 
tion of  your  ability  to  overcome  it.  If  you  sim- 
ply say  to  yourself,  "  I  know  that  this  thing 
is  bad  for  me;  I  know  that  if  I  continue  to 
drink,  or  to  smoke  cigarettes,  or  to  practice 
immorality,  it  will  interfere  with  my  success, 
but  I  do  not  believe  I  shall  ever  be  able  to 
overcome  it ;  it  has  gotten  such  a  hold  on  me 
that  I  cannot  give  it  up " — you  will  never 
make  any  headway. 

Always  stoutly  afUrm  your  ability  to  con- 
quer. Say  to  yourself,  "  I  was  not  made  to  be 


AFFIRMATION  197 

dominated  by  a  vice,  a  weed,  or  an  extract  of 
grain.  God's  image  in  me  was  not  intended  to 
wallow  in  filth.  I  can  never  use  the  ability  I 
have  to  the  best  advantage,  never  be  the  man 
I  was  intended  to  be  or  am  capable  of  being, 
while  I  harbor  this  enemy  which  will  sap  my 
ability  and  weaken  my  chances  in  life.  It  is 
creating  structural  changes  in  my  body ;  it  is 
destroying  my  ability  and  blunting  my  moral 
sensibility.  I  am  done  with  it  once  and  for- 
ever ;  the  appetite  for  it  is  destroyed  in  my 
being.  I  do  not  want  it — I  do  not  need  it — I 
will  not  touch  it.  I  was  made  to  hold  up  my 
head  and  be  a  man — to  do  the  work  of  a  man. 
There  is  something  divine  within  me — the 
God-man — perfectly  able  to  overcome  this 
thing  which  is  crippling  my  career  and  hold- 
ing me  back,  and  I  am  going  to  do  it." 

Don't  be  disappointed  if  you  do  not  get  im- 
mediate relief.  Continue  to  talk  to  yourself  in 
this  confident  manner,  especially  upon  retiring, 
always  affirming  your  ability  to  overcome  your 
weakness,  whatever  it  may  be,  and  you  will 
conquer.  Your  will  power  will  assist  you,  but 
conviction  is  a  thousand  times  stronger  than 
will  power ;  and  the  constant  affirmation  of  the 
ability  of  the  divinity  within  you  to  overcome 
the  thing  which  handicaps  you  will  finally  help 


198     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

you  to  conquer.  When  you  once  get  a  glimpse 
of  the  divine  power  within  you,  and  experience 
its  help;  when  you  learn  to  trust  to  the  God 
in  you  for  assistance,  you  will  find  yourself 
and  the  Divinity  always  in  the  majority.  No 
power  can  stand  against  you  then. 

At  first  it  may  seem  silly  to  you  to  be  talk- 
ing to  yourself,  but  you  will  derive  so  much 
benefit  from  it  that  you  will  have  recourse  to 
it  in  remedying  all  your  defects.  There  is  no 
fault,  however  great  or  small,  which  will  not 
succumb  to  persistent  audible  suggestion.  For 
example,  you  may  be  naturally  timid  and 
shrink  from  meeting  people ;  and  you  may  dis- 
trust your  own  ability.  If  so,  you  will  be  great- 
ly helped  by  assuring  yourself  in  your  daily 
self-talks  that  you  are  not  timid ;  that,  on  the 
contrary,  you  are  the  embodiment  of  courage 
and  bravery.  Assure  yourself  that  there  is  no 
reason  why  you  should  be  timid,  because  there 
is  nothing  inferior  or  peculiar  about  you ;  that 
you  are  attractive,  and  that  you  know  how  to 
act  in  the  presence  of  others.  Say  to  yourself 
that  you  are  never  again  going  to  allow  your- 
self to  harbor  any  thoughts  of  self-deprecia- 
tion or  timidity  or  inferiority;  that  you  are 
going  to  hold  your  head  up  and  go  about  as 
though  you  were  a  king,  a  conqueror,  instead 


AFFIRMATION  199 

of  crawling  about  like  a  whipped  cur.  You 
are  going  to  assert  your  manhood,  your  indi- 
viduality. 

Man  was  planned  to  stand  erect,  to  look  up,    ] 
to  go  through  life  with  his  backbone  straight, 
to  look  the  world  in  the  face  with  a  fearless 
eye — he  was  never  made  to  cower  and  flinch,       \ 
to  whine,  to  apologize  and  to  depreciate  his 
ability. 

If  you  lack  initiative,  stoutly  affirm  your 
ability  to  begin  things,  and  to  push  them 
through  to  a  finish.  And  always  put  your  re- 
solve into  action  at  the  first  opportunity. 

If  you  are  bashful,  diffident  in  company,  and 
inclined  to  depreciate  yourself  and  think  that 
you  are  not  quite  as  good  as  other  people,  just 
deny  all  of  this  to  yourself,  and  resolve  that 
you  will  never  lose  an  opportunity  for  culti- 
vating and  strengthening  your  deficient  con- 
versational faculties. 

Never  allow  yourself  to  imagine  that  you 
are  being  watched  or  laughed  at.  Always 
think  of  yourself  as  a  king  or  a  queen.  If  you 
suffer  from  self-consciousness,  oversensitive- 
ness,  say  to  yourself  constantly  :  "  I  am  a  king. 
There  is  no  reason  why  I  should  consider  my- 
self inferior  to  others.  I  will  just  walk  about 
as   though   I   were  governor  of  my  state,  or 


200     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

mayor  of  my  city ;  a  full,  complete  man — mas- 
ter of  the  situation." 

If  you  are  the  victim  of  indecision ;  if  you 
are  inclined  to  weigh  and  balance  and  recon- 
sider tilings  all  the  time,  just  deny  all  this 
to  yourself  verbally,  strongly,  emphatically, 
and  resolve  that  hereafter  you  are  going  to  act 
before  your  doubt  has  a  chance  to  weaken  your 
decision  or  ask  for  a  reconsideration.  Say  to 
yourself  that  you  would  better  make  mistakes 
than  not  to  act  at  all,  or  to  be  forever  on  the 
fence. 

If  you  have  hard  work  to  make  up  your 
mind  to  undertake  what  you  know  you  ought 
to,  just  get  by  yourself  somewhere  alone  and 
brace  yourself  up.  Talk  to  yourself  as  you 
would  to  some  friend  whom  you  love;  some 
one  whom  you  know  has  ability  but  lacks  cour- 
age and  pluck.  Reenforce  yourself;  reinvigor- 
ate  your  mind ;  reassure  yourself. 

Through  these  self-talks,  if  you  will  be  sin- 
cere with  yourself  and  strong  and  persistent 
in  your  affirmations,  you  will  be  surprised  to 
see  how  you  can  increase  your  courage,  your 
confidence,  and  your  ability  to  execute  your 
ideas. 

I  know  a  young  man  who  was  so  self-con- 
scious when  a  youth  that  he  would  cross  the 


AFFIRMATION  201 

street  to  avoid  meeting  any  one  he  knew.  He 
was  completely  confused  when  any  one  he  was 
not  accustomed  to  see  chanced  to  speak  to  him. 
He  was  constantly  depreciating  himself  and 
belittling  his  ability.  Indeed,  I  have  rarely 
seen  any  one  who  depreciated  a  splendid  abil- 
ity so  much  as  he  did.  Yet  he  has  so  entirely 
overcome  these  faults  by  audible  suggestion 
that  no  one  would  suspect  that  he  had  ever 
lacked  self-appreciation  or  confidence,  or  that 
he  had  been  a  victim  of  shyness. 

He  tells  me  that  he  used  to  go  out  in  the 
country  and  talk  to  himself  seriously  about 
his  failings.  "  Now,  Arthur,  either  there  is 
something  in  you  or  there  is  not ;  and  I  am 
going  to  find  out,"  he  would  say.  "  Do  not  be 
a  fool.  You  are  just  as  good  as  anybody  else, 
so  long  as  you  behave  as  well.  Hold  up  your 
head  and  be  a  man.  Do  not  be  afraid  to  face 
anybody.  Go  about  among  people  as  though 
you  were  somebody.  Quit  this  everlasting  self- 
depreciation,  self-effacement.  You  are  God's 
child,  and  you  have  just  as  good  a  right  on 
this  glad  green  earth  as  anybody  else.  Do  not 
go  about  apologizing  for  being  alive,  or  im- 
agining you  are  taking  up  room  which  belongs 
to  others." 

He   says   that  he   also   derives   very  great 


202     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

benefit  from  praising  and  appreciating  himself 
audibly  when  he  has  done  unusually  well,  or 
has  acquitted  himself  as  a  man.  On  such  occa- 
sions he  will  sav :  "  Arthur,  that  was  fine !  You 
did  splendidly !  I  am  proud  of  you.  That  just 
shows  what  you  are  capable  of.  Do  as  well  in 
every  instance,  and  you  will  amount  to  some- 
thing in  the  world  and  be  somebody." 

I  know  of  nothing  so  helpful  for  the  timid, 
those  who  lack  faith  in  themselves,  as  the  habit 
of  constantly  affirming  their  own  importance, 
their  own  power,  their  own  divinity.  When  a 
man  once  sees  that  he  is  divine,  once  gets  a 
glimpse  of  his  own  capability,  he  will  never 
be  content  to  wallow  in  the  mud  and  mire  of 
things ;  nor  will  he  doubt  his  own  kingship. 
The  trouble  is  that  men  do  not  think  half 
enough  of  themselves  ;  do  not  accurately  meas- 
ure their  ability ;  do  not  put  the  right  estimate 
upon  their  possibilities.  We  berate  ourselves, 
belittle,  efiface  ourselves,  because  we  do  not 
see  the  larger,  diviner  man  in  us. 

The  objective  side  of  man  has  a  wonderful 
power  to  inspire  and  to  encourage  the  sub- 
jective side;  to  arouse  the  subconscious  men- 
tality where  all  latent  power  and  possibilities 
lie.  Deep  within  man  dwell  those  slumbering 
powers;  powers  that  would  astonish  him,  that 


AFFIRMATION  203 

he  never  dreamed  of  possessing;  forces  that 
would  revolutionize  his  life  if  aroused  and 
put  into  action. 

The  majority  of  people  call  out  but  a  very 
small  percentage  of  these  latent  forces  which 
are  waiting  to  serve  them.  Many  pass  the 
half-century  mark  before  some  emergency  or 
crisis  in  their  life  lifts  the  lid  off  their  possi- 
bilities, and  multitudes  go  through  life  without 
ever  getting  a  glimpse  of  their  powers. 

Many  a  family  has  eked  out  a  miserable 
existence  in  poverty  and  drudgery  while  there 
was  a  fortune  in  minerals  or  oils  in  the  very 
soil  which  they  owned.  Millions  have  died  in 
mental  penury,  died  weaklings,  when  they  had 
within  their  own  natures  vast  possibilities  of 
power  which  they  never  uncovered,  never 
utilized. 

As  miners  have  died  poor  while  holding 
claims  which  covered  great  wealth,  so  vast 
multitudes  of  people  die  poor  without  ever 
working  the  rich  mines  within  them. 

The  trouble  with  us  is  that  we  do  not  make 
a  loud  enough  call  upon  the  Great  Within  of 
us,  our  higher,  more  potent  selves.  We  are  too 
timid,  too  tame  in  our  demands. 

"  Affirm  that  which  you  wish,  and  it  will  be 
manifest  in  your  life."  Affirm  it  confidently, 


204     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

with  the  utmost  faith,  without  any  doubt  of 
what  you  affirm. 

Assert  your  possession  of  the  things  you 
need ;  of  the  qualities  you  long  to  own.  Force 
your  mind  toward  your  goal ;  hold  it  there 
steadily,  persistently,  for  this  is  the  mental 
condition  that  creates.  The  negative  mind, 
which  doubts  and  wavers,  creates  nothing. 
"  Nerve  us  with  incessant  affirmatives ;  do  not 
bark  against  the  bad;  but  chant  the  beauties 
of  the  good." 

"  I,  myself,  am  good  fortune,"  says  Walt 
Whitman. 

If  we  could  only  realize  that  the  very  atti- 
tude of  assuming  that  we  are  the  real  embodi- 
ment of  the  thing  we  long  to  be  or  to  attain, 
that  we  possess  the  good  things  we  long  for, 
not  that  we  possess  all  the  qualities  of  good, 
but  that  we  are  these  qualities — with  the  con- 
stant affirming,  "  I  myself  am  good  luck,  good 
fortune ;  I  am  myself  a  part  of  the  great  crea- 
tive, sustaining  principle  of  the  universe,  be- 
cause my  real,  divine  self  and  my  Father  are 
one " — what  a  revolution  would  come  to 
earth's  toilers ! 


XII.    DESTRUCTIVE   AND 
CONSTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION 


XII.    DESTRUCTIVE   AND 
CONSTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION 


RIMINALS  are  mental  crimi- 
nals first.  The  deed  itself  is 
merely  the  physical  acting 
out  of  the  crime  which  they 
have  rehearsed  so  many  times 
in  their  imagination. 

An  ex-convict  who  served 
twenty-five  years  in  the  different  penitentiaries 
of  New  York  State  said  that  he  did  not  have 
the  slightest  conscious  thought  of  ever  becom- 
ing a  criminal.  But  he  had  a  natural  love  for 
doing  things  which  seemed  impossible  to 
others,  and  when  he  went  by  a  rich  man's  resi- 
dence he  could  not  help  thinking  out  different 
ways  of  entering  the  house  in  the  night,  until 
he  finally  attempted  it.  He  took  great  pride  in 
going  from  room  to  room  while  everybody 
was  asleep  and  getting  out  without  waking 
any  one.  Every  time  he  did  this  he  felt  a  sense 
of  triumph,  as  though  he  had  done  something 
worthy  of  praise.  He  said  he  did  not  rob  so 
much  for  the  value  of  the  things  he  stole  as 
to  gratify  his  passion  for  taking  risks,  and  he 
could  hardly  believe  it  when  he  found  that  he 
was  actually  doing  the  things  he  had  contem- 

207 


2o8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

plated  until  they  became  a  part  of  his  nature. 
When  he  was  arrested  the  first  time,  it  did  not 
seem  possible  to  him  that  he  could  be  a 
criminal. 

This  shows  what  a  dangerous  thing  it  is  to 
hold  in  the  mind  a  wrong  suggestion,  for  it 
tends  to  become  a  part  of  us,  and,  before  we 
realize  it,  we  are  like  our  thought. 

Professional  burglars  tell  us  that  for  years 
before  they  fell  they  committed  all  sorts  of 
thefts  in  their  imagination.  They  would  think 
out  ingenious  ways  of  entering  houses  and 
accomplishing  their  ends  without  detection. 

They  dwelt  upon  the  thought  of  crime  so 
long  that,  before  they  were  aware  of  it,  they 
had  actually  committed  the  deed.  The  criminal 
suggestion  was  held  in  mind  until  it  became 
incorporated  in  their  life  structure,  and  they 
were  amazed  to  find  themselves  criminals. 
Many  of  them  had  no  thought  of  ever  commit- 
ting actual  crime  when  they  first  began  to 
think  about  it,  but  the  criminal  thought,  the 
criminal  suggestion,  did  its  work. 

Who  can  picture  the  havoc  which  the  sus- 
picious suggestion  has  wrought  in  innocent 
lives?  Think  of  the  influence  of  employers 
holding  the  thought  of  suspicion  regarding 
their  servants  or  other  employees. 


DESTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION    209 

Servants  have  actually  been  made  dishonest 
by  other  persons  perpetually  holding  the  sus- 
picion that  they  were  dishonest.  This  thought 
suggests  dishonesty  to  the  suspected  perhaps 
for  the  first  time,  and  being  constantly  held 
takes  root  and  grows,  and  bears  the  fruit  of 
theft.  The  old  proverb,  "  If  you  have  the 
name,  you  might  as  well  have  the  game,"  is 
put  into  action  many  times.  It  is  simply  cruel  • 
to  hold  a  suspicious  thought  of  another  until 
you  have  positive  proof.  That  other  person's 
mind  is  sacred ;  you  have  no  right  to  invade 
it  with  your  miserable  thoughts  and  pictures 
of  suspicion.  You  should  not  indulge  in  such 
thoughts  of  yourself,  any  more  than  you  would 
allow  yourself  to  hold  thoughts  of  blacker 
sin  or  crime.  Many  a  being  has  been  made 
wretched  and  miserable  for  years ;  has  been 
depressed  and  borne  down  by  the  uncharitable, 
wicked  thoughts  of  others. 

Many  people  scatter  fear  thoughts,  doubt 
thoughts,  failure  thoughts  wherever  they  go; 
and  these  take  root  in  minds  that  might  other- 
wise be  free  from  them  and  therefore  happy, 
confident,  and  successful. 

Who  can  ever  estimate  the  human  tragedy, 
the  suffering,  the  failures,  caused  by  hypno- 
tizing oneself  by  vicious  thoughts,  or  becom- 


2IO     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ing-  hypnotized  throug-h   the   wrong  thoughts 
of  others? 

The  time  will  come  when  we  shall  have  more 
sympathy  for  those  who  go  wrong,  and  even 
for  criminals  ;  because  we  shall  know  how  pow- 
erfully human  minds  are  influenced  by  the 
vicious  thoughts  of  others. 

Many  a  youth  who  has  been  thrown  into 
prison  for  some  minor  offense  has  been 
changed  into  a  hardened  criminal  by  constant 
association  with  the  criminal  classes ;  by  being 
cut  off  from  all  communication  and  association 
with  the  good,  and  with  no  possibility  of  even 
seeing  good  books.  The  perpetual  criminal  sug- 
gestions about  him  were  held  in  his  mind  so 
long  that  he  became  morbid,  surcharged  with 
criminal  tendencies.  If,  instead  of  being  locked 
up,  he  could  be  put  upon  a  huge  farm  in  a 
beautiful  section  of  the  country,  with  beautiful 
surroundings  of  mountains,  lakes,  flowers, 
trees  and  grass,  and  placed  under  kindly,  edu- 
cative influences,  it  would  be  possible  to  re- 
form the  criminal  in  a  great  majority  of  cases. 
The  substitution  of  prison  surroundings,  the 
consciousness  that  he  is  cut  off  from  the  world 
he  loves — from  friends,  from  healthy  influ- 
ences, from  all  possibility  of  carrying  out  his 
ambitions — disheartens   and   discourages  him, 


DESTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION    211 

and  his  mind  soon  coincides  with  the  continual 
suggestions  around  him. 

We  are  creatures  of  suggestion.  We  get 
them  from  newspapers,  books,  from  every  one 
with  whom  we  come  in  contact.  The  atmos- 
phere is  full  of  them.  We  are  constantly  giv- 
ing them  to  ourselves.  In  other  words,  our 
characters  are  largely  made  up  from  various 
kinds  of  suggestion. 

We  all  know  how  we  are  influenced  by  a 
powerful  play  or  a  powerful  book. 

I  know  a  lady  who  reads  the  most  tragic  and 
emotional  stories  she  can  get  hold  of ;  and  she 
says  she  is  often  so  aflfected  by  a  book  that 
she  is  obliged  to  go  to  bed  for  an  entire  day 
at  a  time.  So  powerfully  does  the  suggestion 
in  the  book  take  possession  of  her,  that,  for  the 
time,  she  lives  the  life  that  is  depicted  there. 
She  feels  that  she  is  one  of  the  characters  she 
is  reading  about. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  trace  many  a  criminal's 
acts  to  the  graphic  suggestions  of  criminal 
novels,  the  exciting  stories  of  murder  and 
plunder  which  he  began  to  read  when  a  child. 

People  with  criminal  tendencies  love  to  read 
stories  of  crime  and  hairbreadth  escapes.  They 
are  great  detective-story  readers.  Some  youths 
unconsciously   inflame  their  imagination  thus 


212     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

until  they  become  abnormal.  They  develop  a 
morbid  desire  actually  to  do  the  criminal  deed 
which  they  have  performed  so  many  times 
mentally. 

Think  of  the  awful  responsibility  of  throw- 
ing out  in  picture,  in  cartoon,  in  print,  the  daily 
suggestion  of  scandal,  of  murder,  of  suicide, 
of  crime  in  all  its  forms,  with  all  the  insidious 
suggestiveness  which  lives  in  detailed  descrip- 
tion ! 

Some  time  ago  the  mayor  of  one  of  our 
western  cities  requested  the  editors  of  the  daily 
papers  to  refrain  from  publishing  the  details 
of  suicides,  because  he  said  their  publication 
had  caused  an  alarming  epidemic  of  suicides 
in  that  community. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  many  a  criminal  is 
serving  a  sentence  which  ought  to  be  served 
by  those  who  have  influenced  him  to  commit 
the  crime  for  which  he  is  being  punished. 

Indelible  and  satanic  is  the  taint  of  the  evil 
suggestion  which  a  lewd,  questionable  picture 
or  story  leaves  in  the  mind.  Nothing  else  more 
fatally  mars  the  ideals  of  life  and  lowers  the 
standard  of  manhood  and  womanhood. 

The  suggestion  of  impurity  in  trashy  litera- 
ture is  responsible  for  a  great  deal  of  dissipa- 
tion ;  for  blasted  hopes  and  blighted  lives.  The 


DESTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION    213 

same  is  true  of  suggestiveness  in  art.  Many- 
impure  artists  have  made  their  fortunes  and 
their  reputations  by  treading  upon  forbidden 
ground,  by  going  just  as  near  the  point  of 
legal  prohibition  in  their  pictures  as  possible. 

If  young  people  only  realized  what  a  terrible 
thing  it  is  to  get  even  a  suggestion  of  impurity 
into  the  mind,  they  would  never  read  an  author 
whose  lines  drip  with  the  very  gall  of  death. 
They  would  not  look  at  those  dangerous  books 
which  lead  their  readers  as  near  the  edge  of 
indecency  as  possible  without  stepping  over. 
To  describe  impurity  in  rosy,  glowing,  seduc- 
tive, suggestive  language,  is  but  the  refinement 
of  the  house  of  death. 

We  have  all  had  the  exalted  experience,  the 
marvellous  tonic,  the  uplift,  that  has  come 
from  the  suggestion  in  a  play  or  a  book  de- 
picting a  great  hero.  How  heroic  and  noble 
and  self-sacrificing  we  feel  for  a  long  time, 
and  how  resolved  we  are  to  become  like  the 
hero  in  the  play  or  the  story !  This  is  a  good 
illustration  of  the  power  suggestion  is  con- 
stantly playing  in  our  experience  all  through 
life. 

How  important  it  is  that  from  childhood  we 
should  be  in  the  atmosphere  of  uplifting,  en- 
couraging, cheerful,  optimistic,  loving  ideals! 


y 


214     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Teachers  tell  us  that  in  the  schools  in  the  slums 
of  cities  there  are  children  who  never  smile, 
who  are  always  sad  and  gloomy  because  of  the 
terrible  influence  in  their  homes ;  where  there 
is  a  constant  suggestion  of  suffering,  of  filth, 
of  profanity  and  of  impurity;  where  all  the 
ideals  are  low  and  debasing. 

I  have  known  bright,  healthy,  refined  orphan 
children  to  be  completely  transformed  by  being 
placed  in  coarse  families,  where  hard,  brutal 
suggestions  were  held  constantly  before  their 
minds  until  their  dispositions  and  characters 
were  hardened,  and  all  that  was  noblest  and 
best  in  their  natures  was  petrified. 

It  is  easy  to  account  for  a  hard,  cold,  selfish 
nature  when  we  find  that  the  child  has  held 
these  qualities  as  perpetual  suggestions  in  the 
mind  from  infancy.  Sweetness  and  light  and 
beauty  of  character  are  not  developed  in  an 
atmosphere  thick  with  hatred  and  envy  and 
poisoned  with  jealousy  and  selfishness.  Like 
produces  like ;  this  is  an  inexorable  law  every- 
where. Love  is  not  generated  in  an  atmosphere 
of  bitterness ;  unselfishness  and  sympathy  are 
not  fostered  in  an  environment  of  greed  and 
heartlessness. 

Dr.  El  wood  Worcester,  leader  of  the  Em- 
manuel movement  in  B..  ^ton  is  a  firm  believer 


DESTRUCTIVE   SUGGESTION    215 

in  the  power  of  suggestion  to  mould  the  char- 
acter of  the  child.  He  says :  "  There  is  a  very 
easy  and  rational  way  by  which  many  child- 
ish faults  can  be  removed ;  that  is,  by  making 
good  suggestions  to  our  children  while  they 
are  in  a  state  of  natural  sleep. 

"  My  method  is  to  address  the  sleeping  child 
in  a  low  and  gentle  tone,  telling  it  that  I  am 
about  to  speak  to  it,  and  that  it  will  hear  me, 
but  that  my  words  will  not  disturb  it  nor  will 
it  awake.  Then  I  give  the  necessary  words,  re- 
peating them  in  different  language  several 
times.  By  this  means  I  have  removed  childish 
fears  and  corrected  bad  habits.  I  have  checked 
nervous  twitchings,  anger,  violence,  a  disposi- 
tion to  lie,  and  I  have  improved  speech  in 
stammering  children." 

We  are  so  largely  products  of  our  environ- 
ment ;  we  are  so  sensitive  to  the  suggestion 
dominant  in  our  minds,  that  we  can  have  a 
powerful  influence  over  our  destiny  by  auto- 
suggestion. We  can  often  so  dominate  a 
vicious  thought  in  our  environment  by  a  coun- 
teracting self-suggestion  as  to  completely  de- 
stroy it.  The  powerful  self-suggestion  of 
purity  will  quickly  annihilate  the  opposite  sug- 
gestion from  others.  The  self-suggestions  of 
justice  and  truth  will  quickly  overmaster  the 


2i6     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

suggestions  of  injustice  and  falsehood  from 
those  about  us. 

"  As  a  therapeutic  agency  and  an  uplifting 
ethical  force,"  says  Dr.  Worcester,  "  auto-sug- 
gestion can  hardly  be  exaggerated.  The  vari- 
ous troubles,  physical  and  mental,  which  are 
amenable  to  its  influence  make  a  long  list.  In 
these  and  other  troubles  the  patient  can,  as 
Shakespeare  says,  '  minister  to  himself.'  What 
a  gospel  of  hope  is  here  for  the  depressed  and 
unhappy!  What  a  chance  of  redemption  for 
those  who  are  the  slaves  of  circumstance  or  of 
their  own  folly !  " 

It  is  wholly  a  question  of  making  the  de- 
mand, the  call,  upon  our  better  self  so  em- 
phatic, so  vigorous,  and  so  appealing  that  it 
will  arouse  our  higher  nature.  Then  there  will 
be  a  leaping  forth  of  an  overpowering  energy 
of  the  Godlike  in  us. 

When  we  see  a  man  who  has  been  but  a 
mere  apology  for  a  human  being,  a  curse  to 
the  race  for  half  a  lifetime,  converted,  trans- 
formed, by  the  love  of  some  noble  woman  or 
friend,  become  a  great  power  for  good,  we  are 
apt  to  think  that  this  transformation,  this  mira- 
cle is  due  to  some  force,  some  power  outside  of 
himself.  But  the  power  was  within  him  all  the 
time,  waiting  to  be  aroused,  to  be  awakened. 


DESTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION    217 

When  the  right  suggestion  comes,  and  is  made 
emphatic,  vigorous  enough,  the  divine  within 
us  will  respond. 

People  who  are  "  down  on  their  luck  "  are, 
as  a  rule,  the  victims  of  their  own  negative 
suggestion.  If  they  could  only  substitute  the 
positive,  the  creative,  for  the  negative,  the  de- 
structive suggestion  which  enslaves  them,  they 
would  win  instead  of  losing. 

Darwin  has  shown  that  every  mental  state 
has  a  corresponding  physical  expression,  and 
that  if  you  assume  one  you  are  likely  to 
experience  the  other.  Anger,  for  instance, 
expresses  itself  physically  in  violent  language, 
clenching  the  fists,  slamming  the  door,  or  in 
other  forms.  And  as  a  man  may  make  himself 
angry  by  doing  these  things,  so  he  can  put 
himself  into  a  devotional  frame  of  mind  by 
assuming  an  attitude  of  prayer. 

Some  people  are  so  happily  constituted  that 
they  are  constantly  rejuvenating  and  refresh- 
ening and  elevating  themselves  by  the  habitual 
appeal  to  their  minds  through  suggestion.  They 
keep  so  close  to  the  divine  power  that  they  feel 
its  thrill  and  are  propelled  by  the  great  divine 
current. 

How  often  we  are  surprised  at  the  discov- 
ery of  some  unexpected  power  or  possibility 


2i8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

within  ourselves,  which  has  been  brought  to 
the  surface  by  the  suggestion  of  some  book, 
or  by  some  friend  who  believed  in  us,  or  saw 
in  us  what  we  could  not  see  ourselves ! 

The  human  mind  may  be  attuned  to  any 
key,  high  or  low,  base  or  noble,  by  the  power 
of  suggestion.  The  suggestion  may  be  in  a 
word  spoken  by  oneself  or  by  another ;  it  may 
come  from  a  book  or  a  picture ;  it  may  ema- 
nate from  the  presence  of  a  friend  or  of  an 
enemy,  from  a  grand,  heroic  character,  or  a 
mean,  cowardly  one.  From  hundreds  of  sources 
it  may  come,  from  within  or  without,  but 
wherever  it  comes  from,  it  leaves  its  mark  on 
the  life  for  good  or  ill. 

Suggestion  in  its  highest  form  is  the  appeal 
to  our  higher  self  to  come  into  recognition  of 
its  own.  No  matter  how  bad  a  man  may  seem 
to  be,  there  is  a  better  man  within  him.  No 
matter  how  low  he  may  have  sunk  morally, 
to  all  outward  appearance,  there  is  something 
absolutely  spotless  within  him,  something 
which  has  never  been  smirched  and  can  never 
be,  and  which  will  ultimately  claim  its  birth- 
right and  come  to  its  own  in  splendor  and 
power. 

No  matter  how  soiled  a  banknote  becomes 
it  is  always  redeemable  so  long  as  there  is  any 


DESTRUCTIVE    SUGGESTION    219 

distinguishable  mark  of  its  genuineness.  There 
is  something  within  every  human  being  which 
will  ultimately  redeem  him,  no  matter  how  far 
he  may  have  drifted  from  the  right.  There  is 
a  better  self  in  the  worst  criminal  in  our  peni- 
tentiaries which  will  some  day,  somewhere,  re- 
deem him,  bring  him  to  his  own.  The  God 
within  him  will  finally  triumph.  Every  human 
being  some  time,  somewhere,  will  come  into 
harmony  with  the  divine.  Every  child  of  the 
King  will  ultimately  inherit  his  kingdom. 


XIII.    WORRY,    THE    DISEASE    OF 
THE   AGE 


XIII.    WORRY,    THE    DISEASE    OF 
THE   AGE 


Some  people  bear  three  kinds  of  trouble — all  they 
ever  had,  all  they  have  now,  and  all  they  expect  to 
have. — Edward  Everett  Hale. 


NE  who  could  rid  the  world 
of  worry  would  render 
greater  service  to  the  race 
than  all  of  the  inventors  and 
discoverers  that  ever  lived. 

We  Americans  pity  igno- 
rant savages  who  live  in  terror 
of  their  cruel  gods,  their  demons  which  keep 
them  in  abject  slavery,  but  we  ourselves  are 
the  slaves  of  a  demon  which  blasts  our  hopes, 
blights  our  happiness,  casts  its  hideous  shadow 
across  all  our  pleasures,  destroys  our  sleep, 
mars  our  health,  and  keeps  us  in  misery  most 
of  our  lives. 

This  monster  dogs  us  from  the  cradle  to  the 
grave.  There  is  no  occasion  so  sacred  but  it  is 
there.  Unbidden  it  comes  to  the  wedding  and 
the  funeral  alike.  It  is  at  every  reception, 
every  banquet ;  it  occupies  a  seat  at  every  tabic. 
No  human  intellect  can  estimate  the  unutter- 
able havoc  and  ruin  wrought  by  worry.  It  has 
forced  genius  to  do  the  work  of  mediocrity; 

223 


224     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

it  has  caused  more  failures,  more  broken 
hearts,  more  blasted  hopes,  than  any  other  one 
cause  since  the  dawn  of  the  world. 

What  have  not  men  done  under  the  pressure 
of  worry !  They  have  plunged  into  all  sorts 
of  vice;  have  become  drunkards,  drug  fiends; 
have  sold  their  very  souls  in  their  efforts  to 
escape  this  monster. 

Think  of  the  homes  which  it  has  broken  up ; 
the  ambitions  it  has  ruined ;  the  hopes  and 
prospects  it  has  blighted !  Think  of  the  suicide 
victims  of  this  demon !  If  there  is  any  devil  in 
existence,  is  it  not  worry,  with  all  its  attendant 
progeny  of  evils? 

Yet,  in  spite  of  all  the  tragic  evils  that  fol- 
low in  its  wake,  a  visitor  from  another  world 
would  get  the  impression  that  worry  is  one  of 
our  dearest,  most  helpful  friends,  so  closely  do 
we  hug  it  to  ourselves  and  so  loath  are  we  to 
part  from  it. 

Is  it  not  unaccountable  that  people  who 
know  perfectly  well  that  success  and  happiness 
both  depend  on  keeping  themselves  in  condi- 
tion to  get  the  most  possible  out  of  their  ener- 
gies should  harbor  in  their  minds  the  enemy 
of  this  very  success  and  happiness?  Is  it  not 
strange  that  they  should  form  this  habit  of 
anticipating    evils    that    will    probably    never 


WORRY,  DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  225 

come,  when  they  know  that  anxiety  and  fret- 
ting will  not  only  rob  them  of  peace  of  mind 
and  strength  and  ability  to  do  their  work,  but 
also  of  precious  years  of  life  ? 

Many  a  strong  man  is  tied  down,  like  Gulli- 
ver, by  Lilliputians — ^bound  hand  and  foot  by 
the  little  worries  and  vexations  he  has  never 
learned  to  conquer. 

What  would  be  thought  of  a  business  man  ^  v  p/^ 
who  would  keep  in  his  service  employees 
known  to  have  been  robbing  him  for  years, 
stealing  a  little  here  and  a  little  there  every 
day?  Yet  one  may  be  keeping  in  his  mental 
business  house,  at  the  very  source  of  his 
power,  a  thief  infinitely  worse  than  one  who 
merely  steals  money  or  material  things ;  a 
thief  who  robs  him  of  energy,  saps  his  vitality, 
and  bankrupts  him  of  all  that  makes  life  worth 
while. 

Do  we  pity  the  pagans  who  lacerate  them- 
selves in  all  sorts  of  cruel  ways  in  their  wor- 
ship? Yet  many  of  us  constantly  torment  our- 
selves by  all  sorts  of  mental  instruments  of 
torture. 

We  borrow  trouble ;  endure  all  our  lives  the 
woe  of  crossing  and  recrossing  bridges  weeks 
and  years  before  we  come  to  them;  do  dis- 
agreeable tasks  mentally  over  and  over  again 


226     PEACE,  POWER,  AND   PLENTY 

before  we  reach  them  ;  anticipate  our  drudgery 
and  constantly  suffer  from  the  apprehension  of 
terrible  things  that  never  happen. 

I  know  women  who  never  open  a  telegram 
without  trembling,  for  they  feel  sure  it  will 
announce  the  death  of  a  friend  or  some  ter- 
rible disaster.  If  their  children  have  gone  for 
a  sail  or  a  picnic,  they  are  never  easy  a  mo- 
ment during  their  absence ;  they  work  them- 
selves into  a  fever  of  anxiety  for  fear  that 
some  accident  will  befall  them,  that  something 
awful  will  happen  to  them. 

Many  a  mother  fritters  away  more  energy 
in  useless  frets  and  fears  for  her  children,  in 
nervous  strain  over  this  or  that,  than  she  uses 
for  her  daily  routine  of  domestic  work.  She 
wonders  why  she  is  so  exhausted  at  the  close 
of  the  day,  and  never  dreams  that  she  has 
thrown  away  the  greater  part  of  her  force. 

Is  it  not  strange  that  people  will  persist  in 
allowing  little  worries,  petty  vexations,  and 
unnecessary  frictions  to  grind  life  away  at 
such  a  fearful  rate  that  old  age  stares  them 
in  the  face  in  middle  life?  Look  at  the  women 
who  are  shrivelled  and  shrunken  and  aged  at 
thirty,  not  because  of  tht  hard  work  they  have 
done,  or  the  real  troubles  they  have  had,  but 
because  of  habitual  fretting,  which  has  helped 


WORRY,  DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  227 

nobody,  but  has  brought  discord  and  unhap- 
piness  to  their  homes. 

Somewhere  I  read  of  a  worn.-ing'  woman 
who  made  a  Hst  of  possible  unfortunate  events 
and  happenings  which  she  felt  sure  would 
come  to  pass  and  be  disastrous  to  her  happi- 
ness and  welfare.  The  list  was  lost,  and  to  her 
amazement,  when  she  recovered  it,  a  long  time 
afterwards,  she  found  that  not  a  single  unfor- 
tunate prediction  in  the  whole  catalogue  of 
disasters  had  taken  place. 

Is  not  this  a  good  suggestion  for  worriers? 
Write  down  everything  which  you  think  is 
going  to  turn  out  badly,  and  then  put  the  list 
aside.  You  will  be  surprised  to  see  what  a  small 
percentage  of  the  doleful  things  ever  come  to 
pass. 

It  is  a  pitiable  thing  to  see  vigorous  men  and 
women,  who  have  inherited  godlike  qualities 
and  bear  the  impress  of  divinity,  wearing  anx- 
ious faces  and  filled  with  all  sorts  of  fear  and 
uncertainty,  worrying  about  yesterday,  to-day, 
to-morrow — ever}'thing  imaginable. 

In  entering  New  York  by  train  every  morn- 
ing, I  notice  business  men  with  hard,  tense 
expressions  on  their  faces,  leaning  forward 
when  the  train  approaches  the  station,  as  if 
they  could  hasten  its  progress  and  save  time, 


228     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

many  of  them  getting  up  from  their  seats  and 
rushing  toward  the  door  several  minutes  be- 
fore the  train  stops.  The  anxiety  in  their  every 
movement ;  the  hurried  nervousness  in  their 
manner ;  and  their  hard,  drawn  countenances 
— all  are  indications  of  an  abnormal  life. 

No  man  can  utilize  his  normal  power  who 
dissipates  his  nervous  energy  in  useless  anxiety. 
Nothing  will  sap  one's  vitality  and  blight  one's 
ambition  or  detract  from  one's  real  power  in 
the  world  more  than  the  worrying  habit. 

Work  kills  no  one,  but  worr>^  has  killed 
multitudes.  It  is  not  the  doing  things  which 
injures  us  so  much  as  the  dreading  to  do  them 
— not  only  performing  them  mentally  over  and 
over  again,  but  anticipating  something  dis- 
agreeable in  their  performance. 

Many  of  us  approach  an  unpleasant  task  In 
much  the  same  condition  as  a  runner  who 
begins  his  start  such  a  long  distance  away 
that  by  the  time  he  reaches  his  objective  point 
— the  ditch  or  the  stream  which  is  to  test  his 
agility — he  is  too  exhausted  to  jump  across. 

Worry  not  only  saps  vitality  and  wastes 
energy-,  but  it  also  seriously  affects  the  quality 
of  one's  work.  It  cuts  down  ability.  A  man 
cannot  get  the  highest  quality  of  efficiency  into 
his  work  when  his  mind  is  troubled.  The  men- 


WORRY,   DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  229 

tal  faculties  must  have  perfect  freedom  before 
they  will  give  out  their  best.  A  troubled  brain 
cannot  think  clearly,  vigorously,  and  logically. 
The  attention  cannot  be  concentrated  with  any- 
thing like  the  same  force  when  the  brain  cells 
are  poisoned  with  anxiety  as  when  they  are 
fed  by  pure  blood  and  are  clean  and  unclouded. 
The  blood  of  chronic  worriers  is  vitiated  with 
poisonous  chemical  substances  and  broken- 
down  tissues,  according  to  Prof.  Elmer  Gates 
and  other  noted  scientists,  who  have  shown 
that  the  passions  and  the  harmful  emotions 
cause  actual  chemical  changes  in  the  secre- 
tions and  generate  poisonous  substances  in  the 
body  which  are  fatal  to  healthy  growth  and 
action. 

The  brain  cells  are  constantly  bathed  in  the 
blood,  from  which  they  draw  their  nourish- 
ment, and  when  the  blood  is  loaded  with  the 
poison  of  fear,  worry,  anger,  hatred,  or  jeal- 
ousy, the  protoplasm  of  those  delicate  cells  be- 
comes hard  and  is  thus  materially  injured. 

The  most  pathetic  effect  of  worry  is  its  im- 
pairment of  the  thinking  powers.  It  so  clogs 
the  brain  and  paralyzes  thought  that  the  re- 
sults of  the  worrier's  work  merely  mock  his 
ambition,  and  often  lead  to  the  drink  or  drug 
habit.    Its    continued    friction    robs   the   brain 


230     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

cells  of  an  opportunity  to  renew  themselves ; 
and  so  after  awhile  there  is  a  breakdown  of 
the  nervous  system  and  then  the  worrier  suf- 
fers from  insomnia  and  other  nervous  ail- 
ments, and  sometimes  becomes  hopelessly 
insane. 

If  you  never  accomplish  anything  else  in 
life,  get  rid  of  worry.  There  are  no  greater 
enemies  of  harmony  than  little  anxieties  and 
petty  cares.  Do  not  flies  aggravate  a  nervous 
horse  more  than  his  work?  Do  not  little  nag- 
gings, constantly  touching  him  with  the  whip, 
or  jerking  at  the  reins,  fret  and  worry  him 
much  more  than  the  labor  of  drawing  the 
carriage  ? 

It  is  the  little  pin-pricks,  the  petty  annoy- 
ances of  our  every-day  life,  that  mar  our  com- 
fort and  happiness  and  rob  us  of  more  strength 
than  the  great  troubles  which  we  nerve  our- 
selves to  meet.  It  is  the  perpetual  scolding  and 
fault-finding  of  an  irritable  man  or  woman 
which  ruins  the  entire  peace  and  happiness  of 
many  a  home. 

An  habitual  worrier — an  aged  woman — 
said  to  her  physician,  "  My  head  feels  dull- 
like,  and  I've  kinder  lost  the  power  to  worry 
over  things."  A  great  many  people  would  be 
much  troubled  were  they  to  lose  the  power  to 


WORRY,  DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  231 

worry  over  things.  They  think  it  their  duty 
to  worry.  They  would  not  feel  that  they  were 
conscientious  or  faithful  if  they  were  not 
always  anxious  over  what  they  were  doing. 
They  would  not  think  they  were  showing  a 
proper  interest  in  it. 

Anticipating  a  thing  tends  to  bring  it  to  us. 
Worry  about  disease  is  a  disease  producer.  It 
is  well  known  that  many  victims  of  the  great 
plagues  of  history  have  been  slain  simply  by 
fear  and  dread. 

Professor  Gates  says  that  by  directing  his 
thought  to  one  of  his  thumbs,  and  holding  it 
there,  in  ten  minutes'  time  the  thumb  was 
gorged  with  blood,  and  the  temperature  was 
two  degrees  higher  than  in  the  other  thumb. 
This  is  what  happens  when  the  worry  thought 
— the  terror  thought — of  some  disease  is  con- 
tinually focused  on  a  part  of  the  body  which 
we  think  has  been  affected  by  heredity. 

Great  numbers  of  men  and  women  become 
hypochondriacs  by  dwelling  for  a  long  time  on 
diseases  they  fear.  If  they  happen  to  feel  a 
little  stupid  or  absent-minded,  if  their  minds 
do  not  always  work  just  right,  as  is  often  the 
case  with  even  the  most  healthy  brains,  they 
immediately  surmise  that  there  is  something 
wrong  with  their  heads. 


232     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  "  quick  lunch  " 
habit,  the  habit  of  bolting  the  food  without 
proper  mastication,  is  a  fruitful  source  of  in- 
digestion, and  this  has  a  great  deal  to  do  with 
the  worry  habit  of  the  American  people. 

The  digestive  organs  are  extremely  sensitive 
to  worry,  and  when  the  digestion  is  interfered 
with  the  whole  physical  economy  is  thrown 
into  disorder. 

Worry  and  fear  will  not  only  whiten  the 
hair,  but  will  also  cause  premature  baldness — 
a  condition  known  as  nervous  baldness.  An- 
other result  is  a  loss  of  tone  and  elasticity  in 
the  facial  muscles.  "  The  lips,  cheeks,  and  lower 
jaw,"  says  Darwin,  "  all  sink  downward  from 
their  own  weight." 

Worry  not  only  makes  a  woman  look  older, 
but  also  actually  makes  her  older.  It  is  a  chisel 
which  cuts  cruel  furrows  in  the  face.  I  have 
seen  one  so  completely  changed  by  a  few 
weeks  of  anxiety  that  the  whole  countenance 
had  a  different  expression  and  the  individual 
seemed  almost  like  another  person. 

One  of  the  worst  forms  of  worry  is  the 
brooding  over  failure.  It  blights  the  ambition, 
deadens  the  purpose  and  defeats  the  very 
object  the  worrier  has  in  view. 

Some  people  have  the  unfortunate  habit  of 


WORRY,  DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  233 

brooding  over  their  past  lives,  castigating 
themselves  for  their  shortcomings  and  mis- 
takes, until  their  whole  vision  is  turned  back- 
ward instead  of  forward,  and  they  see  every- 
thing in  a  distorted  light,  because  they  are 
looking  only  on  the  shadow  side. 

The  longer  the  unfortunate  picture  which 
has  caused  trouble  remains  in  the  mind,  the 
more  thoroughly  it  becomes  imbedded  there, 
and  the  more  difficult  it  is  to  remove  it. 

Did  you  ever  hear  of  any  good  coming  to 
any  human  being  from  zvorryf  Did  it  ever  help 
anybody  to  better  his  condition?  Does  it  not 
always — everywhere — do  just  the  opposite  by 
impairing  the  health,  exhausting  the  vitality, 
lessening  efficiency  ? 

Are  we  not  convinced  that  a  power  beyond 
our  control  runs  the  universe,  that  every  mo- 
ment of  worry  detracts  from  our  success  capi- 
tal and  makes  our  failure  more  probable ;  that 
every  bit  of  anxiety  and  fretfulness  leaves  its 
mark  on  the  body,  interrupts  the  harmony  of 
our  physical  and  mental  well-being,  and 
cripples  efficiency,  and  that  this  condition  is 
at  war  with  our  highest  endeavor  ? 

Let  us  then  cease  to  worry.  Let  us  stop  the 
habit— if  we  have  it— of  telling  everybody 
about  our  troubles.  What  we  want  to  do,  in 


234     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

order  to  drive  out  troubles,  is  to  forget  them 
— bury  them — not  keep  them  ahve  by  airing 
them  continuaUy. 

A  great  deal  can  be  done  to  correct  the 
causes  of  worry  by  keeping  up  the  health  stand- 
ard. A  good  digestion,  a  clear  conscience,  and 
sound  sleep  kill  a  lot  of  trouble.  Worry  thrives 
best  under  abnormal  conditions.  It  cannot  get 
much  of  a  hold  on  a  man  with  a  superb  phy- 
sique— a  man  who  lives  a  clean,  sane  life.  It 
thrives  on  the  weak — those  of  low  vitality 
whose  reserve  force  has  been  exhausted. 

We  see  women  resorting  to  massage,  elec- 
tricity, exercises,  chin  straps,  wrinkle  plasters, 
and  all  sorts  of  things  to  erase  the  terrible 
ravages  of  worry  and  anxiety ;  apparently 
ignorant  of  the  fact  that  the  supreme  remedy 
— the  great  panacea — is  in  the  mind,  they  con- 
tinue to  worry  as  to  how  they  shall  get  rid  of 
the  effects  of  worry ! 

J     Nothing   else    w^ill   so   quickly   drive   away 
'worry  as  the  habit  of  cheerfulness,  of  making 
the  best  of  things,  of  refusing  to  see  the  ugly 
side  of  life. 

When  you  feel  fear  or  anxiety  entering  your 
thought,  just  fill  your  mind  instantly  with 
courage,  hope,  and  confidence.  Refuse  to  let 
any   enemies   of   your  happiness   and   success 


WORRY,  DISEASE  OF  THE  AGE  235 

camp  in  your  mind.  Drive  out  the  whole  brood 
of  vampires. 

You  can  kill  worry  thoughts  easily  when 
you  know  the  antidote ;  and  this  you  always 
have  in  your  mind.  You  do  not  have  to  go  to 
a  drug  store  or  a  physician  for  it.  It  is  always 
with  you — always  ready.  All  you  have  to  do 
is  to  substitute  hope,  courage,  cheerfulness, 
serenity,  for  despondency,  discouragement, 
pessimism,  worry.  Opposite  thoughts  zvill  not 
live  together.  The  presence  of  one  excludes 
Jhe  other. 

"  People  ask  me  daily,"  said  Patti,  "  when 
they  look  at  my  face,  without  a  wrinkle,  what 
I  do  to  keep  so  young.  I  tell  them  that  when- 
ever I  have  felt  a  wrinkle  coming  I  have 
laughed  it  away.  My  advice  to  the  woman  who 
wants  to  remain  young  is :  'Be  happy — don't 
worry,  but  walk.'  " 


XIV.  FEAR,  THE  CURSE  OF  THE 
RACE 


XIV.  FEAR,  THE  CURSE  OF  THE 
RACE 

Fear  makes  man  a  slave  to  others.  This  is  the  tyrant's 
chain.  Anxiety  is  a  form  of  cowardice  embittering 
life. — Channing. 

Fear  is  an  acid  which  is  pumped  into  one's  atmosphere. 
It  causes  mental,  moral,  and  spiritual  asphyxiation, 
and  sometimes  death;  death  to  energy  and  all  growth. 
— Horace  Fletcher. 


HAT  is  fear?  It  is  absolutely 
nothing.  It  is  a  mental  illu- 
sion. There  is  no  reality  be- 
hind it.  It  is  to  the  sane  adult 
what  the  ghost  is  to  the  child. 
There  is  not  a  single  re- 
deeming feature  about  fear 
or  any  of  its  numerous  progeny.  It  is  always, 
everywhere,  an  unmitigated  curse.  Although 
there  is  no  reality  in  fear,  no  truth  behind  it, 
yet  everywhere  we  see  people  who  are  slaves 
to  this  monster  of  the  imagination. 

Fear  is  one  of  the  most  deadly  instruments 
for  marring  human  lives.  It  has  a  paralyzing, 
blighting  influence  upon  the  whole  being.  It 
impoverishes  the  blood  and  destroys  health  by 
im]jairing  the  digestion,  cutting  off  nutrition, 
and  lowering  the  physical  and  mental  vitality. 

239 


240     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

It  crushes  hope,  kills  courage,  and  so  enfeebles 
the  mind's  action  that  it  cannot  create  or 
produce. 

All  work  done  when  one  is  suffering  from  a 
sense  of  fear  or  foreboding  has  little  efficiency. 
Fear  strangles  originality,  daring,  boldness ;  it 
kills  individuality,  and  weakens  all  the  mental 
processes.  Great  things  are  never  done  under 
a  sense  of  fear  of  some  impending  danger. 
Fear  always  indicates  weakness,  the  presence 
of  cowardice.  What  a  slaughterer  of  years, 
what  a  sacrificer  of  happiness  and  ambitions, 
what  a  miner  of  careers  this  monster  has 
been !  The  Bible  says,  "  A  broken  spirit  drieth 
the  bones."  It  is  well  known  that  mental  de- 
pression— melancholy — will  check  very  mate- 
rially the  glandular  secretions  of  the  body  and 
literally  dry  up  the  tissues. 

Fear  depresses  normal  mental  action,  and 
renders  one  incapable  of  acting  wisely  in  an 
emergency,  for  no  one  can  think  clearly  and 
act  wisely  when  paralyzed  by  fear. 

When  a  man  becomes  melancholy  and  dis- 
couraged about  his  affairs,  when  he  is  filled 
with  fear  that  he  is  going  to  fail,  and  is 
haunted  by  the  spectre  of  poverty  and  a  suffer- 
ing family,  before  he  realizes  it,  he  attracts  the 
very  thing  he  dreads,  and  the  prosperity   is 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  241 

crushed  out  of  his  business.  But  he  is  a  mental 
failure  first. 

If,  instead  of  giving  up  to  his  fear,  a  man 
would  persist  in  keeping  prosperity  in  his 
mind,  assume  a  hopeful,  optimistic  attitude, 
and  would  conduct  his  business  in  a  system- 
atic, economical,  far-sighted  manner,  actual 
failure  would  be  comparatively  rare.  But  when 
a  man  becomes  discouraged,  when  he  loses 
heart  and  grip,  and  becomes  panic-stricken,  he 
is  not  in  a  position  to  make  the  effort  which 
is  absolutely  necessary  to  bring  victory,  and 
there  is  a  shrinkage  all  along  the  line. 

He  is  in  no  condition  to  ward  off  the  evil 
before  which  he  cowers.  His  mental  attitude 
lowers  his  vitality,  lessens  his  powers  of  re- 
sistance, vitiates  his  efficiency,  and  ruins  his 
resourcefulness. 

One  of  the  worst  forms  of  fear  is  that  of  a 
foreboding  of  some  evil  to  come,  which  hangs 
over  the  life  like  a  threatening  cloud  over  a 
volcano  before  an  eruption. 

Some  people  are  always  suffering  from  this 
peculiar  phase  of  fear.  They  are  apprehensive 
that  some  great  misfortune  is  coming  to  them, 
that  they  are  going  to  lose  their  money  or  their 
position  ;  or  they  are  afraid  of  accident,  or  that 
some  fatal  disease  is  developing  in  them.   If 


242     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

their  children  are  away  they  see  them  in  all 
sorts  of  catastrophes — railroad  wrecks,  burn- 
ing cars,  or  shipwrecks.  They  are  always  pic- 
turing the  worst.  "  You  never  can  tell  what 
will  happen,"  they  say,  "  and  it  is  better  to 
prepare  for  the  worst." 

I  know  a  woman  who  went  through  the 
most  heartrending  experiences  for  years  in  an- 
ticipation of  a  catastrophe  which  she  believed 
would  prove  so  overwhelming  that  it  could  not 
possibly  leave  any  hope  behind ;  but  when  the 
thing  occurred  that  she  had  dreaded  for  so 
long,  she  was  surprised  to  find  that  it  did  not 
overwhelm  her. 

How  we  suffer  all  our  lives  from  the  fear 
of  accident — ^the  fear  of  being  run  over  in  the 
streets,  the  fear  of  being  mairaed,  of  losing 
our  limbs,  the  fear  of  railroad  accidents,  of 
accidents  on  the  ocean,  the  fear  of  lightning, 
of  earthquakes — fear  of  all  kinds !  And  yet 
here  we  are  at  the  present  moment,  most  of 
us  without  the  loss  of  a  finger,  and  many 
without  even  a  scratch  or  a  scar,  although  we 
have,  perhaps,  travelled  a  great  deal  over  the 
world  for  a  lifetime. 

How  we  are  dogged  with  this  fear  fiend  all 
our  lives ! 

Many  women  have  such  a  terror  of  snakes 


FEAR,    CURSE   OF   THE   RACE     243 

that  they  never  take  any  comfort  while  in  the 
country.  They  are  always  imagining  they  are 
going  to  step  on  one  or  run  across  one.  This 
dread  ruins  their  vacations,  for  they  never  dare 
go  in  the  woods  or  walk  on  the  grass. 

I  have  known  women  who  lived  in  rattle- 
snake regions  to  be  so  terror-stricken  for  fear 
they  should  run  across  these  snakes  that  they 
never  dared  go  anywhere  alone,  and  always 
lived  in  anticipation  of  seeing  these  terrible 
creatures. 

Some  people  who  travel  in  the  tropics  have 
such  fear  of  poisonous  insects  and  reptiles  that 
they  never  have  a  minute's  peace  while  they 
are  there.  They  are  always  imagining  these 
terrible  creatures  are  crawling  over  them  in 
the  night. 

I  know  a  man  who  is  a  born  coward  regard- 
ing physical  pain,  and  who  lives  in  such  terror 
of  sickness  and  disease  that  he  makes  himself 
constantly  wretched  by  anticipating  maladies 
which  never  affect  him.  If  he  feels  a  cold 
coming  on,  he  is  sure  he  is  going  to  have  an 
acute  attack  of  the  grip.  If  he  has  a  sore 
throat,  he  thinks  it  is  going  to  develop  into 
tonsillitis,  and  that  he  will  not  be  able  to  swal- 
low. If  he  has  a  little  palpitation  after  eating 
a  hearty  meal,  caused  by  undue  pressure  upon 


244     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

the  heart,  he  imagines  he  is  going  to  be  a  vic- 
tim of  serious  heart  trouble. 

He  has  become  so  finicky  about  his  health 
that  he  is  a  perfect  nuisance  to  his  family  and 
to  his  friends.  He  is  always  wanting  windows 
closed,  or  more  heat,  or  he  wants — nobody 
knows  what  he  will  want.  Plis  friends  do 
not  like  to  invite  him  to  go  anywhere  with 
them,  because  he  is  so  particular  about  his 
food,  and  he  always  imagines  he  is  going  to 
be  burned  up  in  a  hotel  or  killed  on  a  train 
or  steamboat. 

It  is  true  this  is  an  exaggerated  case ;  but 
there  are  vast  multitudes  of  people  who  are 
under  a  similar  domination  of  fear  and  appre- 
hension all  their  lives.  I  know  people  who 
never  get  happiness  out  of  life,  except  in  little 
snatches.  They  work  like  slaves  to  get  to- 
gether enough  property  to  carry  them  through, 
as  they  say,  yet  they  never  enjoy  it.  They  look 
on  life  as  terribly  serious.  They  are  always 
afraid  they  are  going  to  lose  their  property, 
or  that  something  fearful  is  going  to  happen. 

The  most  deplorable  waste  of  energy  in  hu- 
man life  is  caused  by  the  fatal  habit  of  anti- 
cipating evil,  of  fearing  what  the  future  has 
in  store  for  us,  and  under  no  circumstances 
can  the  fear  or  worry  be  justified  by  the  situa- 


FEAR.    CURSE    OF    THE    RACE     245 

tion,  for  it  is  always  an  imaginary  one,  utterly 
groundless  and  without  foundation. 

What  we  fear  is  invariably  something  that 
has  not  yet  happened.  It  does  not  exist ;  hence 
is  not  a  reality.  If  you  are  actually  suffering 
from  a  disease  you  have  feared,  then  fear  only 
aggravates  every  painful  feature  of  your  ill- 
ness and  makes  its  fatal  issue  more  probable. 

The  fear  habit  shortens  life,  for  it  impairs 
all  the  physiological  processes.  Its  power  is 
shown  by  the  fact  that  it  actually  changes  the 
chemical  composition  of  the  secretions  of  the 
body.  Fear  victims  not  only  age  prematurely 
but  they  also  die  prematurely. 

Sensitive,  nervous  people,  and  those  who  are 
physically  weak,  suffer  most  from  fear.  We  all 
know  how  the  imagination  tends  to  exaggerate 
everything,  and  people  with  sensitive,  nervous 
organizations,  and  those  in  feeble  health  usu- 
ally imagine  that  the  worst  possible  will  hap- 
pen. Strong,  robust  health  itself  will  kill  a  ' 
great  many  fears  which  cause  intense  suffer- 
ing when  the  vitality  is  low  and  the  power 
of  resistance  is  weak. 

Many  people  live  so  perpetually  under  the 
dominion  of  this  demon,  that  they  never  de- 
velop normally.  As  children,  their  lives  were 
starved  and  stunted  ;  they  were  inoculated  with 


246     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

the  germ  of  fear  way  back  in  childhood  when 
the  mother  was  constantly  reminding  the  little 
ones  of  terrible  results  which  would  follow  if 
they  did  this  or  that.  Fear  shadows  were  con- 
stantly projected  into  their  susceptible  little 
minds,  until  the  demon  became  so  thoroughly 
intrenched  in  their  lives  that  it  follows  them 
through  the  years  like  a  hideous  ghost,  hover- 
ing round  to  destroy  their  peace  of  mind  and 
happiness.  Every  ugly  thing  told  to  a  child, 
every  shock,  every  fright  given  him  will  re- 
main like  splinters  in  the  flesh  to  torture  him 
all  his  life  long.  Anxiety,  fear,  horror,  will 
twine  themselves  round  these  memories. 

A  mother  little  realizes  the  cruel  thing  she  is 
doing  when  she  impresses  upon  a  child's  plastic 
mind  the  terrible  image  of  fear,  which,  like 
letters  cut  on  a  sapling,  grows  wider  and 
deeper  with  age. 

A  perfectly  normal  child,  with  no  inherited 
fear  tendencies,  would  not  know  the  meaning 
of  fear.  It  was  not  intended  that  we  should  be 
followed  and  hounded  through  life  by  this 
demon.  It  is  a  creature  born  in  our  own  brain, 
the  offspring  of  our  own  thinking  and  acting. 
Everywhere  we  see  the  terrible  havoc  that  fear 
has  wrought  in  human  lives.  The  premature 
wrinkles,  the  gray  hair,  the  stooping  shoul- 


FEAR,    CURSE   OF   THE    RACE     247 

ders,  the  anxious  faces  we  see  on  all  sides  are 
the  out-picturing  of  foreboding  fear  thought. 

A  noted  nerve  specialist  says :  "  Thousands 
of  times  I  have  been  compelled  to  recognize 
the  sad  fact  that  at  least  eighty  per  cent  of 
morbidly  timid  children  could  have  been  cured 
and  saved,  in  time,  by  common-sense  prin- 
ciples of  psychological  and  physiological  hy- 
giene, in  which  the  main  factor  is  suggestion 
inspired  by  wholesome  courage." 

It  is  much  easier  for  the  mother  or  nurse 
to  frighten  a  child  into  submission  than  to 
soothe  it,  reason  with  it,  and  the  weak,  igno- 
rant, thoughtless  mother  constantly  appeals  to 
the  child's  fear  as  the  quickest,  most  effect- 
ive means  of  securing  obedience. 

"  Fear  runs  like  a  baleful  thread  through 
the  whole  web  of  Hfe  from  beginning  to  end," 
says  Dr.  Holcomb.  "  We  are  born  into  the 
atmosphere  of  fear  and  dread,  and  the  mother 
who  bore  us  had  lived  in  the  same  atmosphere 
for  weeks  and  months  before  we  were  born. 
We  are  afraid  of  our  parents,  afraid  of  our 
teachers,  afraid  of  our  playmates,  afraid  of 
ghosts,  afraid  of  rules  and  regulations  and 
punishments,  afraid  of  the  doctor,  the  dentist, 
the  surgeon.  Our  adult  life  is  a  state  of  chronic 
anxiety,  which  is  fear  in  a  milder  form.  We 


248     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

are  afraid  of  failure  in  business,  afraid  of  dis- 
appointments and  mistakes,  afraid  of  enemies, 
open  or  concealed  ;  afraid  of  poverty,  afraid  of 
public  opinion,  afraid  of  accidents,  of  sickness, 
of  death,  and  unhappiness  after  death.  Man  is 
like  a  haunted  animal  from  the  cradle  to  the 
grave,  the  victim  of  real  or  imaginary  fears, 
not  only  his  own,  but  those  reflected  upon  him 
from  the  superstitions,  self-deceptions,  sensory 
illusions,  false  beliefs,  and  concrete  errors  of 
the  whole  human  race,  past  and  present." 

Most  of  us  are  foolish  children,  afraid  of 
our  shadows,  so  handicapped  in  a  thousand 
ways  that  we  cannot  get  efficiency  into  our 
life  work. 

The  recent  spectacle  of  multitudes  of  people 
(many  of  them  waiting  in  line  all  night)  draw- 
ing their  money  out  of  perfectly  solid  banks 
and  trust  companies  is  a  good  illustration  of  the 
power  of  fear  to  bring  about  a  financial  panic, 
even  in  the  midst  of  prosperity.  There  was 
absolutely  no  real  cause  for  this  panic  which, 
for  a  time,  played  such  havoc  in  the  financial 
world.  It  was  started  by  gamblers  and  pro- 
moters, who  were  posing  as  bankers ;  men  who 
used  sacred  trust  assets  to  rig  the  stock  mar- 
ket, and  to  promote  their  own  schemes  gen- 
erally. This  financial  storm  came  out  of  a  clear 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  249 

sky,  and  when  we  were  enjoying  unusual  pros- 
perity. Capital  was  well  employed ;  compara- 
tively few  people  were  out  of  work  in  the 
entire  country.  Almost  any  one,  with  any  sort 
of  ability,  who  was  willing'  to  work,  could  find 
employment.  There  was  no  extended  economic 
disturbance  anywhere,  and  the  business  of  our 
marvellous  country  was  never  in  better  con- 
dition. 

The  moment  a  distrust  is  expressed  by  a 
few  leading  financiers  in  a  town,  weaker,  less 
acute  minds  naturally  magnify  their  fears  and 
spread  their  doubts  until  the  whole  community 
is  aflFected.  Then  the  panic  contagion  trickles 
through  the  masses  until  we  hear  hard  times 
talked  about  by  the  day  laborer,  discussed 
everywhere,  in  the  cars,  on  the  streets,  in  the 
saloons,  and  the  imagination  pictures  multi- 
tudes out  of  work  and  hungry. 

In  other  words,  the  mind  is  set  toward  the 
things  people  expect  and  believe  are  coming, 
and,  of  course,  this  tends  to  bring  them  about. 
If  they  would  stop  talking  down  and  would 
talk  up,  they  could  arrest  these  mental  hard- 
time  panics,  as  confidence  is  almost  omnip- 
otent. Of  course  panics  often  have  a  real 
cause — as  the  shortage  of  crops — but  even  then 
they  are  exaggerated   very  greatly   by   fear, 


250     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

which  always  predicts  infinitely  worse  condi- 
tions than  actually  materialize^ 

What  sufferers  many  of  us  are  for  fear  of 
the  criticism  and  ridicule  of  others!  How 
many  people  live  in  terror  of  Mrs.  Grundy, 
or  what  people  will  think !  Every  step  they  take 
in  life  they  suffer  from  fear  of  what  others 
will  say.  Many  people  are  more  afraid  of  ridi- 
cule than  almost  anything  else.  Oh,  how  many 
victims  fear  has  put  into  the  grave!  It  has 
driven  people  into  all  sorts  of  crime  through 
unbalancing  the  mind.  It  has  caused  terrible 
tragedies  in  human  life. 

One  pathetic  case  is  that  of  an  Indiana 
farmer  who  was  asked  to  come  to  the  office  of 
his  friend,  a  physician,  supposedly  for  a 
friendly  purpose.  He  found  the  members  of 
the  lunacy  board  there  to  inquire  into  his 
sanity.  " 

"  My  God,  John !  "  he  exclaimed,  looking 
at  his  friend,  "  would  you  send  me  to  the  mad- 
house ? "  After  this  exclamation  he  became 
speechless,  then  unconscious,  half  paralyzed, 
and  died  in  a  few  hours. 

A  Dutch  painter  went  into  a  room  filled  with 
skeletons  and  other  anatomical  subjects,  in  or- 
der to  make  sketches  for  a  painting.  He  was 
weary,    and    fell    asleep.    Suddenly    he    was 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  251 

aroused  by  an  earthquake  shock.  The  awful 
picture  of  shaking  skeletons  that  confronted 
him  on  awakening  so  terrified  the  painter  that 
he  threw  himself  out  of  a  window,  and,  al- 
though he  received  no  physical  injury,  he  died 
of  a  nervous  tremor. 

There  are  many  instances  of  soldiers  who 
have  died  of  fright  because  they  thought  they 
had  been  fatally  shot,  when  the  bullets  or  shells 
had  not  even  penetrated  the  body. 

Dr.  William  E.  Parker,  of  New  Orleans, 
says  he  was  once  asked  to  attend  a  big  negro 
who  had  been  taken  to  the  hospital  in  an  am- 
bulance. The  students  in  charge  of  the  ambu- 
lance had  frightened  the  man  by  telling  him 
that  he  had  been  mortally  wounded  by  the 
bullet  which  had  struck  him  during  a  fight. 
Although  this  negro  was  big,  robust,  and  black, 
yet  he  became  almost  white  with  fear,  and 
"  the  convulsive  tremors  that  shook  him  from 
time  to  time  revealed  a  state  of  collapse  that 
might  end  in  death  at  any  time."  Investigation 
showed  that  there  had  been  no  outward  flow 
of  blood,  but  that  the  negro  had  been  told  by 
the  students  that  there  might  be  a  fatal  inter- 
nal hemorrhage.  He  knew  he  had  been  hit,  for 
he  had  seen  the  hole  made  by  the  bullet  in  his 
clothing,  and  his  fear  increased  rather  than 


252     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

diminished.  Examination  revealed  the  fact 
that  the  bullet  had  not  entered  his  body  at  all. 
It  had  struck  a  button  and  flattened  out,  and 
when  his  clothing  was  removed  it  dropped  to 
the  floor.  When  the  doctor  held  up  the  flat- 
tened bullet  for  the  negro  to  see,  he  was  in  a 
state  of  collapse.  In  an  instant  the  blood  re- 
turned to  his  face,  the  pulse  and  the  tempera- 
ture quickly  became  normal,  a  grateful  sparkle 
lit  up  the  almost  glassy  eyeballs,  and  the  broad- 
est possible  grin  spread  over  the  face  of  the 
erstwhile  dying  man. 

The  negro  got  down  from  the  table  and, 
after  apologizing  for  the  trouble  he  had  given, 
walked  away  in  perfect  health,  although  only 
a  few  minutes  before  he  had  been  very  near 
death. 

It  is  well  known  that  when  a  man's  foot  is 
caught  in  what  is  called  a  "  frog  in  the  switch  " 
of  a  railroad  track  so  that  he  cannot  withdraw 
it,  and  he  realizes  that  a  train  is  rushing  upon 
him  with  no  possibility  of  his  escaping,  the 
terror  of  impending  death  from  the  approach- 
ing train  so  poisons  his  blood  that,  even  though 
he  is  rescued,  death  usually  results. 

Courage  should  be  taught  in  the  schools, 
because  everything  that  men  strive  for — suc- 
cess  and  happiness — are  dependent  upon  it. 


FEAR,    CURSE   OF   THE   RACE     253 

Then,  again,  it  enhances  tremendously  the 
power  of  all  the  other  mental  faculties.  Cour- 
age compensates  for  many  defects  and  weak- 
nesses. 

A  man  who  is  filled  with  fear  is  not  a  real 
man.  He  is  a  puppet,  a  mannikin,  an  apology 
of  a  man. 

Quit  fearing  things  that  may  never  happen, 
just  as  you  would  quit  any  bad  practice  which 
has  caused  you  suffering.  Fill  your  mind 
with  courage,  hope,  and  confidence. 

Do  not  wait  until  fear  thoughts  become  in- 
trenched in  your  mind  and  your  imagination. 
Do  not  dwell  upon  them.  Apply  the  antidote 
instantly,  and  the  enemies  will  flee.  There  is 
no  fear  so  great  or  intrenched  so  deeply  in  the 
mind  that  it  cannot  be  neutralized  or  entirely 
eradicated  by  its  opposite.  The  opposite  sug- 
gestion will  kill  it. 

Once  Dr.  Chalmers  was  riding  on  a  stage- 
coach beside  the  driver,  and  he  noticed  that 
John  kept  hitting  the  off  leader  a  severe 
crack  with  his  whip.  When  he  asked  him  why 
he  did  this,  John  answered :  "  Away  yonder 
there  is  a  white  stone ;  that  off  leader  is  afraid 
of  that  stone;  so  by  the  crack  of  my  whip 
and  the  pain  in  his  legs  I  w'ant  to  get  his  idea 
off  from  it."  Dr.  Chalmers  went  home,  elabo- 


254     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

rated  the  idea,  and  wrote  "  The  Expulsive 
Power  of  a  New  Affection."  You  must  drive 
out  fear  by  putting  a  new  idea  into  the  mind. 

Fear,  in  any  of  its  expressions,  like  worry 
or  anxiety,  cannot  live  an  instant  in  your  mind 
in  the  presence  of  the  thought,  the  image  of 
courage,  fearlessness,  confidence,  hope,  self- 
assurance,  self-reliance.  Fear  is  a  consciousness 
of  weakness.  It  is  only  when  you  doubt  your 
ability  to  cope  with  the  thing  you  dread  that 
fear  is  possible.  Fear  of  disease,  even,  comes 
from  a  consciousness  that  you  will  not  be  able 
to  successfully  combat  it. 

Napoleon  used  to  visit  the  plague  hospitals 
even  when  the  physicians  dreaded  to  go,  and 
actually  put  his  hands  upon  the  plague-stricken 
patients.  He  said  the  man  who  was  not  afraid 
could  vanquish  the  plague. 

Dr.  Tuke,  in  his  splendid  book,  "  Influence 
of  the  Mind  Upon  the  Body,"  says  that  many 
diseases  are  produced  by  fear,  in  its'  various 
forms.  "  Insanity,  idiocy,  paralysis  of  various 
muscles  and  organs,  profuse  perspirations, 
cholerina,  jaundice,  turning  of  the  hair  gray 
in  a  short  time,  baldness,  sudden  decay  of  the 
teeth,  nervous  shock  followed  by  fatal  anaemia, 
uterine  troubles,  malformation  of  embryo 
through    the   mother,    skin   disease — such    as 


FEAR,    CURSE   OF   THE   RACE     255 

erysipelas,  eczema,  and  many  other  diseases," 
he  declares,  "  are  produced  by  these  terrible 
health  enemies." 

He  further  says  that  "  when  yellow  fever, 
cholera,  smallpox,  diphtheria,  and  other  malig- 
nant diseases  obtain  a  footing  in  a  community, 
hundreds  and  thousands  of  people  fall  victims 
to  their  mental  conditions,  which  invite  the  at- 
tack (by  destroying  the  resisting  and  protect- 
ing power  of  the  body)  and  insure  its  fatality." 

During  an  epidemic  of  a  dreaded  contagious 
disease,  people  who  are  especially  susceptible 
and  full  of  fear  become  panic-stricken  through 
the  cumulative  effect  of  hearing  the  subject 
talked  about  and  discussed  on  every  hand  and 
the  vivid  pictures  which  come  from  reading 
the  newspapers.  Their  minds  (as  in  the  case 
of  yellow  fever)  become  full  of  images  of  the 
disease,  of  its  symptoms — black  vomit,  delir- 
ium,— and  of  death,  mourning,  and  funerals. 

Dr.  W.  H.  Holcomb,  an  authority  upon  con- 
tagious diseases,  gives  it  as  his  opinion  that, 
in  a  case  of  extreme  fear,  no  microbes  or  bac- 
teria are  needed  to  produce  an  outburst  of 
yellow  fever.  Fear  itself  is  a  contagious  dis- 
ease. It  needs  no  speech  or  sign  to  propagate 
it.  It  passes  from  one  to  another  with  light- 
ning speed,  he  says.   Thus,  malignant  influ- 


256     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ences  may  be  cast  around  us  by  even  our  best 
friends  and  would-be  helpers. 

Dr.  Holcomb  refers  to  an  extensive  epi- 
demic of  fear  throughout  the  Southern  States, 
in  1888,  when  yellow  fever  was  in  Jackson- 
ville, Fla.  This  mental  malady,  he  says,  visited 
all  the  little  towns  and  villages  in  the  South. 
There  was  exhibited  on  a  small  scale  in  those 
localities  that  same  principle  of  terror  which  is 
manifested  in  a  burning  theatre,  on  a  sinking 
ship,  or  in  a  stampeded  army,  when  brave  men 
suddenly  become  cowards,  wise  men  fools,  and 
merciful  men  brutes.  Truly,  something  ought 
to  be  done  for  the  moral  treatment  of  yellow 
fever. 

A  noted  authority  says  that  in  the  case  of 
pulmonary  consumption  we  are  now  witness- 
ing a  non-contagious  disease  in  the  very 
process  of  transformation  into  a  contagious 
disease  through  centuries  of  fear,  worry,  and 
terror.  There  is  no  doubt  that  multitudes  of 
people  have  developed  this  dreaded  disease 
mentally  from  the  very  deterioration  in  the 
body  caused  by  the  constant  presence  of  terror 
in  the  mind.  Dr.  Loomis  actually  classifies 
tuberculosis  among  the  miasmatic  contagious 
diseases — fear  will  do  the  rest. 

The  recent  cholera  epidemic  in  Russia  gave 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  257 

a  remarkable  instance  of  the  paralyzing  effect 
of  fright  or  terror  upon  people,  especially  the 
ignorant  classes.  ]\Iany  persons  who  were 
taken  to  the  hospitals  apparently  affected 
with  all  the  characteristic  symptoms  of  the  dis- 
ease, were  found,  upon  examination,  to  be  suf- 
fering from  nothing  whatever  except  fear. 
There  was  not  in  reality  a  single  physical  indi- 
cation of  the  disease  itself.  The  prefect  of  St. 
Petersburg  was  obliged  to  issue  a  proclamation 
to  allay  the  fear  panic.  Even  in  cases  of  real 
cholera,  persons  died  in  fifteen  minutes  after 
contracting  the  disease.  There  is  no  doubt  that 
the  dread  of  it  increased  the  fatality  of  the 
disease,  and  hastened  the  end  by  destroying 
or  paralyzing  the  natural  resisting  power  of 
the  body. 

The  sacred  books  of  all  nations,  except  the 
Chinese,  give  much  prominence  to  the  motive 
of  fear.  It  has  been  used  for  spiritual  control, 
even  as  it  has  been,  time  out  of  mind,  for  dis- 
cipline in  the  domestic  circle. 

Much  of  our  so-called  "  Christianity  "  has 
been  merely  nominal ;  superstitions  of  pagan 
Europe  have  intermingled  with  the  religious 
teachings  of  Christendom,  the  fear  motive  be- 
ing thus  so  emphasized  as  to  terrorize  the  com- 
mon mind. 


258     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Think  of  the  terrible  sugg-estions  which  the 
old-time  preacher  put  into  the  minds  of  his 
flock  through  his  sermons  on  eternal  punish- 
ment and  the  unpardonable  sin.  Think  of  pro- 
jecting such  horrible  pictures  upon  the  mind 
of  a  child! 

The  happiness  of  vast  multitudes  of  people 
has  been  ruined  by  the  fear  of  punishment  after 
death.  I  have  seen  mothers  made  miserable 
for  many  years  because  their  sons  or  daugh- 
ters could  not  accept  the  doctrine  of  eternal 
punishment ;  could  not  believe  that  the  Creator 
would  be  ultimately  foiled  in  His  effort  to 
bring  His  own  children  into  harmony  and  hap- 
piness. 

Who  can  ever  estimate  the  suflfering,  the 
anxiety,  the  baseless  remorse,  which  the  old 
doctrines  of  everlasting  punishment  and  hell 
fire  caused  among  the  early  Puritans  and  their 
descendants?  Doubtless  the  old-time  clergy- 
men honestly  believed  they  were  justified  in 
using  the  fear  club  as  a  check  to  crime,  and  no 
doubt  many  people  have  been  kept  from  com- 
mitting great  offences  through  fear  of  eternal 
punishment;  but  who  can  ever  estimate  the 
harm,  the  awful  suffering,  which  these  frightful 
suggestions  have  caused  good  people?  If  the 
Church  in  all  ages  had  put  the  same  emphasis 


FEAR,   CURSE   OF   THE   RACE     259 

upon  the  power  of  love  to  reform  and  to  re- 
generate as  it  has  upon  the  awful  consequences 
of  sin,  the  world  would  be  much  further  ad- 
vanced to-day  and  the  race  would  be  free  from 
its  worst  fetter,  its  greatest  enemy — Fear. 

Most  of  us  are  haunted  by  fear  of  some- 
thing great  or  small,  either  in  the  seen  or  the 
unseen  world.  Millions  are  tied  down  by  all 
kinds  of  foolish  superstitions ;  we  are  still  ham- 
pered by  traditions,  by  "  bogies  "  and  fears,  by 
myths  of  good  luck  and  bad  luck,  that  have 
been  handed  down  from  generation  to  genera- 
tion. We  are  still  the  slaves  of  ideas  born  of 
ignorance,  and  that  have  long  ago  been  swept 
aside  by  education  and  science  as  the  baseless 
figments  of  a  crude  civilization  or  utter  sav- 
agery. 

Many,  even,  who  affect  to  laugh  at  silly 
superstitions,  are  unconsciously  influenced  by 
them.  How  many  intelligent  people,  for  in- 
stance, are  affected  by  the  superstitions  about 
Friday  and  the  number  thirteen!  It  does  not 
seem  possible  that  a  child  ten  years  old  can 
be  so  silly  as  to  believe  that  there  is  any  power 
in  mere  figures  to  harm  him,  yet  mature  men 
and  women  dread  them  as  some  tangible  evil 
thing.  Some  hotels  have  no  room  or  suite  of 
that  number,  because  they  find  them  unrent- 


26o     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

able,  and  many  builders  will  not  allow  their 
houses  to  be  so  numbered.  They  use  twelve 
and  a  half  instead. 

Think  of  an  inanimate  sign,  or  mechanical 
figures,  which  could  not  even  move  themselves 
a  hairbreadth  in  eons  of  time,  think  of  their 
moving  human  beings  or  having  anything 
whatever  to  do  with  their  fate !  If  the  number 
thirteen  can  influence  a  human  being,  how  does 
it  do  it?  There  can  be  no  effect  without  a 
cause.  Can  these  figures  move?  Is  there  any 
life,  any  force  in  them?  Can  they  cause  any- 
thing? Do  they  know  anything?  Is  there  any 
intelligence  in  them?  Did  any  one  ever  see 
anything  that  they  have  accomplished  ? 

Actors  and  singers,  as  a  class,  are  particu- 
larly noted  for  their  superstitions.  An  amusing 
instance  of  their  slavish  subservience  to  the 
"  13  "  superstition  occurred  recently  in  New 
York. 

Signor  Campanini,  the  Italian  director  of  the 
Manhattan  Opera  House,  with  a  number  of 
grand  opera  "  stars,"  arrived  in  New  York 
harbor  aboard  the  North  German  Lloyd 
steamer,  Kaiser  Wilhehn  dcr  Grosse,  on  Octo- 
ber 13th.  In  spite  of  the  pleadings  of  Oscar 
Hammerstein,  impresario  of  the  Manhattan 
Opera  House,  neither  the  director  nor  any  of 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  261 

the  singers  could  be  persuaded  to  land,  be- 
cause, they  said,  they  dared  not  take  the 
chance  of  having  bad  luck  by  landing  on 
the  thirteenth, 

"  It  is  curious,  no  doubt,"  Campanini  said  to 
an  interviewer,  "  but  most  Italians  and  all 
artists  avoid  doing  anything  important  on  the 
thirteenth  of  the  month.  Had  I  landed  last 
night  I  should  have  been  most  unhappy.  So 
would  my  wife  [Eva  Tetrazzini].  We  would 
have  feared  for  the  success  of  the  Manhattan 
opera  season.  Not  that  we  feel  ourselves  to  be 
the  greatest  element  of  success  of  the  company, 
but  some  dire  catastrophe  might  come  to  the 
company  through  us.  Feeling  thus,  I  would  not 
have  braved  the  hoodoo  of  landing  on  October 
13th  for  anything." 

What  possible  power  can  an  arbitrary  day 
of  the  week  have  upon  any  human  being?  The 
day  we  call  Friday  is  a  mere  mechanical  divi- 
sion of  time,  a  mere  arbitrary  name  of  the 
sixth  day  of  the  week,  given  it  by  man  for  his 
own  convenience.  Is  there  any  intelligence  in 
the  word  Friday,  any  brain,  force,  or  life 
there?  Then,  if  not,  how  can  it  cause  any 
disaster  to  your  enterprises?  Nevertheless,  the 
superstition  of  "  Unlucky  Friday  "  has  a  pow- 
erful influence  upon  multitudes  of  lives.  There 


262     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

are  thousands  of  men  and  women  who  would 
never  think  of  starting  on  a  journey  or  of 
beginning  an  important  undertaking  on  this 
day. 

Then  there  are  others  who  are  slaves  to  the 
clairvoyant  fortune-tellers.  Think  of  the  thou- 
sands of  people  who  are  made  wretchedly  un- 
happy and  lose  courage  and  heart  because  of 
the  cruel  predictions  of  these  ignorant  people ! 
I  know  some  very  intelligent  men  and  women 
who  live  under  the  domination  of  these  fortune 
quacks.  They  undertake  nothing  of  importance 
without  consulting  the  astrologer  or  clair- 
voyant. If  they  lose  anything,  they  immediately 
go  to  these  people  for  advice. 

Think  of  the  influence  of  being  told  that 
some  misfortune  will  overtake  one  at  a  certain 
age,  that  he  will  lose  his  wife  and  children  at 
a  certain  time,  or  that  he  will  die  at  the  age 
of  forty ! 

No  wonder  that  many  of  these  things  come 
to  pass,  because  it  is  a  scientific  law  of  thought 
that  what  we  greatly  fear  tends  to  come  to  us. 

When  Lord  Byron  was  a  boy,  he  was  told 
by  a  fortune-teller  that  he  would  die  in  the 
thirty-seventh  year  of  his  age.  The  thought 
haunted  him,  and  when  he  became  ill  during 
that  year  he  said  there  was  no  hope  of  his 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  263 

recovery,  that  it  was  destined  he  should  die 
within  that  year.  This  conviction  destroyed  his 
power  of  disease  resistance,  and  he  succumbed 
to  the  malady  from  which  he  was  suffering. 
Only  recently  a  New  York  man  committed 
suicide  because  his  horoscope  warned  him  of 
three  fatal  days  in  his  life — the  thirteenth,  the 
twenty-seventh,  and  the  thirtieth  of  a  certain 
month. 

It  is  impossible  to  convince  children  who 
have  had  colored  mammies  for  nurses  that 
there  are  not  such  things  as  ghosts.  They  peo- 
ple the  darkness  with  all  sorts  of  hobgoblins, 
and  think  the  "  Bogey  Man  "  will  spirit  them 
away  if  they  dare  go  into  a  dark  place  alone. 
Many  white  people  of  the  South  are  saturated 
with  superstition  absorbed  from  their  colored 
mammies. 

A  volume  could  be  filled  with  the  silly  and 
ignorant  superstitions  that  fetter  and  hold 
down  not  only  savage  peoples  and  the  unedu- 
cated of  the  higher  races,  but  also  millions  of 
the  intelligent  and  educated  all  over  the  world. 
Superstition  has  always  and  everywhere  ac- 
companied ignorance ;  the  more  ignorant  a 
people,  the  more  superstitious  they  are ;  and  the 
more  enlightened  and  educated  they  become, 
the  freer  they  are  from  all  superstitious  ideas. 


264     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

All  errors  die  hard,  but  the  school  and  the 
college,  the  periodical  and  the  newspaper  of 
to-day  are  burying-grounds  for  vast  numbers 
of  superstitions.  When  a  young  student  begins 
to  think  for  himself,  to  get  his  eyes  open,  he 
associates  his  old  fears  and  superstitions  with 
ignorance  and  is  ashamed  to  be  influenced  by 
them  any  longer. 

The  best  of  all  cures  for  superstition  or  fear 
is  the  knowledge  that  it  has  no  reality,  but  is 
only  a  creature  of  the  imagination,  a  picture 
drawn  by  a  morbid  mind.  The  perfectly  healthy 
mind  knows  no  fear. 

If  fear,  in  all  its  phases,  could  be  removed 
from  the  human  mind,  civilization  would  go 
forward  by  leaps  and  bounds.  It  is  this  ghastly 
spectre  that  is  holding  many  people  down.  It 
causes  more  suffering,  more  loss,  more  mis- 
fortune, more  failure,  and  makes  more  real 
slaves  than  any  actual  factor  in  human  life. 
Yet,  notwithstanding  the  terrible  grip  this 
monster  has  upon  human  life,  it  can  be  con- 
quered, thrust  out  of  our  lives  absolutely,  as 
easily  as  any  other  mental  foe  or  enemy  of 
our  peace  and  happiness. 

The  new  philosophy  teaches  us  that  we  are 
practically  the  masters  of  our  own  destiny ; 
that  we  can,  by  counter  suggestions,  kill  any 


FEAR,  CURSE  OF  THE  RACE  265 

of  our  prosperity  or  happiness  enemies.  It 
teaches  us  that  there  is  no  great  power  in 
the  universe  that  sends  misfortunes,  but,  on 
the  contrary,  that  there  is  a  great  creative 
Power  which  holds  us,  shields  us,  and  be- 
stows on  us  all  the  bounty  and  prosperity, 
all  the  happiness  and  blessedness  we  open 
our  minds  to  receive. 

The  coming  man  will  not  be  fettered  or  held 
down  by  superstitions  of  any  kind ;  he  will  have 
no  fear,  because  he  will  have  the  knowledge 
which  shows  him  that  all  fears  are  but  ghosts, 
without  entity — mere  phantoms,  creations  of  a 
disordered  imagination,  children  of  ignorance. 


XV.    SELF-CONTROL    VS.    THE 
EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS 


XV.    SELF-CONTROL    VS. 
EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS 


THE 


ROVE  to  me,"  says  Mrs.  Oli- 
phant,  "  that  you  can  control 
yourself,  and  I'll  say  you're 
an  educated  man ;  and  with- 
out this,  all  other  education 
is  good  for  next  to  nothing." 
No  one  can  expect  to  ac- 
complish anything  very  great  when  he  is  not 
king  of  himself. 

The  lack  of  self-control  has  ruined  multi- 
tudes of  men  with  high  ambition,  rare  ability, 
and  great  education,  men  of  immense  promise 
in  every  way. 

Every  day  the  papers  tell  us  of  those  who, 
in  a  fit  of  anger,  have  struck  the  fatal  blow 
or  fired  the  cruel  shot  that  has  cost  them  a 
friend  and  their  own  lives  or  liberty. 

Ask  the  wretched  victims  in  our  state  prisons 
and  in  our  penitentiaries  what  a  hot  temper 
has  cost  them.  How  many  of  these  unfortu- 
nates have  lost  their  liberty  for  life  through  a 
fit  of  hot  temper  which  may  have  lasted  but  a 
minute !  The  cruel  shot  was  fired,  the  trigger 
was  pulled  in  an  instant,  but  the  friend  re- 
turned never,  the  crime  could  not  be  undone. 

269 


270     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Oh,  the  tragedies  that  have  been  enacted 
when  the  blood  was  hot  with  anger ! 

Many  a  man  has  lost  a  good  position,  has 
sacrificed  the  opportunity  of  a  lifetime  in  a 
fit  of  bad  temper.  He  has  thrown  away  in  the 
anger  of  a  moment,  perhaps,  the  work  and 
experience  of  years  in  climbing  to  his  position. 

I  know  a  very  able  editor  who  has  occupied 
splendid  positions  on  the  best  and  greatest 
dailies  in  the  country.  He  is  a  forceful,  vigor- 
ous, masterful  writer  on  a  great  variety  of  sub- 
jects, a  fine  historian,  and  a  warm,  tender- 
hearted man,  who  will  do  anything  for  any 
one  in  need,  and  yet  he  is  almost  a  total 
failure  because  of  his  explosive  temper.  He 
does  riot  hesitate  in  the  heat  of  a  moment's 
anger  to  walk  out  of  a  position  which  it  has 
taken  him  years  to  get.  This  man  is  conscious 
of  ability  second  to  none,  yet  he  has  drifted 
from  pillar  to  post,  hardly  able  to  support  his 
family,  and  he  must  go  through  life  conscious 
that  he  is  the  slave  of  a  bad  temper. 

Everywhere  we  see  victims  of  an  uncon- 
trolled temper  tripping  themselves  up,  losing 
in  a  few  moments,  perhaps,  all  they  have 
gained  in  months,  or  maybe  in  a  lifetime.  They 
are  continually  climbing  and  dropping  back- 
ward. 


THE   EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS     271 

I  know  several  old  men  whose  whole  ca- 
reers have  been  crippled  by  their  hot  tempers. 
They  could  not  refrain  from  giving  people 
with  whom  they  had  differences  "  a  piece  of 
their  mind."  No  matter  how  adversely  it  af- 
fected their  own  interests,  or  what  was  at 
stake,  they  would  let  their  tongues  and  tem- 
pers have  full  sway. 

A  pretty  costly  business,  this,  of  giving  an- 
other person  "  a  piece  of  your  mind  "  when 
your  temper  is  up ! 

I  know  a  very  able  business  man  who  has 
practically  ruined  his  reputation  and  his  busi- 
ness by  his  passion  for  telling  people  what  he 
thinks  when  he  gets  angry  with  them.  When 
his  temper  is  aroused  there  is  nothing  too  mean 
or  contemptible  for  him  to  say.  He  calls  them 
all  sorts  of  names.  He  raves  without  reason 
or  sense.  He  drives  his  employees  away  from 
him.  It  is  almost  impossible  for  him  to  keep 
any  one  with  any  spirit  or  ability. 

I  have  seen  people  in  the  grip  of  passion  or 
anger  act  more  like  demons  than  human  be- 
ings. I  recall  one  man  who,  when  possessed  by 
one  of  these  terrible  fits  of  anger,  would  smash 
everything  he  could  lay  his  hands  on,  and  pour 
forth  a  volley  of  the  vilest  abuse  upon  any  one 
who  got  in  his  way  or  attempted  to  restrain 


272     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

him.  I  have  seen  him  almost  kill  animals  in 
his  rage  by  striking  them  with  clubs  or  fence 
sticks.  His  eyes  would  glare  like  a  madman's 
and  people  who  knew  him  would  run  for  their 
lives.  He  was  for  the  time  a  maniac  and  did 
not  seem  to  have  the  slightest  idea  of  what  he 
was  doing  when  this  demon  of  anger  had  pos- 
session of  him.  After  his  passion  storm  had 
subsided,  although  a  robust  man,  he  would  be 
completely  exhausted  for  a  long  time. 

A  man  in  a  fit  of  uncontrolled  passion  is 
really  temporarily  insane.  He  is  under  control 
of  the  demon  in  him.  No  man  is  sane  when 
he  cannot  completely  control  his  acts.  While  in 
that  condition  he  is  liable  to  do  things  which 
he  would  regret  all  the  rest  of  his  life.  Many  a 
man  has  been  obliged  to  look  back  over  a 
scarred  discordant  life,  a  life  filled  with  un- 
utterable  mortifications  and  humiliations  be- 
cause of  a  hot  temper,  because  he  did  not  learn 
to  control  himself. 

What  writer,  what  artist  could  ever  depict 
the  havoc  which  the  whole  brood  of  evil  pas- 
sions— anger,  jealousy,  revenge,  and  hatred — 
have  played  in  human  lives.  Just  think  of  the 
effect  on  one's  character  of  harboring  for 
many  years  the  determination,  the  passion  to 
get  square  with  an  imagined  enemy,  and  of 


THE    EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS     273 

waiting  for  the  opportunity  to  wreak  ven- 
geance upon  some  one. 

Think  how  much  a  violent  explosion  of  tem- 
per takes  out  of  one's  entire  system,  mental 
and  physical !  Much  more  than  many  weeks  of 
hard  work  when  in  a  normal  condition.  And 
then  picture,  if  you  can,  the  terrible  after  suf- 
fering, the  humiliation  of  it  all,  the  remorse 
and  chagrin,  the  loss  of  self-respect,  the  shock 
to  one's  finer  sensibilities,  when  one  comes  to 
himself  and  realizes  what  has  happened ! 

A  fit  of  anger  may  work  greater  damage 
to  the  body  and  character  than  a  drunken 
bout.  Hatred  may  leave  worse  scars  upon  a 
clean  life  than  the  bottle.  Jealousy,  envy,  an- 
ger, uncontrolled  grief  may  do  more  to  wreck 
the  physical  life  than  many  years  of  excessive 
smoking.  Anxiety,  fretting,  and  scolding  may 
instil  a  more  subtle  poison  into  the  system  than 
the  cigarette. 

"  Many  a  soul  is  in  a  bad  condition  to-day 
because  of  the  fire  of  anger  which  recently 
burned  there." 

There  is  no  doubt  that  an  uncontrolled  tem- 
per shortens  many  lives.  Some  people  fly  into 
such  a  rage  that  they  will  tremble  for  hours 
afterwards  and  be  wholly  unfitted  for  business 
or  work. 


274     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

I  have  known  a  whole  family  completely  to 
upset  their  physical  conditions  and  make  them- 
selves ill  by  a  violent  quarrel.  They  would 
almost  tear  one  another  to  pieces  by  their  ex- 
plosive passions.  In  a  shcit  time  their  faces 
were  transformed.  You  could  see  the  demons 
of  passion  fighting  there.  We  all  know  that 
such  quarrelling,  as  well  as  backbiting,  twit- 
ting, denunciation,  and  criticism  can  produce 
but  one  result,  and  that  it  would  be  simply  im- 
possible for  such  causes  to  produce  harmony. 

How  many  people  at  the  mercy  of  an  uncon- 
trolled passion  have  slain  members  of  their  own 
family  or  friends  whom  ten  minutes  before 
nothing  could  have  induced  them  to  harm! 
Naturally  good  people  commit  fiendish  crimes 
when  blinded  by  passion. 

I  know  a  woman  who  allows  herself  to  be  so 
swept  away  by  a  storm  of  rage  that  after  it  has 
subsided  she  is  completely  exhausted ;  for  days 
she  is  as  weak  as  a  child  and  looks  as  though 
she  had  been  through  some  terrible  ordeal.  A 
violent  headache,  or  some  other  form  of  physi- 
cal disturbance,  invariably  follows. 

Physicians  well  know  how  violent  fits  of 
jealousy  tear  the  nervous  system  to  pieces  so 
that  the  victim  is  often  a  complete  wreck  for 
a  long  time.  I  have  seen  a  woman  so  trans- 


THE    EXPLOSIVE   PASSIONS     275 

formed  in  a  single  year  by  the  domination  of 
this  terrible  demon  in  the  mind  that  her  friends 
scarcely  knew  her. 

When  jealousy  once  gets  possession  of  a  per- 
son it  changes  and  colors  the  whole  outlook 
upon  life.  Everything  takes  on  the  hue  of  this 
consuming  passion.  The  reasoning  faculties  are 
paralyzed,  and  the  victim  is  completely  within 
the  clutches  of  this  thought  fiend.  Even  the 
brain  structure  is  changed  by  the  harboring  of 
this  fearful  mental  foe. 

Every  little  while  we  see  accounts  of  people 
who  have  dropped  dead  in  a  fit  of  passion. 
The  nervous  shock  of  sudden  and  violent  rage, 
no  matter  what  the  cause,  is  so  great  that  it 
will  sometimes  stop  the  action  of  the  heart, 
especially  if  that  organ  is  weak.  Violent 
paroxysms  of  anger  have  often  produced  apo- 
plexy. A  temper  storm  raging  through  the 
brain  develops  rank  poison  and  leaves  all 
sorts  of  devastation  behind. 

We  often  suffer  tortures  from  the  humilia- 
tion and  loss  of  self-respect  we  bring  upon  our- 
selves by  indulgence  in  fits  of  anger,  in  jeal- 
ousy, hatred,  or  revenge ;  but  we  do  not  realize 
the  permanent  damage,  the  irreparable  injury, 
we  inflict  upon  our  entire  physical  and  mental 
being. 


276     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

An  uncontrolled  passion  in  the  mind  actually 
changes  the  chemical  composition  of  the  vari- 
ous secretions  of  the  body,  developing  deadly 
poisons.  Because  the  mental  forces  are  silent, 
we  do  not  realize  how  tremendously  power- 
ful they  are.  We  have  been  so  accustomed  to 
think  of  disease  and  all  forms  of  physical  ills 
as  the  result  of  some  derangement  in  the  body, 
and  have  associated  their  cure  with  drugs  or 
other  remedies,  that  it  is  difficult  for  us  to  look 
upon  them  as  caused  by  mental  disturbances  or 
discords. 

It  is  well  known  that  a  violent  fit  of  temper 
affects  the  heart  instantly,  and  psychophysi- 
cists  have  discovered  the  presence  of  poison  in 
the  blood  immediately  after  the  mental  storm 
has  passed.  This  explains  why  we  feel  so  de- 
pressed, so  exhausted  and  nervous  after  all 
storms  of  passion,  fear,  worry,  jealousy,  or 
revenge  have  swept  through  the  mind.  It  is 
because  of  the  mental  poison  and  other  harm- 
ful secretions  they  have  left  in  the  brain  and 
blood. 

There  is  no  constitution  so  strong  but  it  will 
ultimately  succumb  to  the  constant  racking  and 
twisting  of  the  nerve  centres  caused  by  an 
uncontrolled  temper.  Every  time  you  become 
angry  you  reverse  all  of  the  normal,  mental, 


THE   EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS     277 

and  physical  processes.  Everything  in  you  re- 
bels against  passion  storms ;  every  mental  fac- 
ulty protests  against  their  abuse. 

If  people  only  realized  what  havoc  indul- 
gence in  hot  temper  plays  in  their  delicate 
nervous  structure,  if  they  could  only  see  with 
the  physical  eyes  the  damage  done,  as  they  can 
see  what  follows  in  the  wake  of  a  tornado, 
they  would  not  dare  to  get  angry. 

The  poison  generated  by  angry  passions  cir- 
culating in  the  blood,  affects  the  centres  of  life 
throughout  the  whole  body.  The  delicate  cells 
of  the  brain  and  nerves  and  all  of  the  internal 
organs,  are  deteriorated  by  the  poison-vitiated 
blood. 

One  reason  why  so  many  people  either  have 
poor  or  indifferent  health  is  because  the  cell 
life  is  continually  starved  and  dwarfed  by 
vitiated  blood.  No  one  can  have  abundant, 
abounding  life,  a  superb  vitality ;  can  reach  his 
greatest  efficiency,  when  this  mental  poisoning 
process  is  constantly  going  on  in  his  system. 

Nothing  else  racks  and  wrenches  the  deli- 
cate nervous  system  more  than  fits  of  uncon- 
trolled temper,  jealousy,  or  raging  passion  of 
any  sort.  The  brain  and  nervous  mechanism 
were  intended  to  run  quietly,  smoothly,  har- 
moniously, and  when  so  run  they  are  capable 


278     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

of  an  enormous  output  in  good  work  and  hap- 
piness. But,  like  a  delicate  piece  of  material 
machinery,  when  overspeeded  or  not  properly 
oiled,  or  when  run  without  a  balance  wheel  to 
steady  their  motion,  they  will  very  quickly 
shake  themselves  to  pieces. 

The  man  who  scolds  and  frets  and  fumes 
and  lets  his  temper  get  the  better  of  him,  little 
realizes  what  havoc  his  humor  is  playing  inside 
of  him,  or  how  he  is  breaking  down  his  health 
and  shortening  his  life. 

There  is  something  wrong  in  the  education, 
the  training  of  the  man  who  cannot  control 
himself,  who  has  to  confess  that  he  is  a  man 
part  of  the  time  only,  that  the  rest  of  the  time 
he  is  a  brute ;  that  often  the  beast  in  him  is 
loose  and  runs  riot  in  his  mental  kingdom  and 
does  what  it  will  until  he  can  get  control  of 
himself  again. 

Zopyrus,  the  physiognomist,  said :  "  Soc- 
rates' features  showed  that  he  was  stupid, 
brutal,  sensual,  and  addicted  to  drunkenness." 
Socrates  upheld  the  analysis  by  saying :  "  By 
nature  I  am  addicted  to  all  these  sins,  and  they 
were  only  restrained  and  vanquished  by  the 
continual  practice  of  virtue." 

The  Creator  has  implanted  in  every  man  a 
divine  power  that  is  more  than  a  match  for  his 


THE   EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS     279 

worst  passion,  for  his  most  vicious  trait.  If  he 
will  only  develop  and  use  this  power  he  need 
not  be  the  slave  of  any  vice. 

Shakespeare  says :  "  Assume  a  virtue  if  you 
have  it  not." 

Emerson  also  says,  in  eflfect :  "  The  virtue  = 
you  would  like  to  have,  assume  it  as  already 
yours,  appropriate  it,  enter  into  the  part  and 
live  the  character  just  as  the  great  actor  is 
absorbed  in  the  character  of  the  part  he  plays." 
No  matter  how  great  your  weakness  or  how 
much  you  may  regret  it,  assume  steadily  and 
persistently  its  opposite  until  you  acquire  the 
habit  of  holding  that  thought,  or  of  living  the 
thing,  not  in  its  weakness,  but  in  its  wholeness, 
in  its  entirety.  Hold  the  ideal  of  an  efficient 
faculty  or  quality,  not  of  a  marred  or  deficient 
one.  The  way  to  reach  or  to  attain  to  anything 
is  to  bend  oneself  toward  it  with  all  one's 
might,  and  we  approximate  it  just  in  propor- 
tion to  the  intensity  and  the  persistency  of  our 
eflfort  to  attain  it. 

If  you  are  inclined  to  storm  and  rage,  or  if' 
you  "  fly  all  to  pieces  "  over  the  least  annoy- 
ance, do  not  waste  your  time  regretting  this 
weakness,  and  telling  everybody  that  you  can- 
not help  it.  Just  assume  the  calm,  deliberate, 
quiet,  balanced  composure  which  characterizes 


28o     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

your  ideal  person  in  that  respect.  Persuade 
yourself  that  you  are  not  hot-tempered,  ner- 
vous, or  excitable,  that  you  can  control  your- 
self;  that  you  are  well  balanced;  that  you  do 
not  fly  off  at  a  tangent  at  every  little  annoy- 
ance. You  will  be  amazed  to  see  how  the  per- 
petual holding  of  this  serene,  calm,  quiet  atti- 
tude will  help  you  to  become  like  your  thought. 
No  matter  what  comes  up,  no  matter  how 
annoying,  or  exasperating  things  may  be,  or 
how  excited  or  disturbed  other  people  around 
you  may  be,  you  will  not  be  thrown  off  your 
centre.  All  we  are  or  ever  have  been  or  ever 
will  be  comes  from  the  quality  and  force  of 
our  thinking. 

A  bad  temper  is  largely  the  result  of  false 
pride,  selfishness,  and  cheap  vanity,  and  no 
man  who  is  worthy  the  name  will  continue  to 
be  governed  by  it.  There  is  nothing  manly  or 
noble  in  the  quality  which  lets  loose  the  "  dogs 
of  war,"  which  in  an  instant  may  make  ene- 
mies of  our  best  friends. 

We  all  know  how  hard  it  is  to  control  our 
feelings  and  our  words  when  the  blood  flows 
hot  through  the  frenzied  brain,  but  we  also 
know  how  dangerous,  how  fatal  it  is  to  become 
slaves  to  temper.  It  not  only  ruins  the  disposi- 
tion and  cripples  efficiency,  but  it  is  also  very 


THE   EXPLOSIVE    PASSIONS     281 

humiliating;  for  a  man  who  cannot  control 
his  own  acts  has  to  acknowledge  that  he  is 
not  his  own  master. 

It  is  dangerous  for  you  even  for  a  few  min- 
utes to  get  down  off  the  throne  of  your  reason 
and  let  the  beast  in  you  reign.  Many  a  person 
has  become  permanently  insane  by  the  growth 
of  the  habit  of  losing  his  temper. 

Think  of  a  man  who  was  intended  to  be  ab- 
solutely master  of  all  the  forces  of  the  universe, 
stepping  down  off  the  throne  of  his  reason  and 
admitting  that  he  is  not  a  man  for  the  time 
being,  confessing  his  inability  to  control  his 
own  acts,  allowing  himself  to  do  the  mean  and 
low  things,  to  say  the  cruel  words  that  hurt 
and  sting,  to  throw  the  hot  javelin  of  sarcasm 
into  the  mind  of  a  perfectly  innocent  person ! 
Think  of  that  madness  which  makes  a  man 
strike  down  his  best  friend,  or  cut  him  to  the 
quick  with  the  cruel  word ! 

Anger  is  temporary  insanity.  A  man  must 
be  insane  when  he  is  in  the  clutches  of  a  demon 
that  has  no  regard  for  life  or  reputation,  a 
demon  which  would  bid  him  kill  his  best 
friend  without  an  instant's  hesitation. 

The  child  learns  by  experience  to  avoid 
touching  hot  things  that  will  burn  him,  sharj) 
things  that  will  cut  him ;  but  many  of  us  adults 


282     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

never  learn  to  avoid  the  hot  temper  which  sears 
and  gives  us  such  intense  suffering,  sometimes 
for  days  and  weeks. 

The  man  who  has  learned  the  secret  of  right 
thinking  and  self-control  knows  just  as  well 
how  to  protect  himself  from  his  mental  enemies 
as  his  physical  ones.  He  knows  that  when  the 
brain  is  on  fire  with  passion,  it  will  not  do  to 
add  more  fuel  by  storming  and  raging,  but  will 
quietly  apply  an  antidote  which  will  put  out  the 
fire — the  serenity  thought,  the  thought  of 
peace,  quiet,  and  harmony.  The  opposite 
thought  will  very  quickly  antidote  the  flames. 
When  a  neighbor's  house  is  on  fire,  we  do 
not  run  with  an  oil-can  to  put  out  the  flames ; 
we  do  not  throw  on  kerosene,  but  an  antidote. 
Yet  when  a  child  is  on  fire  with  passion  we 
have  been  in  the  habit  of  trying  to  put  out 
the  fire  by  adding  fuel  to  it.  What  misery, 
what  crime,  what  untold  suffering  might  be 
prevented  by  training  children  to  self-control, 
by  directing  their  thought  into  proper  chan- 
nels! 

If  we  see  a  person  who  is  mired  in  a  swamp 
and  desperately  struggling  to  extricate  himself, 
we  run  to  his  rescue  without  hesitation.  We 
would  not  think  of  adding  to  his  distress  or 
danger  by  pushing  him  in  deeper.  But  some- 


THE   EXPLOSIVE   PASSIONS     283 

how  when  a  person  is  angered,  instead  of  tr>^- 
ing  to  put  out  the  fire  of  his  passion,  we  only 
add  fuel  to  the  flames.  Yet  people  who  have 
bad  tempers  are  often  grateful  to  those  who 
will  help  them  to  do  what  they  are  not  able 
to  do  themselves,  to  control  them  and  prevent 
them  from  saying  and  doing  that  which  will 
give  them  much  chagrin  afterward. 

When  next  you  see  a  person  whose  inflam- 
mable passion  is  just  ready  to  explode,  and 
you  know  that  he  is  doing  his  best  to  hold  him- 
self down,  why  not  help  him,  instead  of  throw- 
ing on  more  inflammable  material  and  starting 
the  conflagration? 

By  doing  this,  you  will  not  only  render  him 
a  great  service,  but  you  will  also  strengthen 
your  own  power  of  self-control.  The  man  who 
cannot  control  himself  is  like  a  mariner  with- 
out a  compass — he  is  at  the  mercy  of  every 
wind  that  blows.  Every  storm  of  passion,  every 
wave  of  irresponsible  thought  buffets  him 
hither  and  thither,  drives  him  out  of  his  course, 
and  makes  it  wellnigh  impossible  for  him  to 
reach  the  goal  of  his  desires. 

Self-control  is  the  very  essence  of  character. 
To  be  able  to  look  a  man  straight  in  the  eye, 
calmly  and  deliberately,  without  the  slightest 
rufile  of  temper  under  extreme  provocation, 


284     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

gives  a  sense  of  power  which  nothing  else  can 
give.  To  feel  that  you  are  always,  not  some- 
times, master  of  yourself  gives  a  dignity  and 
strength  to  character,  buttresses  it,  supports  it 
on  every  side,  as  nothing  else  can.  This  is  the 
culmination  of  thought  mastery. 


XVI.    GOOD   CHEER— GOD'S 
MEDICINE 


XVI.    GOOD   CHEER— GOD'S 
MEDICINE 

Mirth  is  God's  medicine,  everybody  ought  to  bathe 
in  it.  Grim  care,  moroseness,  anxiety — all  the  rust  of 
life — ought  to  be  scoured  oflF  by  the  oil  of  mirth. — 
Oliver  Wentjell  Holmes. 

"Talk  happiness.  The  world  is  sad  enough  without 
your  woe." 


WOMAN  in  California,  who, 
because  of  crushing  sorrow, 
had  fallen  a  victim  to  de- 
spondency, insomnia,  and  kin- 
dred ills,  determined  to  throw 
off  the  gloom  which  was  mak- 
ing life  so  heavy  a  burden  to 
her,  and  established  a  rule  that  she  would 
laugh  at  least  three  times  a  day,  whether 
occasion  presented  or  not.  Accordingly,  she 
trained  herself  to  laugh  heartily  at  the  least 
provocation,  and  would  retire  to  her  room  and 
make  merry  by  herself.  She  was  soon  in  ex- 
cellent health  and  buoyant  spirits,  and  her 
home  became  a  sunny,  cheerful  abode. 

If  people  only  knew  the  medicinal  power  of 
laughter,  of  good  cheer,  of  the  constant  un- 
repressed  expression  of  joy  and  gladness,  half 
the  physicians  would  be  out  of  work. 

287 


288     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

Did  not  Lycurgus  set  up  the  god  of  laughter 
in  the  Spartan  eating-halls  because  he  thought 
there  was  no  sauce  like  laughter  at  meals  ? 

Laughter  is  undoubtedly  one  of  Nature's 
greatest  tonics.  It  brings  the  disordered  facul- 
ties and  functions  into  harmony;  it  lubricates, 
the  mental  bearings  and  prevents  the  friction 
which  monotonous,  exacting  business  engen- 
ders. It  is  a  divine  gift  bestowed  upon  us  as  a 
life-preserver,  a  health-promoter,  a  joy-gener- 
ator, a  success-maker. 

Laughter,  like  an  air  cushion,  eases  you  over 
the  jolts  and  the  hard  places  on  life's  highway. 
Laughter  is  always  healthy.  It  tends  to  bring 
every  abnormal  condition  back  to  the  normal. 
It  is  a  panacea  for  heartaches,  for  life's  bruises. 
It  is  a  life  prolonger.  People  who  keep  them- 
selves in  physical  and  mental  harmony  through 
hearty  laughter  are  likely  to  live  longer  than 
those  who  take  life  too  seriously. 

In  order  to  become  normal,  the  natural  fun- 
loving  forces  within  us  must  be  released. 
Laughter  is  one  form  of  exercise  which  sets 
them  free,  rescues  men  from  the  "  blues." 

Somewhere  I  have  read  of  a  man  whose 
"  laughing  muscles  "  were  so  paralyzed  that 
his  laughter  sounded  like  a  voice  from  the 
tombs.  American  life  is  so  serious  that  many 


GOOD    CHEER  289 

men  lose  their  power  to  laugh.  They  can  force 
a  little  sepulchral  chuckle,  but  the  genuine  side- 
shaking  laughter  is  almost  a  stranger  to  their 
experience.  They  are  in  such  a  serious  chase 
after  the  dollar,  their  life  is  so  strenuous,  so 
given  to  ^viv;heming  and  planning,  that  they 
do  not  have  much  time  to  laugh.  They  do 
not  know  the  medicinal  value  there  is  in  the 
habit  of  laughter,  how  it  clears  the  cobwebs 
out  of  the  brain,  disposes  of  the  fangs  of  worry 
and  anxiety  and  business  pressure,  takes  the 
mind  off  the  grind  of  things,  removes  friction, 
and  helps  to  make  life  worth  while. 

To  people  who  have  lost  the  laughing  habit 
I  would  say :  Lock  yourself  in  your  room  and 
practise  smiling.  Smile  at  your  pictures,  fur- 
niture, looking-glass,  anything,  just  so  the  stiff 
muscles  are  brought  into  play  again. 

In  a  corner  of  his  desk  Lincoln  kept  a  copy 
of  the  latest  humorous  iclork,  and  it  was  his 
habit  when  fatigued,  annoyed,  or  depressed,  to 
take  this  up  and  read  a  chapter  for  relief. 
Humor,  whether  clean,  sensible  wit  or  sheer 
nonsense — whatever  provokes  t  tnth  and  makes 
a  man  jollier — is  a  gift  from  heaven. 

Laughter  is  a  very  important  element  in  a 
successful  career.  Many  a  man  who  could  have 
been  a  success  sleeps  in  a  failure's  grave  to- 


290     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

day  because  he  took  life  too  seriously.  He 
poisoned  the  atmosphere  about  him,  so  that  it 
became  unhealthy,  and  paralyzed  his  own 
powers. 

We  often  hear  people,  especially  delicate 
women  who  have  nervous  dyspepr  -"  say  they 
do  not  understand  how  it  is  that  they  can  go 
out  to  late  suppers  or  banquets  and  eat  heartily 
all  sorts  of  incongruous  food  without  feeling 
any  inconvenience  afterward. 

They  do  not  realize  that  it  is  due  to  the 
change  in  the  mental  attitude.  They  have  had 
a  good  time;  they  have  enjoyed  themselves. 
The  lively  conversation,  the  jokes  which  caused 
them  to  laugh  heartily,  the  bright,  cheerful  en- 
vironment, completely  changed  their  mental 
attitude,  and  of  course  these  conditions  were 
reflected  in  the  digestion  and  every  other  part 
of  the  system,  for  lar^hter  and  good  cheer  are 
enemies  of  dyspep'O  •.  Anything  which  will 
divert  the  dyspeptic's  mind  from  his  ailments 
will  improve  his  digestion.  When  they  were  at 
home  worryini^  over  their  health,  swallowing  a 
little  dyspe;''Cuewith  every  mouthful  of  food, 
of  course  these  women  could  not  assimilate 
what  they  ate.  But  when  they  were  having  a 
jolly  good  time  they  forgot  their  ailments,  and 
were  surprised  afterward  to  find  that  they  had 


GOOD   CHEER  291 

enjoyed  their  food  and  that  it  did  not  hurt 
them.  The  whole  process  is  mental. 

Use  the  laugh-cure — the  fun-cure — in  the 
home.  Throw  away  the  drugs  and  save  doc- 
tors' bills. 

"  The  power  of  cheerfulness  to  do  good," 
says  Dr.  Sanderson,  "...  is  not  an  artificial 
stimulus  of  the  tissues,  to  be  followed  by  reac- 
tion and  greater  waste,  as  is  the  case  with  many 
drugs ;  but  the  effect  of  cheerfulness  is  an  ac- 
tual life-giving  influence  throughout  a  normal 
channel,  the  results  of  which  reach  every  part 
of  the  system.  It  brightens  the  eye,  makes 
ruddy  the  countenance,  brings  elasticity  to  the 
step,  and  promotes  all  the  inner  force  by  which 
life  is  sustained.  The  blood  circulates  more 
freely,  the  oxygen  comes  to  its  home  in  the 
tissues,  health  is  promoted  and  disease  is  ban- 
ished." 

There  is  no  drug  which  can  compete  with 
cheerfulness.  A  jolly,  whole-hearted,  sunny 
physician  is  worth  more  than  all  the  remedies 
in  an  apothecary  shop.  What  magic  we  often 
see  wrought  by  the  arrival  of  the  physician, 
especially  when  the  patient  is  frightened  and 
nervous.  Discouragement,  the  hopeless  expres- 
sion, are  driven  away  by  his  reassuring,  con- 
fident smile,  and  many  times  even  severe  pain 


292     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

is  relieved  by  his  mental  uplift  and  encour- 
agement. 

How  eagerly  the  patient  watches  the  doc- 
tor's face  for  a  ray  of  hope.  No  drug  could 
work  such  magic  as  does  that  one  encourag- 
ing look. 

A  friend  remembers  how,  as  a  boy,  when  the 
old  family  physician  used  to  come  to  the  home 
so  full  of  life  and  joy  and  gladness,  with  sun- 
shine beaming  from  every  pore,  members  of 
the  family  would  feel  absolutely  ashamed  to 
be  sick,  ashamed  to  think  that  God's  work, 
which  was  made  perfect,  should  need  patch- 
ing up. 

"  The  whole  atmosphere  of  the  house,"  he 
said,  "  seemed  to  change  the  minute  the  doctor 
entered.  His  hearty  laugh,  ringing  through  the 
rooms,  as  he  rubbed  his  hands  before  the  fire 
on  a  cold  winter  day,  and  his  mere  presence, 
did  us  more  good  than  pills  or  potions.  Some- 
how, the  very  thought  of  his  coming  after  we 
had  sent  for  him  seemed  to  drive  away  our 
troubles." 

One  of  the  most  successful  physicians  in 
Boston  gives  very  little  medicine.  His  merry 
face  and  cheerful  disposition  take  the  sting 
out  of  pain.  He  replaces  despair  with  hope,  dis- 
couragement with  confidence  and  a  cheerful 


GOOD   CHEER  293 

reassurance,  so  that  the  sick  feel  a  decided 
uplift  in  his  presence  and  are  filled  with  a 
stronger  determination  to  get  well. 

Too  many  of  us  dry  up  and  become  stale, 
uninteresting,  and  abnormal  from  lack  of  the 
development  of  the  cheerful  habit.  There  is  no 
one  thing  which  will  do  so  much  for  the  life, 
for  health,  for  happiness,  as  the  cultivation  of 
the  cheerful  habit,  the  habit  of  flinging  out 
one's  joy  and  gladness  everywhere,  radiating 
good  cheer. 

The  constantly  increasing  success  of  the 
vaudeville  playhouses  and  other  places  of 
amusement  all  over  this  country  shows  the  tre- 
mendous demand  in  the  human  economy  for 
fun.  Most  people  do  not  appreciate  that  this 
demand  must  be  met  in  some  form  or  the  char- 
acter will  be  warped  and  defective. 

What  a  complete  revolution  in  your  whole 
physical  and  mental  being  takes  place  after  see- 
ing a  really  funny  play !  You  went  to  the  play 
tired,  jaded,  worn  out,  discouraged.  All  your 
mental  faculties  were  clogged  with  brain  ash ; 
you  could  not  think  clearly.  When  you  came 
home  you  were  a  new  being. 

A  business  man,  on  returning  home  after 
a  perplexing,  exasj^crating,  exhausting  day's 
work,  may  experience  the  same  thing.  Romp- 


294     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ing  and  playing  with  the  children,  spending 
a  jolly  evening  with  his  family  or  friends, 
telling  stories  and  cracking  jokes,  rest  his 
jaded  nerves  and  restore  him  to  his  normal 
condition.  ' 

I  have  been  as  much  refreshed  by  a  good, 
hearty  laugh,  by  listening  to  wholesome  sto- 
ries and  jokes,  by  spending  an  evening  with 
friends  and  having  a  good  time,  as  by  a  long, 
sound  night's  sleep ;  and  I  look  back  upon  such 
experiences  as  little  vacations. 

Anything  that  will  make  a  man  new,  that 
will  clear  the  cobwebs  of  discouragement  from 
his  brain  and  drive  away  fear,  care,  and  worry, 
is  of  practical  value. 

We  should  not  look  upon  fun  and  humor  as 
transitory  things,  but  as  solid,  lasting,  perma- 
nent medicinal  influences  on  the  whole  char- 
acter. 

Why  should  not  having  a  good  time  form  a 
part  of  our  daily  programme  ?  Why  should  not 
this  enter  into  our  great  life-plan  ?  Why  should 
we  be  serious  and  gloomy  because  we  have  to 
work  for  a  living? 

There  is  a  moral  as  well  as  healing  influ- 
ence in  things  which  amuse  and  make  us 
enjoy  life.  No  one  was  ever  spoiled  by  good 
humor,  but  tens  of  thousands  have  been  made 


GOOD    CHEER  295 

better  by  it.  Fun  is  a  food  as  necessary  fo  the 
wholeness  of  man  as  bread. 

Who  can  estimate  the  good  our  great  hu- 
morists have  done  the  world  in  helping  to  drive 
away  care  and  sorrow,  in  lightening  burdens, 
in  taking  drudgery  out  of  dreary  occupations, 
in  cheering  the  discouraged  and  the  lonely? 

A  writer  known  for  his  cheerful  sayings 
received  a  letter  from  a  lady,  stating  that  one 
of  his  humorous  poems  had  saved  her  life. 

Any  one  who  has  brought  relief  to  distressed 
souls,  who  has  lifted  the  burden  from  saddened, 
sorrowing  hearts,  has  done  as  much  good  as 
any  of  those  who  have  been  civilization 
builders. 

Few  of  us  really  understand  the  full  value 
of  good  cheer  and  laughter  as  physiological 
and  psychological  factors.  An  eminent  French 
surgeon  says  that  we  ought  to  train  children 
to  habits  of  mirth. 

"Encourage  your  child  to  be  merry  and 
laugh  aloud,"  he  says.  "  A  good  hearty  laugh 
expands  the  chest  and  makes  the  blood  bound 
merrily  along.  Commend  me  to  a  good  laugh 
— not  to  a  little  snickering  laugh,  but  to  one 
that  will  sound  right  through  the  house." 

We  realize  that  it  is  very  necessary  to  train 
the  mind  in  business  principles ;  to  train  cer- 


296     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

tain  faculties  to  do  special  things,  but  do  not 
seem  to  think  it  necessary  to  cultivate  the  habit 
of  cheerfulness.  Yet  not  even  an  education  is 
as  necessary  to  the  child  as  the  formation  of 
the  cheerful  habit.  This  ought  to  be  regarded 
as  the  first  essential  of  the  preparation  for  life 
— the  training  of  the  mind  toward  sunshine ; 
the  developing  of  every  possibility  of  the  cheer- 
ful faculties. 

The  first  duty  we  owe  a  child  is  to  teach  it 
to  fling  out  its  inborn  gladness  and  joy  with 
the  same  freedom  and  abandon  as  the  bobolink 
does  when  it  makes  the  meadow  joyous  with 
its  song.  Suppression  of  the  fun-loving  nature 
of  a  child  means  the  suppression  of  its  mental 
and  moral  faculties.  Joy  will  go  out  of  the  heart 
of  a  child  after  a  while  if  it  is  continually  sup- 
pressed. Mothers  who  are  constantly  caution- 
ing the  little  ones  not  to  do  this  or  not  to  do 
that,  telling  them  not  to  laugh  or  make  a  noise, 
until  they  lose  their  naturalness  and  become 
little  old  men  and  women,  do  not  realize  the 
harm  they  are  doing. 

An  eminent  writer  says :  "  Children  without 
hilarity  will  never  amount  to  much.  Trees 
without  blossoms  will  never  bear  fruit," 

There  is  an  irrepressible  longing  for  amuse- 
ment, for  rollicking  fun,  in  young  people,  and 


GOOD   CHEER  297 

if  these  longings  were  more  fully  met  in  the 
home  it  would  not  be  so  difficult  to  keep  the  boy 
and  girl  under  the  parental  roof.  I  always  think 
there  is  something  wrong  when  the  father  or 
the  children  are  so  very  uneasy  to  get  out  of 
the  house  at  night  and  to  go  off  "  somewhere  " 
where  they  will  have  a  good  time.  A  happy, 
joyous  home  is  a  powerful  magnet  to  child  and 
man.  The  sacred  memory  of  it  has  kept  many 
a  person  from  losing  his  self-respect,  and  from 
the  commission  of  crime. 

Fun  is  the  cheapest  and  best  medicine  in  the 
world  for  your  children  as  well  as  for  your- 
self. Give  it  to  them  in  good  large  doses.  It  will 
not  only  save  you  doctors'  bills,  but  it  will  also 
help  to  make  your  children  happier,  and  will 
improve  their  chances  in  life.  We  should  not 
need  half  so  many  prisons,  insane  asylums,  and 
almshouses  if  all  children  had  a  happy  child- 
hood. 

The  very  fact  that  the  instinct  to  play — the 
love  of  fun — is  so  imperious  in  the  child, 
shows  a  great  necessity  in  its  nature  which  if 
suppressed  will  leave  a  famine  in  its  life. 

A  sunny,  joyous,  happy  childhood  is  to  the 
individual  what  a  rich  soil  and  genial  sun  are 
to  the  young  plant.  If  the  early  conditions  are 
not  favorable,  the  plant  becomes  starved  and 


298     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

stunted  and  the  results  cannot  be  corrected  in 
the  later  trees.  It  is  now  or  never  with  the 
plant.  This  is  true  with  the  human  plant.  A 
starved,  suppressed,  stunted  childhood  makes 
a  dwarfed  man.  A  joyful,  happy,  fun-loving 
environment  develops  powers,  resources,  and 
possibilities  which  would  remain  dormant  in  a 
cold,  dull,  repressing  environment. 

How  many  lives  are  blank,  dry,  as  uninter- 
esting as  a  desert  because  cheerfulness  was 
crushed  out  of  the  child  life;  because  the  joys 
of  childhood  were  never  developed.  Their 
young  lives  were  suppressed  and  all  that  was 
sweet  and  juicy  crushed  out  of  them  in  their 
early  years. 

Everywhere  we  see  men  and  women  discon- 
tented and  unhappy  because  of  the  lack  of  play 
in  their  early  life.  When  the  young  clay  finally 
hardened  it  was  unable  to  respond  to  a  joyful 
environment. 

Happy  recreation  has  a  very  subtle  influence 
upon  the  mental  faculties,  which  are  empha- 
sized and  heightened  by  it.  How  our  courage 
is  strengthened,  our  determination,  our  ambi- 
tion, our  whole  outlook  on  life  changed  by  it. 
There  seems  to  be  a  subtle  fluid  from  humor 
and  fun  which  penetrates  the  entire  being, 
bathes  all  the  mental  faculties,  and  washes  out 


GOOD   CHEER  299 

the  brain  ash  and  debris  from  exhausted  cere- 
brum and  muscles.  We  have  all  experienced 
the  transforming,  refreshing,  rejuvenating 
power  of  good,  wholesome  fun. 

Many  people  make  anything  like  joy  or  hap- 
piness impossible  by  dwelling  upon  the  dis- 
agreeable, the  unfortunate,  unlucky  things  of 
life.  They  always  see  the  ugly,  the  crooked, 
the  wrong  side  of  things. 

I  once  lived  in  a  clerg}nTian's  family  where 
I  scarcely  heard  a  person  laugh  in  months. 
It  seemed  to  be  a  part  of  the  inmates'  religion 
to  wear  long  faces  and  to  be  sober-minded  and 
solemn.  They  did  not  have  much  use  for  this 
world ;  they  seemed  to  be  living  for  the  world 
to  come ;  and  whenever  the  minister  heard  me 
laugh,  he  would  remind  me  that  I  had  bet- 
ter be  thinking  of  my  "  latter  end,"  and  pre- 
paring for  the  death  which  might  come  at  any 
moment.  Laughter  was  considered  frivolous 
and  worldly ;  and  as  for  playing  in  the  house 
— it  would  not  be  tolerated  for  an  instant. 

Melancholy,  solemnity  used  to  be  regarded  as 
a  sign  of  spirituality,  but  it  is  now  looked  upon 
as  the  imprint  of  a  morbid  mind.  There  is  no 
religion  in  it.  True  religion  is  full  of  hope,  sun- 
shine, optimism,  and  cheerfulness.  It  is  joyous 
and  glad  and  beautiful.  There  is  no  Christian- 


300     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

ity  in  the  ugly,  the  discordant,  the  sad.  The 
reHgion  which  Christ  taught  was  bright  and 
beautiful.  The  sunshine,  the  "  lilies  of  the 
field,"  the  "birds  of  the  air,"  the  hills,  the 
valleys,  the  trees,  the  mountains,  the  brooks — 
all  things  beautiful — were  in  His  teaching. 
There  was  no  cold,  dry  theology  in  it.  It  was 
just  happy  Christianity ! 

Cheerfulness  is  one  of  the  great  miracle- 
workers  of  the  world.  It  reenforces  the  whole 
man,  doubles  and  trebles  his  power,  and  gives 
new  meaning  to  his  life.  No  man  is  a  failure 
until  he  has  lost  his  cheerfulness,  his  optimistic 
outlook.  The  man  who  does  his  best  and  car- 
ries a  smiling  face  and  keeps  cheerful  in  the 
midst  of  discouragements,  when  things  go 
wrong  and  the  way  is  dark  and  doubtful,  is 
sure  to  win. 

"  Laugh  until  I  come  back,"  was  a  noted 
clergyman's  "good-by"  salutation.  It  is  a  good 
one  for  us  all. 


XVII.    THE    SUN-DIAL'S    MOTTO 


XVII.   THE    SUN-DIAL'S   MOTTO 


N  a  famous  sun-dial  it  is 
written :  "  I  record  none  but 
hours  of  sunshine."  Every 
human  life  would  be  beauti- 
fied by  making  this  a  life 
motto. 

What  a  great  thing  it 
would  be  if  we  could  only  learn  to  wipe  out 
of  our  memories  forever  everything  unpleas- 
ant, everything  which  brings  up  bitter  memo- 
ries and  unfortunate  associations  and  depress- 
ing, discouraging  suggestions!  If  we  could 
only  keep  the  mind  filled  with  beautiful 
thoughts  which  uplift  and  encourage,  the 
efficiency  of  our  lives  would  be  multiplied. 

Are  not  some  people  so  unfortunately  con- 
stituted that  they  are  unable  to  remember 
pleasant,  agreeable  things?  When  you  meet 
them  they  always  have  some  sad  story  to  tell, 
something  that  has  happened  to  them  or  is 
surely  going  to  happen.  They  tell  you  about 
the  accidents,  narrow  escapes,  losses,  and  af- 
flictions they  have  had.  The  bright  days  and 
happy  experiences  they  seldom  mention.  They 
recall  the  disagreeable,  the  ugly,  the  discord- 
ant. The  rainy  days  make  such  an  impression 

303 


304     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

upon  their  minds  that  they  seem  to  think  it 
rains  about  all  of  the  time. 

There  are  others  who  do  just  the  reverse. 
They  always  talk  of  the  pleasant  things,  good 
times,  and  agreeable  experiences  of  their  lives. 
I  know  some  of  these  people  who  have  had  all 
sorts  of  misfortunes,  losses,  sorrows,  and  yet 
they  so  seldom  speak  of  them  or  refer  to  them, 
that  you  would  think  they  never  had  had  any- 
thing in  their  lives  but  good  fortune,  that  they 
had  never  had  any  enemies,  that  everybody 
had  been  kind  to  them.  These  are  the  people 
who  attract  us,  the  people  we  love. 

The  habit  of  turning  one's  sunny  side 
toward  others  is  a  result  of  the  practice  of 
holding  charitable,  loving,  cheerful  thoughts 
perpetually  in  the  mind ;  while  the  gloomy,  sar- 
castic, mean  character  is  formed  by  harboring 
hard,  uncharitable,  unkind  thoughts  until  the 
brain  becomes  set  toward  the  dark,  so  that  the 
life  can  only  radiate  gloom. 

Some  people's  minds  are  like  a  junk  shop; 
they  contain  things  of  considerable  value 
mixed  with  a  great  deal  of  rubbish.  There  is 
no  system  or  order  in  them.  These  minds  retain 
everything — good,  bad,  or  indifferent.  They 
can  never  bear  to  throw  anything  away,  for 
fear  it  might  be  of  service  at  some  time,  so 


THE   SUN-DIAL'S    MOTTO       305 

that  their  mental  storehouses  are  clogged  with 
all  sorts  of  rubbish.  If  these  people  would  only 
have  a  regular  house-cleaning  and  throw  away 
all  the  rubbish,  everything  of  a  doubtful  value, 
and  systematize  and  arrange  what  is  left,  they 
might  amount  to  something;  but  no  one  can 
do  good  work  with  his  mind  full  of  discord 
and  confusion. 

Get  rid  of  the  mental  rubbish.  Do  not  go 
through  life  burdened  with  non-essential, 
meaningless  things.  Everywhere  we  see  people 
who  are  handicapped,  doing  everything  to  a 
great  disadvantage,  because  they  never  will 
let  go  of  an}'thing.  They  are  like  the  over-care- 
ful housekeeper,  who  never  throws  anything 
away,  for  fear  it  may  be  of  use  in  the  future, 
and  whose  attic  and  woodshed,  and  every 
closet  and  corner  in  the  house,  are  piled  up 
with  rubbish  which  "  might  be  wanted  some 
time."  The  practice  of  throwing  away  rubbish 
of  all  kinds  is  of  inestimable  value. 

Occasionally  we  come  across  minds  that  are 
like  public  cabs.  Now  you  see  in  them  a  good- 
looking  man  or  woman — a  beautiful  character ; 
a  little  later  a  drunkard  or  vicious  woman.  In 
other  words,  the  cabman  picks  up  the  first 
customer  he  finds,  not  caring  whether  he  is 
good  or  bad.  So  this  order  of  mind  picks  up 


3o6     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

all  sorts  of  ideas,  good,  bad,  and  indifferent, 
without  selection  or  choice.  It  is  like  a  sponge ; 
it  absorbs  everything  that  comes  near  it.  It  is 
impossible  for  such  a  mind  to  be  clean,  pure, 
free  from  enemy  thoughts,  conflicting  thought 
currents,  inharmonious  vibrations  or  demoral- 
izing influences. 

One  of  the  greatest  accomplishments  of  the 
finest  character  is  the  ability  to  order  his  mind 
and  to  exclude  from  it  all  the  enemy  thoughts 
— thoughts  that  bring  friction  and  discord  into 
the  life,  thoughts  that  depress,  that  stunt,  that 
darken. 

No  mind  can  do  good  work  when  clouded 
with  unhappy  or  vicious  thoughts.  The  mental 
sky  must  be  clear  or  there  can  be  no  enthu- 
siasm, no  brightness,  clearness,  or  efficiency  in 
our  mental  work. 

If  you  would  do  the  maximum  of  which  you 
are  capable,  keep  the  mind  filled  with  sunshine, 
with  beauty  and  truth,  with  cheerful,  uplifting 
thoughts.  Bury  everything  that  makes  you  un- 
happy and  discordant,  everything  that  cramps 
your  freedom,  that  worries  you,  before  it  buries 
you. 

The  mental  temple  was  not  given  us  for  the 
storing  of  low,  base,  mean  things.  It  was  in- 
tended for  the  abode  of  the  gods,  for  the  treas- 


THE    SUX-DIAL'S    AlOTTO       307 

VLTing  of  high  purposes,  grand  aims,  noble 
aspirations. 

It  is  a  shame,  and  will  some  time  be  looked 
upon  as  a  disgrace,  for  a  human  being  bearing 
the  stamp  of  divinity  to  be  dominated  by  base, 
unworthy,  demoralizing  thoughts.  The  time 
will  come  when  one  will  be  as  much  ashamed 
of  harboring  a  disagreeable,  discordant,  con- 
taminating thought  as  he  would  feel  if  he  were 
caught  stealing.  When  a  man  once  gets  a  true 
perception  of  himself,  of  his  grandeur  and  dig- 
nity, and  infinite  possibilities,  he  will  not  allow 
himself  to  be  dominated  by  the  mental  enemies 
which  now  dog  him  from  the  cradle  to  the 
grave. 

Man  was  not  made  to  express  discord,  but 
harmony ;  to  express  beauty,  truth,  love,  and 
happiness ;  wholeness,  not  halfness ;  complete- 
ness, not  incompleteness. 

No  one  has  learned  the  art  of  true  living 
until  he  has  trained  his  mind  to  forget  every 
experience  from  which  he  can  no  longer  derive 
any  advantage — that  will  hinder  his  progress 
and  make  him  unhappy.  Xo  matter  how  great 
a  mistake  you  have  made,  it  should  be  for- 
gotten, buried  forever.  Don't  keep  digging  it 
up.  You  have  learned  the  lesson  there  is  in  it 
for  you.  The  only  good  use  you  can  make  of 


3o8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

an  unfortunate  mistake  is  to  make  it  a  start- 
ing-point for  something  better. 

What  is  there  to  be  gained  by  harboring  in- 
juries, by  dwelhng  upon  misfortunes,  by  mor- 
bid worrying  over  our  faikires?  Did  it  ever 
pay  to  harbor  shghts  and  imagined  insults  ? 

There  is  only  one  thing  to  do  with  a  dis- 
agreeable thought  or  experience,  and  that  is, 
get  rid  of  it ;  hurl  it  out  of  your  mind  as  you 
would  a  thief  out  of  your  house.  You  cannot 
afford  to  give  shelter  to  enemies  of  your  peace 
and  comfort. 

If  you  have  hard  feelings,  unkindly  thoughts 
toward  others,  if  you  are  trying  to  "  get 
square  "  with  some  one  who  has  injured  you, 
or  if  you  are  suffering  from  jealousy,  envy,  or 
hatred,  dispel  these  killing  emotions,  these  dis- 
cordant feelings,  as  vicious  enemies.  Say  to 
yourself :  "  This  is  not  manly,  this  is  not 
friendly,  this  is  not  humane;  these  are  the 
thoughts  for  the  base,  degraded ;  they  are  not 
the  sort  of  thoughts  for  one  who  is  trying  to 
stand  for  something  in  the  world." 

So  long  as  you  harbor  the  hatred  thought, 
the  jealous  thought,  the  revenge,  worry,  anx- 
iety, or  fear  thought,  you  must  suffer — just  as 
a  pedestrian  with  gravel  in  his  shoes  must 
suffer  until  he  removes  it. 


THE    SUN-DIAL'S    MOTTO       309 

We  cannot  harbor  any  grudge,  any  hatred 
against  another  without  suffering  a  frightful 
loss  in  our  own  nature.  It  coarsens,  ani- 
maHzes,  brutalizes  us.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
holding  of  the  kindly  feeling,  the  love  thought, 
the  helpful,  charitable,  magnanimous  thought, 
ennobles  the  life,  beautifies  the  character,  en- 
riches the  nature.  Our  mental  attitude  gives 
its  color  to  the  life.  What  it  is,  we  are  like 
toward  others.  If  that  is  hateful,  we  are  hate- 
ful ;  if  that  is  revengeful,  we  have  a  revenge- 
ful disposition.  We  are  like  our  ideals.  I  have 
never  known  a  really  good  person  who  had 
a  mean,  contemptible  estimate  of  other  people, 
or  who  was  always  criticising  them,  question- 
ing their  motives,  imputing  to  them  low,  self- 
ish motives. 

Do  not  go  about  nursing  some  fancied 
wrong  or  insult  or  grudge  against  somebody, 
cherishing  unkind  feelings  toward  any  one. 
Such  thoughts  poison  the  brain.  They  sting 
and  corrupt.  Bitterness  in  the  heart  is  like  a 
leaven,  which  works  its  way  through  the  entire 
system.  The  constant  dwelling  upon  bitter 
things  saps  your  vitality  and  lessens  your  abil- 
ity to  do  something  worth  while.  These  are 
enemies  of  your  youthfulness,  of  your  happi- 
ness and  success.  You  cannot  afford  to  have 


3IO     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

them  festering  in  your  heart  and  tormenting 
your  mind. 

Do  not  remember  anything  disagreeable 
which  can  cripple  your  efficiency  or  mar  your 
work.  Just  wipe  it  out  of  your  memory,  no 
matter  how  much  it  may  hurt  your  pride  to 
do  so.  Your  great  aim  should  be  progress,  and 
you  cannot  afiford  to  have  a  lot  of  rubbish 
clinging  to  you  which  keeps  you  back  or  hin- 
ders your  speed  in  your  life  race.  You  need 
all  your  energv*,  every  ounce  of  power  you 
possess,  for  the  race.  Husband  your  strength 
for  the  main  issue.  Alake  every  ounce  of  force 
tell. 

Make  up  your  mind  to  be  large,  gener- 
ous, and  charitable,  to  forget  slights  or  in- 
juries, not  to  harbor  malice,  but  to  remember 
that  most  people  are  kind  at  heart  and  would 
not  intentionally  slight  or  injure  you.  Show 
your  charitable  side  to  every  one.  Be  cheerful, 
kind,  and  helpful,  no  matter  what  others  may 
do  to  you  or  say  about  you.  Learn  always  to 
put  a  charitable  interpretation  upon  people's 
motives  and  you  will  be  surprised  at  the  effect 
of  your  attitude,  not  only  upon  yourself,  but 
also  upon  those  with  whom  you  are  associated. 
The  kindly,  helpful,  sympathetic  thought  held 
toward  your  enemies  will  work  like  a  leaven  in 


THE    SUN-DIAL'S    MOTTO       311 

their  characters  and  change  them  for  the  better 
a  thousand  times  quicker  than  seeking  revenge 
or  trying  to  get  even  with  them. 

The  man  who  radiates  good  cheer  to  every- 
body, who  says  kind  things  about  people,  who 
sees  in  his  fellow-man  the  man  God  made, 
the  immortal,  perfect  man — not  the  sin- 
racked,  the  vice-scarred  man — is  the  one  we 
love  and  admire. 

Why  should  we  remember  the  unkind  things 
people  say  of  us?  If  we  practised  the  art  of 
forgetting  these  things  we  should  learn  to  love 
where  we  once  hated,  to  admire  where  w^e  de- 
spised, to  help  where  we  hindered,  to  praise 
where  we  criticised. 

The  good  excludes  the  bad ;  the  higher  al- 
ways shuts  out  the  lower ;  the  greater  motive, 
the  grander  affection  excludes  the  lesser,  the 
lower.  The  good  is  more  than  a  match  for 
the  bad. 

A  wpman  who  has  had  great  sorrows  and 
afflictions  says :  *'  I  made  the  resolution  that  I 
would  never  sadden  any  one  with  my  troubles. 
I  have  laughed  and  told  jokes  when  I  could 
have  wept.  I  have  smiled  in  the  face  of  every 
misfortune.  I  have  tried  to  let  every  one  go 
away  from  my  presence  with  a  happy  word  and 
bright  thought  to  carry  with  them.  Happiness  ' 


312     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

makes  happiness,  and  I  myself  am  happier 
than  I  would  have  been  had  I  sat  down  and 
bemoaned  my  fate." 

When  you  were  in  the  dumps,  "  blue  "  and 
discouraged,  worried  and  almost  ready  to  give 
up  the  struggle  for  the  thing  you  were  trying 
to  reach,  did  you  never  meet  some  sunny, 
jovial,  humorous  character,  through  whose  in- 
fluence it  seemed  that  the  whole  world  was 
changed  in  a  few  minutes — the  whole  atmos- 
phere cleared  of  bogies  and  haunting  skeletons 
— and  you  caught  the  contagion  of  the  humor 
and  good  cheer,  and  were  another  person? 
This  was  due  only  to  your  change  of  thought. 
the  new  suggestions  held  in  your  mind.  It  was 
only  a  question  of  the  expulsive  power  of  a 
stronger  motive,  affection,  or  idea.  If  we  only 
knew  the  philosophy  of  this  expulsive  power 
of  a  stronger,  higher  motive  to  drive  out  the 
weaker  or  the  lower,  we  could  quickly  clear 
the  mental  atmosphere  of  all  the  clouds  of 
doubt  and  despair,  of  all  worry  and  anxiety 
and  uncertainty  by  substituting  their  opposites. 

If  we  did  not  harbor  in  the  mind  the  things 
that  are  not  good  for  us,  they  would  not  make 
such  a  lasting  impression  upon  us.  In  fact, 
they  would  not  get  hold  of  us.  It  is  the  har- 
boring of  them,  turning  them  over  and  over, 


THE    SUX-DIAL'S    MOTTO       313 

thinking  of  them,  that  intrenches  them  in  the 
mind. 

The  way  to  get  rid  of  error  is  to  keep  the 
mind  full  of  truth ;  the  way  to  get  rid  of  dis- 
cord is  to  keep  saturated  with  harmony,  the 
love  thought. 

Harmony  is  the  realit}',  the  entity,  the  crea- 
tive force.  The  time  will  come  when  the  child 
will  be  taught  from  the  outset  how  to  protect 
himself  from  insidious  enemies  of  mind  and 
body,  how  to  keep  himself  in  harmony  by  al- 
ways living  in  the  light  of  hope  and  truth, 
where  ghosts  and  hideous  shadows  cannot  live. 
He  will  be  trained  in  the  knowledge  that  truth 
and  beauty,  joy  and  gladness,  harmony,  good- 
will thoughts,  health  thoughts,  will  kill  their 
opposites ;  that  they  have  the  same  effect  upon 
them  that  water  has  upon  fire. 


XVIII.   "AS   YE    SOW 


XVIII.   "AS   YE   SOW" 

Thought  is  another  name  for  fate, 
Choose,  then,  thy  destiny,  and  wait — 
For  love  brings  love,  and  hate  brings  hate. 

— Ella  Wheeler  Wilcox. 


"Beautiful  thoughts  crystallize  into  habits  of  grace 
and  kindness,  which  solidify  into  genial  and  sunny 
circumstances." 


S  it  not  a  strange  fact  that 
while  men  know  with  abso- 
lute ceiiainty  that  what  they 
sow  or  plant  in  the  soil  will 
come  back  to  them  in  exact 
kind,  that  it  is  absolutely  im- 
possible to  sow  corn  and  get 
a  crop  of  wheat,  they  entirely  disregard  this 
law  when  it  comes  to  mental  sowing? 

On  what  principle  can  we  expect  a  crop  of 
happiness  and  contentment  when  for  years  we 
have  been  sowing  seed  thoughts  of  exactly  the 
opposite  character  ?  How  can  we  expect  a  crop 
of  health  when  we  are  all  the  time  sowing  dis- 
ease thought  seeds? 

We  would  think  a  farmer  insane  who  should 
sow  thistle  seeds  all  over  his  farm  and  expect 
to  reap  wheat.  But  we  sow  fear  thoughts, 
worry     thoughts,     anxious     thoughts,     doubt 

317 


3i8     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

thoughts,  and  wonder  that  we  are  not  in  per- 
petual harmony. 

The  harvest  from  our  thoughts  is  just  as 
much  the  result  of  law  as  that  of  the  farmer's 
sowing.  Seed  corn  can  only  produce  corn.  A 
man's  achievement  is  the  harvest,  big  or  little, 
beautiful  or  blighted,  abundant  or  scarce,  ac- 
cording to  the  character  of  the  thoughts  he 
has  sown. 

A  man  who  sows  failure  thoughts  can  no 
more  reap  a  success  harvest  than  the  farmer 
can  get  a  wheat  crop  from  thistles.  If  he  sows 
optimistic  seed,  the  harmony,  health,  purity, 
truth  thoughts,  the  thoughts  of  abundance 
and  prosperity,  of  confidence  and  assurance, 
he  will  reap  a  corresponding  harvest;  but  if 
he  sows  discord  he  will  reap  discordant  con- 
ditions. 

Harmony  is  power;  discord  is  weakness. 
Pessimistic  thoughts  are  thistles  which  check 
the  good  products  and  ruin  the  harvest. 

How  simple  our  great  life  problems  would 
become  if  we  could  only  realize  that  the  mental 
laws  are  just  as  scientific  as  the  physical  laws ! 
Every  thought  generated  in  the  brain  is  a  seed 
which  must  produce  its  harvest — thistle  or 
rose,  weed  or  wheat. 

Our  careers  are  the  harvests  of  our  mental 


"AS   YE    SOW"  319 

sowing.  If  we  sow  the  wind  we  shall  reap  the 
whirlwind. 

If  we  sow  the  thoughts  of  abundance,  of 
plenty,  we  shall  reap  accordingly;  but  if  we 
sow  the  mean,  pinched,  sting}-  failure  thought 
we  shall  reap  a  poverty  harvest.  In  other 
words,  the  life  harvest  must  follow  the  thought. 
When  we  see  a  selfish,  repulsive  face,  we  know 
that  it  is  the  harvest  of  selfish,  vicious  sowing. 
On  the  other  hand,  when  we  see  a  calm  inspir- 
ing face,  we  know  that  it  has  come  from  the 
sowing  of  harmonious,  helpful  thought  seeds. 

If  there  is  any  one  law  of  the  universe  em- 
phasized over  and  above  all  others,  it  is  that 
like  produces  like  everywhere  and  always. 

A  person  who  should  take  a  knife  and  begin 
to  slash  his  flesh  until  the  blood  flowed  would 
be  shut  up  in  an  insane  asylum ;  but  we  are  all 
the  time  slashing  our  mental  selves  with  the 
edged  thought-tools — hatred,  revenge,  anger, 
jealousy — and  yet  we  think  ourselves  sane, 
normal. 

Every  thought  is  a  seed  which  produces  a 
mental  plant  exactly  like  itself.  If  there  is 
venom  in  the  seed  thoui^ht-platit  there  zvill  be 
venom  in  the  fruit  which  will  poison  the  life, 
which  will  destroy  happiness  and  efficiency. 

If  you   sell  yourself  to  your  desires,   you 


320     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

must  expect  the  harvest  to  correspond.  A  man 
who  sells  himself  to  a  selfish  life,  a  life  of  get- 
ting and  never  giving,  must  not  complain  if 
there  are  thistles  and  thorns  in  his  harvest. 
Life  is  just  to  us.  It  gives  us  what  we  pay  for. 
The  truth  is,  many  of  us  ask  for  things  with- 
out being  willing  to  pay  the  price,  and,  of 
course,  we  receive  only  as  we  pay,  for  Nature 
keeps  a  cash  store.  She  gives  us  everything  we 
pay  for ;  we  take  away  nothing  without  leaving 
the  price. 

The  coming  man  will  know  that  if  he  wants 
to  produce  a  crop  of  prosperity  he  must  not 
sow  failure  or  poverty  seeds,  seeds  of  dis- 
couragement or  doubt.  He  will  sow  the  seed 
that  will  produce  the  crop  he  wants.  If  he 
wants  to  produce  a  character-crop  of  beauty, 
sweetness,  and  loveliness,  he  will  sow  the  seeds 
of  kijidness,  love,  and  helpfulness ;  and  he  will 
know  that  if  he  sows  seeds  of  hatred,  jeal- 
ousy, bitterness,  and  revenge  he  will  get  the 
same  kind  of  a  crop — hideous,  noxious  weeds. 

The  coming  man  will  live  scientifically.  He 
will  know  that  there  is  only  one  way  to  pro- 
duce physical  harmony,  vigor,  strength ;  that 
is,  by  sowing  thought-seeds  which  are  akin  to 
the  health  crop  he  seeks.  He  will  be  just  as 
certain  of  the  character  of  his  thought-crop  as 


"AS   YE    SOW"  321 

the  farmer  is  certain  that  his  harvest  will  cor- 
respond with  his  seed. 

The  body  is  simply  a  reflection  of  the  mind ; 
it  cannot  be  an}'thing  else.  It  would  be  impos- 
sible for  a  person  to  hold  only  beautiful,  lov- 
ing thoughts  in  the  mind  and  not  have  the 
body  correspond  and  come  into  harmony  with 
the  habitual  thinking.  It  is  only  a  question  of 
time.  There  is  no  guess-work  about  the  proc- 
esses. There  is  an  absolutely  inexorable  law: 
Like  must  produce  like. 

It  is  impossible  for  a  thief  to  injure  the  per- 
son he  steals  from  half  so  much  as  he  injures 
himself.  He  inconveniences  his  victim,  but 
stabs  himself  with  a  venomous  weapon.  We 
are  so  constituted  that  it  is  impossible  to  injure 
another  willingly  without  injury  to  ourselves. 
If  we  would  be  good  to  ourselves  we  must 
be  good  to  others  also.  We  cannot  possibly 
strike  our  neighbor  without  receiving  the 
blow  ourselves.  This  is  the  new  philosophy 
which  Christ  taught.  Before  his  day  it  was 
"  An  eye  for  an  eye,"  an  unkindness  for  an 
unkindness,  a  thrust  for  a  thrust,  a  blow  for 
a  blow ;  but  he  taught  that  we  must  not  strike 
back.  "  Ye  have  heard  that  it  hath  been  said. 
An  eye  for  an  eye,  and  a  tooth  for  a  tooth : 
but  I  say  unto  you,  That  ye  resist  not  evil :  but 


3^2     PEACE,  POWER,  AND  PLENTY 

whosoever  shall  smite  thee  on  thy  right  cheek, 
turn  to  him  the  other  also." 

"  Ye  have  heard  that  it  hath  been  said.  Thou 
shalt  love  thy  neighbor,  and  hate  thine  enemy. 
But  I  say  unto  you.  Love  your  enemies,  bless 
them  that  curse  you,  do  good  to  them  that  hate 
you,  and  pray  for  them  which  despitefully  use 
you  and  persecute  you."  This  is  as  scientific 
as  the  laws  of  chemistry  or  mathematics. 

The  coming  man  will  find  that  indulgence  in 
retaliation  for  real  or  fancied  injury,  indul- 
gence in  hatred  or  revenge,  will  only  rob  him 
of  power  and  mar  his  own  achievement. 

The  infant  puts  his  hand  in  the  flame  or 
on  the  hot  stove  until  the  pain  teaches  him 
better.  After  we  have  tortured  ourselves  with 
thoughts  which  tear  and  lacerate  us,  after  we 
have  had  experience  enough  of  this  kind,  we 
shall  learn  that  it  is  too  expensive  a  business, 
that  we  cannot  afford  to  pay  such  a  price  for 
the  sake  of  ''  getting  square "  with  another. 
Self-protection  will  keep  us  from  it  when  we 
know  enough. 

We  may  complain  of  our  condition  to-day, 
but  we  are  simply  reaping  what  we  sowed  yes- 
terday. There  is  no  dodging  this  reaping.  The 
only  way  to  get  a  different  harvest  to-morrow 
is  to  sow  differently  to-day.  Everything  we  do, 


"AS    YE    SOW"  323 

every  thought  that  passes  through  our  mind, 
is  a  seed  which  we  throw  out  into  the  soil,  the 
world,  and  which  must  give  a  harvest  like 
itself.  Many  people  complain  because  their 
harvest  is  so  full  of  thorns,  thistles,  and  weeds ; 
but  if  they  analyzed  their  lives  they  would  find 
that  they  had  been  sowing  seeds  of  selfishness, 
jealousy,  and  envy.  If  they  had  sown  seeds  of 
unselfishness,  kindness,  happiness,  and  love, 
they  would  have  had  a  very  different  kind  of 
harvest. 

The  time  will  come  when  an  intelligent  per- 
son will  no  more  think  of  indulging  a  cruel, 
envious,  jealous  thought  toward  another  than 
he  would  put  his  hand  into  the  flames. 

The  future  man  will  not  lacerate  himself 
with  vicious  thoughts.  He  will  not  stab  him- 
self with  jealousy  or  hatred  thoughts,  with 
fear  or  sick  thoughts,  because,  like  the  child 
who  will  not  put  his  hand  in  the  fire  after 
he  has  learned  that  it  burns,  he  will  want  to 
avoid  the  pain  they  cause. 

THE   END 


7  9  22 


4 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


I 


OCT  U  It 


'OCT  ^  4 


'K07^ 


to^^ 


'f^O^'' 


3 


APR  06  19,9^ 


n- 


-4^»»' 


aeri  9 


315 


0(5> 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    000  530  766    5